initial commit of ebook 33004HEADmain

1 files changed, 9122 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/33004.txt b/33004.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8f8e9a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/33004.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,9122 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Red Rat's Daughter, by Guy Boothby
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Red Rat's Daughter
+
+Author: Guy Boothby
+
+Illustrator: Henry Austin
+
+Release Date: June 27, 2010 [EBook #33004]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RED RAT'S DAUGHTER ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Al Haines
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: Cover art]
+
+
+
+
+
+[Frontispiece: "At last .... he drew her up."]
+
+
+
+
+
+
+THE RED RAT'S DAUGHTER
+
+
+
+By Guy Boothby
+
+
+AUTHOR OF "DOCTOR NIKOLA," "THE BEAUTIFUL WHITE DEVIL,"
+  "PHAROS, THE EGYPTIAN," ETC, ETC
+
+
+
+
+ILLUSTRATED BY HENRY AUSTIN
+
+
+
+
+LONDON
+
+WARD, LOCK AND CO LIMITED
+
+NEW YORK AND MELBOURNE
+
+1899
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+If John Grantham Browne had a fault--which, mind you, I am not prepared
+to admit--it lay in the fact that he was the possessor of a cynical wit
+which he was apt at times to use upon his friends with somewhat
+peculiar effect.  Circumstances alter cases, and many people would have
+argued that he was perfectly entitled to say what he pleased.  When a
+man is worth a hundred and twenty thousand pounds a year--which, worked
+out, means ten thousand pounds a month, three hundred and twenty-eight
+pounds, fifteen shillings and fourpence a day, and four-and-sixpence
+three-farthings, and a fraction over, per minute--he may surely be
+excused if he becomes a little sceptical as to other people's motives,
+and is apt to be distrustful of the world in general.  Old Brown, his
+father, without the "e," as you have doubtless observed, started life
+as a bare-legged street arab in one of the big manufacturing
+centres--Manchester or Birmingham, I am not quite certain which.  His
+head, however, must have been screwed on the right way, for he made few
+mistakes, and everything he touched turned to gold.  At thirty his bank
+balance stood at fifteen thousand pounds; at forty it had turned the
+corner of a hundred thousand; and when he departed this transitory
+life, a young man in everything but years, he left his widow, young
+John's mother--his second wife, I may remark in passing, and the third
+daughter of the late Lord Rushbrooke--upwards of three and a half
+million pounds sterling in trust for the boy.
+
+As somebody wittily remarked at the time, young John, at his father's
+death and during his minority, was a monetary Mohammed--he hovered
+between two worlds: the Rushbrookes, on one side, who had not two
+sixpences to rub against each other, and the Brownes, on the other, who
+reckoned their wealth in millions and talked of thousands as we humbler
+mortals do of half-crowns.  Taken altogether, however, old Brown was
+not a bad sort of fellow.  Unlike so many parvenus, he had the good
+sense, the "e" always excepted, not to set himself up to be what he
+certainly was not.  He was a working-man, he would tell you with a
+twinkle in his eye, and he had made his own way in the world.  He had
+never in his life owed a halfpenny, nor, to the best of his knowledge,
+had he ever defrauded anybody; and, if he _had_ made his fortune out of
+soap, well--and here his eyes would glisten--soap was at least a useful
+article, and would wash his millions cleaner than a good many other
+commodities he might mention.  In his tastes and habits he was
+simplicity itself.  Indeed, it was no unusual sight to see the old
+fellow, preparatory to setting off for the City, coming down the steps
+of his magnificent town house, dressed in a suit of rough tweed, with
+the famous bird's-eye neck-cloth loosely twisted round his throat, and
+the soft felt hat upon his head--two articles of attire which no
+remonstrance on the part of his wife and no amount of ridicule from the
+comic journals could ever induce him to discard.  His stables were full
+of carriages, and there was a cab-rank within a hundred yards of his
+front door, yet no one had ever seen him set foot in either.  The soles
+of his boots were thick, and he had been accustomed to walk all his
+life, he would say, and he had no intention of being carried till he
+was past caring what became of him.  With regard to his son, the apple
+of his eye, and the pride of his old age, his views were entirely
+different.  Nothing was good enough for the boy.  From the moment he
+opened his eyes upon the light, all the luxuries and advantages wealth
+could give were showered upon him.  Before he was short-coated, upwards
+of a million had been placed to his credit at the bank, not to be
+touched until he came of age.  After he had passed from a dame's school
+to Eton, he returned after every holiday with sufficient money loose in
+his pocket to have treated the whole school.  When, in the proper order
+of things, he went on to Christ Church, his rooms were the envy and the
+admiration of the university.  As a matter of fact, he never knew what
+it was to have to deny himself anything; and it says something for the
+lad's nature, and the father's too, I think, that he should have come
+out of it the honest, simple Englishman he was.  Then old John died;
+his wife followed suit six months later; and on his twenty-fifth
+birthday the young man found himself standing alone in the world with
+his millions ready to his hand either to make or mar him.  Little
+though he thought it at the time, there was a sufficiency of trouble in
+store for him.
+
+He had town houses, country seats, moors and salmon-fishings, yachts
+(steam and sailing), racehorses, hunters, coach-horses, polo-ponies,
+and an army of servants that a man might very well shudder even to
+think of.  But he lacked one thing; he had no wife.  Society, however,
+was prepared to remedy this defect.  Indeed, it soon showed that it was
+abnormally anxious to do so.  Before he was twenty-two it had been
+rumoured that he had become engaged to something like a score of girls,
+each one lovelier, sweeter, and boasting blood that was bluer than the
+last.  A wiser and an older head might well have been forgiven had it
+succumbed to the attacks made upon it; but in his veins, mingled with
+the aristocratic Rushbrooke blood, young John had an equal portion of
+that of the old soap-boiler; and where the one led him to accept
+invitations to country houses at Christmas, or to be persuaded into
+driving his fair friends, by moonlight, to supper at the Star and
+Garter, the other enabled him to take very good care of himself while
+he ran such dangerous risks.  In consequence he had attained the
+advanced age of twenty-eight when this story opens, a bachelor, and
+with every prospect of remaining so.  But the Blind Bow-Boy, as every
+one is aware, discharges his bolts from the most unexpected quarters;
+and for this reason you are apt to find yourself mortally wounded in
+the very place, of all others, where you have hitherto deemed yourself
+most invulnerable.
+
+It was the end of the second week in August; Parliament was up; and
+Browne's steam-yacht, the _Lotus Blossom_, twelve hundred tons, lay in
+the harbour of Merok, on the Gieranger Fjord, perhaps the most
+beautiful on the Norwegian coast.  The guests on board had been
+admirably chosen, an art which in most instances is not cultivated as
+carefully as it might be.  An ill-assorted house party is bad enough;
+to bring the wrong men together on the moors is sufficient to spoil an
+otherwise enjoyable holiday; but to ask Jones (who doesn't smoke, who
+is wrapped up in politics, reads his leader in the _Standard_ every
+morning, and who has played whist every afternoon with the same men at
+his club for the last ten years) and De Vere Robinson (who never reads
+anything save the _Referee_ and the _Sportsman_, who detests whist, and
+who smokes the strongest Trichinopolis day and night) to spend three
+weeks cooped up on a yacht would be like putting a kitten and a
+cat-killing fox-terrier into a corn-bin and expecting them to have a
+happy time together.  Browne, however, knew his business, and his
+party, in this particular instance, consisted of the Duchess of
+Matlock, wife of the Secretary of State for Foreign Affairs, and her
+two pretty daughters, the Ladies Iseult and Imogen; Miss Verney, the
+beauty of the season; the Honourable Silas Dobson, the American
+Ambassador; his wife and daughter; George Barrington-Marsh, of the 1st
+Life; and little Jimmy Foote, a man of no permanent address, but of
+more than usual shrewdness, who managed to make a good income out of
+his friends by the exercise of that peculiar talent for pleasing which
+rendered him indispensable whenever and wherever his fellow-creatures
+were gathered together.  In addition to those I have mentioned there
+was a man whose interest in this story is so great that it is necessary
+he should be described at somewhat greater length.
+
+Should you deem it worth your while to make inquiries at any of the
+Chancelleries in order to ascertain whether they happen to be
+acquainted with a certain Monsieur Felix Maas, you would probably be
+surprised to learn that he is as well known to them as--well--shall we
+say the Sultan of Turkey himself? though it would be difficult to
+mention in exactly what capacity.  One thing is quite certain; it would
+be no easy task to find a man possessed of such peculiar
+characteristics as this retiring individual.  At first glance his name
+would appear to settle his nationality once and for all.  He would tell
+you, however, that he has no right to be considered a Dutchman.  At the
+same time he would probably omit to tell you to which kingdom or empire
+he ascribes the honour of his birth.  If you travelled with him you
+would discover that he speaks the language of every country west of the
+Ural Mountains with equal fluency; and though he would appear to be the
+possessor of considerable wealth, he never makes the least parade of
+it.  In fact, his one and only idea in life would seem to be always
+irreproachably dressed and groomed, never to speak unless spoken to,
+and at all times to act as if he took no sort of interest whatever in
+any person or thing save that upon which he happened to be engaged at
+the moment.  When necessity demands it he can be exceedingly amusing;
+he never allows himself to be seen with a man or woman who would be
+likely to cause him the least loss of prestige; he gives charming
+little dinners _a la fourchette_ at his rooms in town twice or thrice
+during the season, and is rumoured to be the author, under a _nom de
+plume_, of one of the best works on Continental politics that has seen
+the light since Talleyrand's day.  So much for Felix Maas.
+
+At one time or another there have been a number of exquisite yachts
+built to satisfy the extravagances of millionaires, but never one so
+perfect in every detail, and so replete with every luxury, as Browne's
+_Lotus Blossom_.  The state-rooms were large and airy; beds occupied
+the places of the usual uncomfortable bunks; the dining-saloon was
+situated amidships, where the vibration of the screw was least felt;
+the drawing-room was arranged aft; and a dainty boudoir for the ladies
+extended across the whole width of the counter.  The smoking-room was
+in a convenient position under the bridge, and the bathrooms, four in
+number, were luxury and completeness itself.  Add to the other
+advantages the presence of Felicien, that prince of _chefs_, and little
+Georges, once so intimately connected with the English Embassy in
+Paris, and it is unnecessary to say more.
+
+Browne himself was an excellent host; and by the time the Norwegian
+coast had been sighted the party had settled down comfortably on board.
+They visited Christiania, the Bukn, Hardanger, and Sogne, and
+eventually found themselves at anchor in the harbour of Merok, on the
+Gieranger Fjord.  It is in this lovely bay, overshadowed by its
+precipitous mountains, that my story may be properly said to commence.
+
+It is sometimes asserted by a class of people who talk of the Eiffel
+Tower as if it were a bit of natural scenery, and of the Matterhorn as
+though it were placed in its present position simply for the
+entertainment of Cook's tourists, that when you have seen one Norwegian
+fjord you have seen them all.  But this statement is, as are the
+majority of such assertions, open to contradiction.  The Ryfylke bears
+no sort of resemblance, save that they are both incomparably grand, to
+the Hardanger, or the Fjaerlands to the Gieranger.  There is, of
+course, the same solemnity and the same overwhelming sense of man's
+insignificance about them all.  But in every other essential they
+differ as completely as Windermere does from the Bitter Lakes of
+Suez--shall we say?--or the Marble Arch from the Bridge of Sighs.
+
+"Knowing what we know, and seeing what we see," Maas remarked
+confidentially to the Duchess of Matlock as they sat in their chairs on
+deck, gazing up at the snow-capped mountains at the head of the fjord,
+"one is tempted to believe that Providence, in designing Europe, laid
+it out with the express intention of pleasing the British tourist."
+
+"I detest tourists," replied her Grace, as she disentangled the straps
+of her field-glasses.  "They cheapen everything, and think nothing of
+discussing their hotel bills in the Temple of the Sphinx, or of
+comparing and grumbling at their _dhobie's_ accounts under the facade
+of the Taj Mahal."
+
+"The inevitable result of a hothouse education, my dear Duchess," said
+Jimmy Foote, who was leaning against the bulwarks.  "Believe a poor man
+who knows, it is just those three annas overcharge in a _dhobie's_ bill
+that spoil the grandeur of the Sphinx and cast a blight over the Great
+Pyramid; as far as I am personally concerned, such an imposition would
+spoil even the Moti Masjid itself."
+
+"People who quarrel over a few annas have no right to travel," remarked
+Mrs. Dobson, with the authority of a woman who rejoices in the
+possession of a large income.
+
+"In that case, one trembles to think what would become of the greater
+portion of mankind," continued Miss Verney, who was drawing on her
+gloves preparatory to going ashore.
+
+"If that were the law, I am afraid I should never get beyond the white
+walls of Old England," said Jimmy Foote, shaking his head; "it is only
+by keeping a sharp eye on the three annas of which we have been
+speaking that I manage to exist at all.  If I might make a suggestion
+to the powers that be, it would be to the effect that a university
+should be founded in some convenient centre--Vienna, for instance.  It
+would be properly endowed, and students might be sent to it from all
+parts of the world.  Competent professors would be engaged, who would
+teach the pupils how to comport themselves in railway trains and on
+board steamboats; who would tell them how to dress themselves to suit
+different countries, in order that they might not spoil choice bits of
+scenery by inartistic colouring.  Above all, I would have them
+instructed in the proper manner of placing their boots outside their
+bedroom doors when they retire to rest in foreign hotels.  I remember a
+ruffian in Paris some years ago (truth compels me to put it on record
+that he was a countryman of yours, Mr. Dobson) who for three weeks
+regularly disturbed my beauty sleep by throwing his boots outside his
+door in the fashion to which I am alluding.  It's my belief he used to
+stand in the centre of his room and pitch them into the corridor,
+taking particular care that they should fall exactly above my head."
+
+"It seems to me that I also have met that man," observed Maas quietly,
+lighting another cigarette as he spoke.  "He travels a great deal."
+
+"Surely it could not be the same man?" remarked Mrs. Dobson, with an
+incredulous air.  "The coincidence would be too extraordinary."  A
+smile went round the group; for an appreciation of humour was not the
+lady's strong point.
+
+"To continue my proposal," said Foote, with quiet enjoyment.  "In
+addition to imparting instruction on the subjects I have mentioned, I
+would have my pupils thoroughly grounded in the languages of the
+various countries they intend visiting, so that they should not inquire
+the French for Eau de Cologne, or ask what sort of vegetable _pate de
+foie gras_ is when they encountered it upon their menus.  A proper
+appreciation of the beautiful in art might follow, in order to permit
+of their being able to distinguish between a Sandro Botticelli and a
+'Seaport at Sunrise' by Claude Lorraine."
+
+"A professor who could give instruction upon the intricacies of a
+Continental wine list might be added with advantage," put in
+Barrington-Marsh.
+
+"And the inevitable result," said Browne, who had joined the party
+while Marsh was speaking, "would be that you might as well not travel
+at all.  Build an enormous restaurant in London, and devote a portion
+of it to every country into which modern man takes himself.  Hang the
+walls with tricky, theatrical canvases after the fashion of a
+cyclorama; dress your waiters in appropriate costumes, let them speak
+the language of the country in which you are supposed to be dining, let
+the tables be placed in the centre of the hall, have a band to
+discourse national airs, and you would be able to bore yourself to
+death in comfort, for the simple reason that every one would talk, eat,
+drink, and behave just as respectably as his neighbour.  Half the fun
+of moving about the world, as I understand it, lies in the studies of
+character presented by one's fellow-creatures.  But, see, the boat is
+alongside; let us go ashore while it is fine."
+
+Beautiful as Merok undoubtedly is, it must be admitted that its
+amusements are, to say the least of it, limited.  You can lunch at the
+hotel, explore the curious little octagonal church, and, if you are a
+walker, climb the road that crosses the mountains to Grotlid.  The
+views, however, are sublime, for the mountains rise on every hand,
+giving the little bay the appearance of an amphitheatre.
+
+"What programme have you mapped out for us?" inquired Miss Verney, who,
+as was known to her companions, preferred an easy-chair and a
+flirtation on the deck of the yacht to any sort of athletic exercise
+ashore.
+
+Browne thereupon explained that the Duchess, who was dressed in
+appropriate walking costume, had arranged everything.  They were to
+visit the church, do the regulation sights, and, finally, make their
+way up the hillside to the Storfos Waterfall, which is the principal,
+and almost the only, attraction the village has to offer.  The usual
+order of march was observed.  The Duchess and the Ambassador, being the
+seniors of the party, led the way; the lady's two daughters, escorted
+by Barrington-Marsh and Jimmy Foote--who was too obvious a detrimental
+to be worth guarding against--came next; Maas, Mrs. and Miss Dobson
+followed close behind them; Miss Verney and Browne brought up the rear.
+
+Everything went merrily as a marriage bell.  After those who had
+brought their cameras had snap-shotted the church, and made the usual
+mistake with regard to the angles, the party climbed the hill in the
+direction of the waterfall.  It was only when they reached it that
+those in front noticed that Miss Verney had joined the trio next before
+her, and that Browne had disappeared.  He had gone back to the boat,
+the lady explained, in order to give some instructions that had been
+forgotten.  From her silence, however, and from the expression of
+annoyance upon her beautiful lace, the others immediately jumped to the
+conclusion that something more serious must have happened than her
+words implied.  In this case, however, popular opinion was altogether
+at fault.  As a matter of fact, Browne's reason for leaving his guests
+to pursue their walk alone was an eminently simple one.  He strolled
+down to the boat which had brought them ashore, and, having despatched
+it with a message to the yacht, resumed his walk, hoping to overtake
+his party before they reached the waterfall.  Unfortunately, however, a
+thick mist was descending upon the mountain, shutting out the landscape
+as completely as if a curtain had been drawn before it.  At first he
+was inclined to treat the matter as of small moment; and, leaving the
+road, he continued his walk in the belief that it would soon pass off.
+Stepping warily--for mountain paths in Norway are not to be treated
+with disrespect--he pushed on for upwards of a quarter of an hour,
+feeling sure he must be near his destination, and wondering why he did
+not hear the voices of his friends or the thunder of the fall.  At last
+he stopped.  The mist was thicker than ever, and a fine but penetrating
+rain was falling.  Browne was still wondering what Miss Verney's
+feelings would be, supposing she were condemned to pass the night on
+the hillside, when he heard a little cry proceeding from a spot, as he
+supposed, a few yards ahead of him.  The voice was a woman's, and the
+ejaculation was one of pain.  Hearing it, Browne moved forward again in
+the hope of discovering whence it proceeded and what had occasioned it.
+Search how he would, however, he could see nothing of the person who
+had given utterance to it.  At last, in despair, he stood still and
+called, and in reply a voice answered in English, "Help me; help me,
+please."
+
+"Where are you?" Browne inquired in the same language; "and what is the
+matter?"
+
+"I am down here," the voice replied; "and I am afraid I have sprained
+my ankle.  I have fallen and cannot get up."
+
+Browne has since confessed that it was the voice that did it.  The
+accent, however, was scarcely that of an Englishwoman.
+
+"Are you on a path or on the hillside?" he inquired, after he had
+vainly endeavoured to locate her position.
+
+"I am on the hillside," she replied.  "The fog was so thick that I
+could not see my way, and I slipped on the bank and rolled down,
+twisting my foot under me."
+
+"Well, if you will try to guide me, I will do all in my power to help
+you," said Browne; and as he said it he moved carefully towards the
+spot whence he imagined the voice proceeded.  From the feel of the
+ground under his feet he could tell that he had left the path and was
+descending the slope.
+
+"Am I near you now?" he asked.
+
+"I think you must be," was the reply.  And then the voice added, with a
+little laugh, "How ridiculous it all is, and how sorry I am to trouble
+you!"
+
+Had she known to what this extraordinary introduction was destined to
+lead, it is very doubtful whether she would have considered it so full
+either of humour or regret as her words implied.
+
+Inch by inch Browne continued his advance, until he could just
+distinguish, seated on the ground below him, and clinging with both her
+arms to a stunted birch-tree, the figure of the girl for whom he was
+searching.  At most she was not more than five feet from him.  Then,
+with that suddenness which is the peculiar property of Norwegian mists,
+the vapour, which had up to that moment so thickly enveloped them,
+rolled away, and the whole landscape was revealed to their gaze.  As he
+took in the position, Browne uttered a cry of horror.  The girl had
+wandered off the path, slipped down the bank, and was now clinging to a
+tree only a few feet removed from the brink of one of the most terrible
+precipices along the Norwegian coast.
+
+So overwhelmed was he with horror that for a moment Browne found
+himself quite unable to say or do anything.  Then, summoning to his
+assistance all the presence of mind of which he was master, he
+addressed the girl, who, seeing the danger to which she was exposed,
+was clinging tighter than ever to the tree, her face as white as the
+paper upon which I am now writing.  For a moment the young man scarcely
+knew how to act for the best.  To leave her while he went for
+assistance was out of the question; while it was very doubtful, active
+as he was, whether he would be able, unaided, to get her up in her
+injured condition to the path above.  Ridiculous as the situation may
+have appeared in the fog, it had resolved itself into one of absolute
+danger now, and Browne felt the perspiration start out upon his
+forehead as he thought of what would have happened had she missed the
+tree and rolled a few feet farther.  One thing was quite
+certain--something must be done; so, taking off his coat, he lowered it
+by the sleeve to her, inquiring at the same time whether she thought
+she could hold on to it while he pulled her up to the path above.  She
+replied that she would endeavour to do so, and thereupon the struggle
+commenced.  A struggle it certainly was, and an extremely painful one,
+for the girl was handicapped by her injured foot.  What if her nerve
+should desert her and she should let go, or the sleeve of the coat
+should part company with the body?  In either case there could be but
+one result--an instant and terrible death for her.
+
+Taken altogether, it was an experience neither of them would ever be
+likely to forget.  At last, inch by inch, foot by foot, he drew her up;
+and with every advance she made, the stones she dislodged went tinkling
+down the bank, and, rolling over the edge, disappeared into the abyss
+below.  When at last she was sufficiently close to enable him to place
+his arm round her, and to lift her into safety beside himself, the
+reaction was almost more than either of them could bear.  For some
+minutes the girl sat with her face buried in her hands, too much
+overcome with horror at the narrowness of her escape even to thank her
+preserver.  When she _did_ lift her face to him, Browne became aware
+for the first time of its attractiveness.  Beautiful, as Miss Verney
+was beautiful, she certainly could not claim to be; there was, however,
+something about her face that was more pleasing than mere personal
+loveliness could possibly have been.
+
+"How did you come to be up here alone?" he inquired, after she had
+tried to express her gratitude to him for the service he had rendered
+her.
+
+"It was foolish, I admit," she answered.  "I had been painting on the
+mountain, and was making my way back to the hotel when the fog caught
+me.  Suddenly I felt myself falling.  To save myself I clutched at that
+tree, and was still clinging to it when you called to me.  Oh! how can
+I thank you?  But for you I might now be----"
+
+She paused, and Browne, to fill in the somewhat painful gap, hastened
+to say that he had no desire to be thanked at all.  He insisted that he
+had only done what was fit and proper under the circumstances.  It was
+plain, however, from the look of admiration he cast upon her, that he
+was very well satisfied with the part he had been permitted to play in
+the affair.
+
+While, however, they were progressing thus favourably in one direction,
+it was evident that they were not yet at an end of their difficulties,
+for the young lady, pretend as she might to ignore the fact, was
+undoubtedly lame; under the circumstances for her to walk was out of
+the question, and Merok was fully a mile, and a very steep mile,
+distant from where they were now seated.
+
+"How am I to get home?" the girl inquired.  "I am afraid it will be
+impossible for me to walk so far, and no pony could come along this
+narrow path to fetch me."
+
+Browne puckered his forehead with thought.  A millionaire is apt to
+imagine that nothing in this world is impossible, provided he has his
+cheque-book in his pocket and a stylographic pen wherewith to write an
+order on his banker.  In this case, however, he was compelled to
+confess himself beaten.  There was one way out of it, of course, and
+both knew it.  But the young man felt his face grow hot as the notion
+occurred to him.
+
+"If you would only let me carry you as far as the main road, I could
+easily find a conveyance to take you the rest of the distance," he
+faltered.
+
+"Do you think you _could_ carry me?" she answered, with a seriousness
+that was more than half assumed.  "I am very heavy."
+
+It might be mentioned here, and with advantage to the story, that in
+his unregenerate days Browne had won many weight-lifting competitions;
+his modesty, however, prevented his mentioning this fact to her.
+
+"If you will trust me, I think I can manage it," he said; and then,
+without waiting for her to protest, he picked the girl up, and, holding
+her carefully in his arms, carried her along the path in the direction
+of the village.  It was scarcely a time for conversation, so that the
+greater portion of the journey was conducted in silence.  When at last
+they reached the mountain road--that wonderful road which is one of the
+glories of Merok--Browne placed the girl upon the bank, and, calling a
+boy whom he could see in the distance, despatched him to the hotel for
+assistance.  The youth having disappeared, Browne turned to the girl
+again.  The pain she had suffered during that short journey had driven
+the colour from her face, but she did her best to make light of it.
+
+"I cannot thank you enough for all you have done for me," she said, and
+a little shudder swept over her as the remembrance of how near she had
+been to death returned to her.
+
+"I am very thankful I happened to be there at the time," the other
+replied with corresponding seriousness.  "If you will be warned by me,
+you will be careful for the future how you venture on the mountains
+without a guide at this time of the year.  Fogs, such as we have had
+to-day, descend so quickly, and the paths are dangerous at the best of
+times."
+
+"You may be sure I will be more careful," she replied humbly.  "But do
+not let me keep you now; I have detained you too long already.  I shall
+be quite safe here."
+
+"You are not detaining me," he answered.  "I have nothing to do.
+Besides, I could not think of leaving you until I have seen you safely
+on your way back to your hotel.  Have you been in Merok very long?"
+
+"Scarcely a week," the girl replied.  "We came from Hellesylt."
+
+Browne wondered of whom the _we_ might consist.  Was the girl married?
+He tried to discover whether or not she wore a wedding-ring, but her
+hand was hidden in the folds her dress.
+
+Five minutes later a cabriole made its appearance, drawn by a shaggy
+pony and led by a villager.  Behind it, and considerably out of breath,
+toiled a stout and elderly lady, who, as soon as she saw the girl
+seated on the bank by the roadside, burst into a torrent of speech.
+
+"Russian," said Brown to himself; "her accent puzzled me, but now I
+understand."
+
+Then turning to the young man, who was experiencing some slight
+embarrassment at being present at what his instinct told him was a
+wigging, administered by a lady who was plainly a past mistress at the
+art, the girl said in English:--
+
+"Permit me to introduce you to my guardian, Madame Bernstein."
+
+The couple bowed ceremoniously to each other, and then Browne and the
+villager between them lifted the girl into the vehicle, the man took
+his place at the pony's head, and the strange cortege proceeded on its
+way down the hill towards the hotel.  Once there, Browne prepared to
+take leave of them.  He held out his hand to the girl, who took it.
+
+"Good-bye," he said.  "I hope it will not be long before you are able
+to get about once more."
+
+"Good-bye," she answered; and then, with great seriousness, "Pray,
+believe that I shall always be grateful to you for the service you have
+rendered me this afternoon."
+
+There was a little pause.  Then, with a nervousness that was by no
+means usual to him, he added:--
+
+"I hope you will not think me rude, but perhaps you would not mind
+telling me whom I have had the pleasure of helping?"
+
+"My name is Katherine Petrovitch," she answered, with a smile, and then
+as frankly returned his question.  "And yours?"
+
+"My name is Browne," he replied; and also smiling as he said it, he
+added: "I am Browne's Mimosa Soap, Fragrant and Antiseptic."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+When Browne reached the yacht, after bidding good-bye to the girl he
+had rescued, he found his friends much exercised in their minds
+concerning him.  They had themselves been overtaken by the fog, and
+very naturally they had supposed that their host, seeing it coming on,
+had returned to the yacht without waiting for them.  Their surprise,
+therefore, when they arrived on board and found him still missing was
+scarcely to be wondered at.  In consequence, when he descended the
+companion ladder and entered the drawing-room, he had to undergo a
+cross-examination as to his movements.  Strangely enough, this
+solicitude for his welfare was far from being pleasing to him.  He had
+made up his mind to say nothing about the adventure of the afternoon,
+and yet, as he soon discovered, it was difficult to account for the
+time he had spent ashore if he kept silence on the subject.
+Accordingly he made the best excuse that occurred to him, and by
+disclosing a half-truth induced them to suppose that he had followed
+their party towards the waterfall, and had in consequence been lost in
+the fog.
+
+"It was scarcely kind of you to cause us so much anxiety," said Miss
+Verney in a low voice as he approached the piano at which she was
+seated.  "I assure you we have been most concerned about you; and, if
+you had not come on board very soon, Captain Marsh and Mr. Foote were
+going ashore again in search of you."
+
+"That would have been very kind of them," said Browne, dropping into an
+easy-chair; "but there was not the least necessity for it.  I am quite
+capable of taking care of myself."
+
+"Nasty things mountains," said Jimmy Foote to the company at large.  "I
+don't trust 'em myself.  I remember once on the Rigi going out with old
+Simeon Baynes, the American millionaire fellow, you know, and his
+daughter, the girl who married that Italian count who fought
+Constantovitch and was afterwards killed in Abyssinia.  At one place we
+very nearly went over the edge, every man-jack of us, and I vowed I'd
+never do such a thing again.  Fancy the irony of the position!  After
+having been poverty-stricken all one's life, to drop through the air
+thirteen hundred feet in the company of over a million dollars.  I'm
+perfectly certain of one thing, however: if it hadn't been for the
+girl's presence of mind I should not have been here to-day.  As it was,
+she saved my life, and, until she married, I never could be
+sufficiently grateful to her."
+
+"Only until she married!" said Lady Imogen, looking up from the novel
+she was reading.  "How was it your gratitude did not last longer than
+that?"
+
+"Doesn't somebody say that gratitude is akin to love?" answered Foote,
+with a chuckle.  "Of course I argued that, since she was foolish enough
+to show her bad taste by marrying somebody else, it would scarcely have
+become me to be grateful."
+
+Browne glanced at Foote rather sharply.  What did he mean by talking of
+life-saving on mountains, on this evening of all others?  Had he heard
+anything?  But Jimmy's face was all innocence.
+
+At that moment the dressing gong sounded, and every one rose,
+preparatory to departing to their respective cabins.
+
+"Where is Maas?" Browne inquired of Marsh, who was the last to leave.
+
+"He is on deck, I think," replied the other; but as he spoke the
+individual in question made his appearance down the companion-ladder,
+carrying in his hand a pair of field-glasses.
+
+For some reason or another, dinner that night was scarcely as
+successful as usual.  The English mail had come in, and the Duchess had
+had a worrying letter from the Duke, who had been commanded to Osborne
+among the salt of the earth, when he wanted to be in the Highlands
+among the grouse; Miss Verney had not yet recovered from what she
+considered Browne's ill-treatment of herself that afternoon; while one
+of the many kind friends of the American Ambassador had forwarded him
+information concerning a debate in Congress, in order that he might see
+in what sort of estimation he was held by a certain portion of his
+fellow-countrymen.  Never a very talkative man, Browne this evening was
+even more silent than usual.  The recollection of a certain pale face
+and a pair of beautiful eyes haunted him continually.  Indeed, had it
+not been for Barrington-Marsh and Jimmy Foote, who did their duty
+manfully, the meal would have been a distinct failure as far as its
+general liveliness was concerned.  As it was, no one was sorry when an
+adjournment was made for coffee to the deck above.  Under the influence
+of this gentle stimulant, however, and the wonderful quiet of the
+fjord, things brightened somewhat.  But the improvement was not
+maintained; the pauses gradually grew longer and more frequent, and
+soon after ten o'clock the ladies succumbed to the general inertness,
+and disappeared below.
+
+According to custom, the majority of the men immediately adjourned to
+the smoking-room for cards.  Browne, however, excused himself on the
+plea that he was tired and preferred the cool.  Maas followed suit;
+and, when the others had taken themselves off, the pair stood leaning
+against the bulwarks, smoking and watching the lights of the village
+ashore.
+
+"I wonder how you and I would have turned out," said Maas quietly, when
+they had been standing at the rails for some minutes, "if we had been
+born and bred in this little village, and had never seen any sort of
+life outside the Geiranger?"
+
+"Without attempting to moralize, I don't doubt but that we should have
+been better in many ways," Browne replied.  "I can assure you there are
+times when I get sick to death of the inane existence we lead."
+
+"_Leben heisst traeumen; weise sein heisst angenehm traeumen_," quoted
+Maas, half to himself and half to his cigar.  "Schiller was not so very
+far out after all."
+
+"Excellent as far as the sentiment is concerned," said Browne, as he
+flicked the ash off his cigar and watched it drop into the water
+alongside.  "But, however desirous we may be of dreaming agreeably, our
+world will still take good care that we wake up just at the moment when
+we are most anxious to go on sleeping."
+
+"In order that we may not be disillusioned, my friend," said Maas.
+"The starving man dreams of City banquets, and wakes to the unpleasant
+knowledge that it does not do to go to sleep on an empty stomach.  The
+debtor imagines himself the possessor of millions, and wakes to find
+the man-in-possession seated by his bedside.  But there is one cure;
+and you should adopt it, my dear Browne."
+
+"What is that?"
+
+"Marriage, my friend!  Get yourself a wife and you will have no time to
+think of such things.  Doesn't your Ben Jonson say that marriage is the
+best state for a man in general?"
+
+"Marriage!" retorted Browne scornfully.  "It always comes back to that.
+I tell you I have come to hate the very sound of the word.  From the
+way people talk you might think marriage is the pivot on which our
+lives turn.  They never seem to realise that it is the rock upon which
+we most of us go to pieces.  What is a London season but a monstrous
+market, in which men and women are sold to the highest bidders,
+irrespective of inclination or regard?  I tell you, Maas, the way these
+things are managed in what we call English society borders on the
+indecent.  Lord A. is rich; consequently a hundred mothers offer him
+their daughters.  He may be what he pleases--an honourable man, or the
+greatest blackguard at large upon the earth.  In nine cases out of ten
+it makes little or no difference, provided, of course, he has a fine
+establishment and the settlements are satisfactory.  At the
+commencement of the season the girls are brought up to London, to be
+tricked out, regardless of expense, by the fashionable dressmakers of
+the day.  They are paraded here, there, and everywhere, like horses in
+a dealer's yard; are warned off the men who have no money, but who
+might very possibly make them happy; while they are ordered by the
+'home authorities' to encourage those who have substantial bank
+balances and nothing else to recommend them.  As the question of love
+makes no sort of difference, it receives no consideration.  After their
+friends have sent them expensive presents, which in most cases they
+cannot afford to give, but do so in order that they may keep up
+appearances with their neighbours and tradesmen, the happy couple stand
+side by side before the altar at St. George's and take the most solemn
+oath of their lives; that done, they spend their honeymoon in Egypt,
+Switzerland, or the Riviera, where they are presented with ample
+opportunity of growing tired of one another.  Returning to town, the
+man usually goes back to his old life and the woman to hers.  The
+result is a period of mutual distrust and deceit; an awakening follows,
+and later on we have the _cause celebre_, and, holding up our hands in
+horror, say, 'Dear me, how very shocking!'  In the face of all this, we
+have the audacity to curl our lips and to call the French system
+unnatural!"
+
+"I am afraid, dear Browne, you are not quite yourself to-night," said
+Maas, with a gentle little laugh, at the end of the other's harangue.
+"The mistake of believing that a marriage, with money on the side of
+the man and beauty on that of the woman, must irretrievably result in
+misfortune is a very common one.  For my part, I am singular enough to
+believe it may turn out as well if not better than any other."
+
+"I wasn't aware that optimism was your strong point," retorted Browne.
+"For my part I feel, after the quiet of this fjord, as if I could turn
+my back on London and never go near it again."
+
+He spoke with such earnestness that Maas, for once in his life, was
+almost astonished.  He watched his companion as he lit another cigar.
+
+"One thing is quite certain," he said at length, "your walk this
+afternoon did you more harm than good.  The fog must have got into your
+blood.  And yet, if you will not think me impertinent for saying so,
+Miss Verney gave you a welcome such as many men would go through fire
+and water to receive."
+
+Browne grunted scornfully.  He was not going to discuss Miss Verney's
+opinion of himself with his companion.  Accordingly he changed the
+subject abruptly by inquiring whether Maas had made any plans for the
+ensuing winter.
+
+"I am a methodical man," replied the latter, with a smile at his
+companion's naive handling of the situation, "and all my movements are
+arranged some months ahead.  When this charming voyage is at an end,
+and I have thanked you for your delightful hospitality, I shall hope to
+spend a fortnight with our dear Duchess in the Midlands; after that I
+am due in Paris for a week or ten days; then, like the swallow, I fly
+south; shall dawdle along the Mediterranean for three or four months,
+probably cross to Cairo, and then work my way slowly back to England in
+time for the spring.  What do you propose doing?"
+
+"Goodness knows," Browne replied lugubriously.  "At first I thought of
+Rajputana; but I seem to have done, and to be tired of doing,
+everything.  They tell me tigers are scarce in India.  This morning I
+felt almost inclined to take a run out to the Cape and have three
+months with the big game."
+
+"You said as much in the smoking-room last night, I remember," Maas
+replied.  "Pray, what has occurred since then to make you change your
+mind?"
+
+"I do not know, myself," said Browne.  "I feel restless and unsettled
+to-night, that is all.  Do you think I should care for Russia?"
+
+"For Russia?" cried his companion in complete surprise.  "What on earth
+makes you think of Russia?"
+
+Browne shook his head.
+
+"It's a notion I have," he answered; though, for my own part, I am
+certain that, until that moment, he had never thought of it.  "Do you
+remember Demetrovitch, that handsome fellow with the enormous moustache
+who stayed with me last year at Newmarket?"
+
+"I remember him perfectly," Maas replied; and had Browne been watching
+his face, instead of looking at the little hotel ashore, he would in
+all probability have noticed that a peculiar smile played round the
+corners of his mouth as he said it.  "But what has Demetrovitch to do
+with your proposed trip to Russia?  I had an idea that he was ordered
+by the Czar to spend two years upon his estates."
+
+"Exactly! so he was.  That accounts for my notion.  He has often asked
+me to pay him a visit.  Besides, I have never seen Petersburg in the
+winter, and I'm told it's rather good fun."
+
+"You will be bored to death," the other answered.  "If you go, I'll
+give you a month in which to be back in England.  Now I think, with
+your permission, I'll retire.  It's after eleven, and there's something
+about these fjords that never fails to make me sleepy.  Good-night,
+_mon cher ami_, and pleasant dreams to you."
+
+Browne bade him good-night, and when the other disappeared into the
+companion, returned to his contemplation of the shore.  The night was
+so still that the ripple of the wavelets on the beach, half a mile or
+so away, could be distinctly heard.  The men had left the smoking-room;
+and save the solitary figure of the officer on the bridge, and a hand
+forward by the cable range, Browne had the deck to himself.  And yet he
+was not altogether alone, for his memory was still haunted by the
+recollection of the same sweet face, with the dark, lustrous eyes, that
+had been with him all the evening.  Do what he would, he could not
+endow the adventure of the afternoon with the common-place air he had
+tried to bestow upon it.  Something told him that it was destined to
+play a more important part in his life's history than would at first
+glance appear to be the case.  And yet he was far from being a
+susceptible young man.  The training he had received would have been
+sufficient to prevent that.  For upwards of an hour he remained where
+he was, thinking and thinking, and yet never coming any nearer a
+definite conclusion.  Then, throwing away what remained of his cigar,
+he bestowed a final glance upon the shore, and went below to his cabin,
+to dream, over and over again, of the adventure that had befallen him
+that afternoon.
+
+Whatever else may have been said of it, the weather next morning was
+certainly not propitious; the mountains surrounding the bay were hidden
+in thick mist, and rain was falling steadily.  After breakfast the male
+portion of the party adjourned to the smoking-room, while the ladies
+engaged themselves writing letters or with their novels in the
+drawing-room below.
+
+Browne alone seemed in good spirits.  While the others were railing at
+the fog, and idly speculating as to whether it would clear, he seemed
+to derive a considerable amount of satisfaction from it.  About ten
+o'clock he announced his intention of going ashore, in order, he said,
+that he might confer with a certain local authority regarding their
+proposed departure for the south next day.  As a matter of politeness
+he inquired whether any of his guests would accompany him, and received
+an answer in the negative from all who happened to be in the
+smoking-room at the time.  His valet accordingly brought him his
+mackintosh, and he had put it on and was moving towards the gangway
+when Maas made his appearance from the saloon companion.
+
+"Is it possible you are going ashore?" he inquired in a tone of mild
+surprise.  "If so, and you will have me, I will beg leave to accompany
+you.  If I stay on board I shall go to sleep, and if I go to sleep I
+shall wake up in a bad temper; so that, if you would save your guests
+from that annoyance, I should advise you to take me with you."
+
+Though Browne could very well have dispensed with his company, common
+politeness prevented him from saying so.  Accordingly he expressed his
+pleasure at the arrangement, and when they had descended the gangway
+they took their places in the boat together.  For the first time during
+the excursion, and also for the first time in the years they had known
+each other, Browne felt inclined to quarrel with Maas; and yet there
+was nothing in the other's behaviour towards him to which he could take
+exception.
+
+Maas could see that Browne was not himself, and he accordingly set
+himself to remedy the trouble as far as lay in his power.  So well did
+he succeed that by the time the boat reached the tiny landing-stage his
+host was almost himself again.
+
+"Now you must do just as you please," said Maas when they had landed.
+"Do not consider me in the matter at all, I beg of you; I can amuse
+myself very well.  Personally I feel inclined for a walk up the
+mountain road."
+
+"Do so, then, by all means," said his host, who was by no means sorry
+to hear him arrive at this decision.  "If I were you, however, I should
+stick to the road; these mists are not things to be taken lightly."
+
+"I agree with you," said Maas.  Then, bidding the other good-bye, he
+set off on his excursion.
+
+Browne, who was conscientiousness itself, walked along the hillside to
+the residence of the functionary whom he had professedly come ashore to
+see, and when he had consulted him upon the point at issue, made his
+way in the direction of the hotel.  Accosting the manager in the hall,
+he inquired whether it would be possible to obtain an interview with
+Madame Bernstein.
+
+"Most certainly, sir," the man replied.  "If you will follow me I will
+conduct you to her."
+
+So saying, he led the way down the long wooden passage towards a room
+at the further end.  Into this Browne was ushered, while the man
+departed in search of the lady.  What occasioned the delay it is
+impossible to say, but fully a quarter of an hour elapsed before madame
+made her appearance.  She greeted him with a great appearance of
+cordiality.  Taking his hands in hers, she held them while she thanked
+him, in fluent French, for what she called his bravery on the preceding
+afternoon.
+
+"_Mon Dieu!_" said she.  "What should I have done had you not been
+there to help her?  Had she been killed I should never have known
+happiness again.  It was such a risk to run.  She is so reckless.  She
+fills me with consternation whenever she goes out alone."
+
+This was not at all what Browne had bargained for.  However, under the
+circumstances, it would not only have been unwise, but practically
+impossible, for him to protest.  You cannot save a young lady's life
+and expect to escape her relatives' thanks, however much you may desire
+to do so.  After these had been offered to him, however, he managed to
+discover an opportunity of inquiring after her.
+
+"The poor child is better this morning," Madame replied, solemnly
+wagging her head.  "But, alas! it will be several days before she can
+hope to put her foot to the ground.  She begged me, however, to thank
+you, monsieur, should you call, for your goodness to her."
+
+Try as he would to conceal it, there could be no sort of doubt that
+Browne was pleased that she should have thought about him.  He begged
+Madame Bernstein to inform her that he had called to inquire, and then
+bade her good-bye.  He had hoped to have discovered something
+concerning the girl's history; but as it was plain to him that Madame
+was not one who would be easily induced to make disclosures, he
+abandoned the attempt.
+
+He had passed down the passage, and was in the act of leaving the
+hotel, when a voice reached him from a room on the right which caused
+him no little surprise.  At the same instant the door opened, and no
+less a person than Maas stood before him.
+
+"Why, my dear Browne, really this is most charming," he cried, with a
+somewhat exaggerated enthusiasm.  "I had not the very least idea of
+finding you here."
+
+"Nor I of seeing you," Browne retorted.  "I understood that you were
+going for a walk up the mountain."
+
+"I did go," the other replied, "but the mist was so thick that I
+changed my mind and came in here for a glass of Vermouth prior to going
+on board.  Believe me, there is nothing like Vermouth for counteracting
+the evil effects of fog.  Will you let me persuade you to try a glass?
+What they have given me is excellent."
+
+Browne thanked him, but declined.  He did not like finding the man in
+the hotel; but as things were, he could not see that he had any right
+to complain.  He only hoped that Maas knew nothing of his reason for
+being there.  Conversant, however, as he was with his friend's
+peculiarities, he felt certain he would say nothing about it to any
+one, even supposing that he had discovered it.
+
+Leaving the hotel together, they made their way down to the boat, and
+in something less than a quarter of an hour were on board the yacht
+once more.  The fog still continued, nor did it lift for the remainder
+of the day.
+
+On the following morning they had arranged to leave Merok for Aalsund,
+and thence to turn south on their homeward journey.  Fortunately the
+weather had cleared sufficiently by the time day dawned to admit of
+their departure, and accordingly at the appointed hour, dipping her
+ensign to the village in token of farewell, the yacht swung round and
+headed for the pass under the Pulpit Rock.  Browne was on the bridge at
+the time, and it was with a sensible feeling of regret that he bade
+farewell to the little village nestling at the foot of the snow-capped
+mountains.  Never did he remember having experienced such regret in
+leaving a place before.  Whether he and Katherine Petrovitch would ever
+meet again was more than he could tell; it seemed to him extremely
+unlikely, and yet----  But at this juncture he shook his head very
+wisely at the receding mountains, and told himself that that was a
+question which only Fate could decide.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+Six months had elapsed since the _Lotus Blossom_ had steamed out of the
+Gieranger Fjord and its owner had taken his last look at the little
+village of Merok.  During that interval Browne had endeavoured to amuse
+himself to the best of his ability.  In spite of Maas's insinuation to
+the contrary, he had visited Russia; had shot bears in the company and
+on the estates of his friend Demetrovitch; had passed south to the
+Crimea, and thence, by way of Constantinople, to Cairo, where, chancing
+upon some friends who were wintering in the land of the Pharaohs, he
+had been persuaded into engaging a _dahabiyeh_, and had endured the
+tedious river journey to Luxor and back in the company of a charming
+French countess, an Austrian archduke, a German diplomatist, and an
+individual whose accomplishments were as notorious as his tastes were
+varied.  A fortnight in Monte Carlo and a week in Paris had succeeded
+the Nile trip; and now the first week in March found him, free of
+engagements, ensconced in the luxurious smoking-room of the Monolith
+Club in Pall Mall, an enormous cigar between his teeth, and a feeling
+of regret in his heart that he had been persuaded to leave the warmth
+and sunshine of the favoured South for what he was now enduring.  The
+morning had been fairly bright, but the afternoon was cold, foggy, and
+dreary in the extreme.  Even the most weather-wise among the men
+standing at the windows, looking out upon the street, had to admit that
+they did not know what to make of it.  It might only mean rain, they
+said; it might also mean snow.  But that it was, and was going to be
+still more, unpleasant, nobody seemed for an instant to doubt.  Browne
+stretched himself in his chair beside the fire, and watched the flames
+go roaring up the chimney, with an expression of weariness upon his
+usually cheerful countenance.
+
+"What a fool you were, my lad, to come back to this sort of thing!" he
+said to himself.  "You might have known the sort of welcome you would
+receive.  In Cannes the sun has been shining on the Boulevard de la
+Croisette all day.  Here it is all darkness and detestation.  I've a
+good mind to be off again to-night; this sort of thing would give the
+happiest man the blues."
+
+He was still pursuing this train of thought, when a hand was placed
+upon his shoulder, and, turning round, he discovered Jimmy Foote
+standing beside him.
+
+"The very man I wanted to see," said Browne, springing to his feet and
+holding out his hand.  "I give you my word, old fellow, you couldn't
+have come at a more opportune moment.  I was in the act of setting off
+to find you."
+
+"My dear old chap," replied his friend, "that is my metier: I always
+turn up at opportune moments, like the kind godmother in the fairy
+tale.  What is it you want of me?"
+
+"I want your company."
+
+"There's nothing I'd give you more willingly," said Jimmy; "I'm tired
+of it myself.  But seriously, what is the matter?"
+
+"Look out of the window," Browne replied.  "Do you see that fog?"
+
+"I've not only seen it, I have swallowed several yards of it," Foote
+answered.  "I've been to tea with the Verneys in Arlington Street, and
+I've fairly had to eat my way here.  But why should the weather
+irritate you?  If you're idiot enough to come back from Cairo to London
+in March, I don't see that you've any right to complain.  I only wish
+Fate had blessed me with the same chance of getting away."
+
+"If she had, where would you go and what would you do?"
+
+"I'd go anywhere and do anything.  You may take it from me that the
+Bard was not very far out when he said that if money goes before, all
+ways lie open."
+
+"If that's all you want, we'll very soon send it before.  Look here,
+Jimmy; you've nothing to do, and I've less.  What do you say to going
+off somewhere?  What's your fancy--Paris, south of France, Egypt,
+Algiers?  One place is like another to me."
+
+"I don't want anything better than Algiers," said Jimmy.  "Provided we
+go by sea, I am your obedient and humble servant to command."
+
+Then, waving his hand towards the gloom outside, he added: "Fog, Rain,
+Sleet, and Snow, my luck triumphs, and I defy ye!"
+
+"That's settled, then," said Browne, rising and standing before the
+fire.  "I'll wire to Mason to have the yacht ready at Plymouth
+to-morrow evening.  I should advise you to bring something warm with
+you, for we are certain to find it cold going down Channel and crossing
+the Bay at this time of the year.  In a week, however, we shall be
+enjoying warm weather once more.  Now I must be getting along.  You
+don't happen to be coming my way, I suppose?"
+
+"My dear fellow," said Jimmy, buttoning up his coat and putting on his
+hat as he spoke, "my way is always your way.  Are you going to walk or
+will you cab it?"
+
+"Walk," Browne replied.  "This is not the sort of weather to ride in
+hansoms.  If you are ready, come along."
+
+The two young men passed out of the club and along Pall Mall together.
+Turning up Waterloo Place, they proceeded in the direction of
+Piccadilly.  The fog was thicker there than elsewhere, and every shop
+window was brilliantly illuminated in order to display the wares within.
+
+"Oh, by the way, Browne, I've got something to show you," said Foote,
+as they passed over the crossing of Charles Street.  "It may interest
+you."
+
+"What is it?" asked Browne.  "A new cigarette or something more
+atrocious than usual in the way of ties?"
+
+"Better than that," returned his companion, and as he spoke he led his
+friend towards a picture-shop, in the window of which were displayed a
+number of works of art.  Occupying a prominent position in the centre
+was a large water-colour, and as Browne glanced at it his heart gave a
+leap in his breast.  It was a view of Merok taken from the spot where
+he had rescued Katherine Petrovitch from death upwards of seven months
+before.  It was a clever bit of work, and treated in an entirely
+unconventional fashion.
+
+"It's not by any means bad, is it?" said Foote, after Browne had been
+looking at it in silence for more than a minute.  "If I had the
+money----  But I say, old chap, what is the matter?  You are as pale as
+if you had seen a ghost.  Don't you feel well?"
+
+"Perfectly well," his friend replied; "it's the fog."
+
+He did not say that in the corner of the picture he had seen the
+artist's name, and that that name was the one he had cherished so
+fondly and for so long a time.
+
+"Just excuse me for a moment, will you?" he said.  "I should like to go
+into the shop and ask a question about that picture."
+
+"All right," said Jimmy.  "I'll wait here."
+
+Browne accordingly disappeared inside, leaving Foote on the pavement.
+As it happened, it was a shop he often visited, and in consequence he
+was well known to the assistants.  When he made his business known to
+them, the picture was withdrawn from the window and placed before him.
+
+"An excellent bit of work, as you can see for yourself, sir," said the
+shopman, as he pulled down the electric light and turned it upon the
+picture.  "The young lady who painted it is fast making a name for
+herself.  So far this is the first bit of her work we have had in
+London; but the Continental dealers assure me they find a ready market
+for it."
+
+"I can quite believe it," said Browne.  "It is an exceedingly pretty
+sketch.  You may send it round to me."
+
+"Very good, sir; thank you.  Perhaps you will allow me to show you one
+or two others while you are here?  We have several new works since you
+paid us a visit last."
+
+"No, thank you," Browne replied.  "I only came in to find out whether
+you could tell me the address of the young lady who painted this.  She
+and I met in Norway some months ago."
+
+"Indeed, sir, I had no idea when I spoke, that you were acquainted.
+Perhaps you know that she is in London at the present moment.  She
+honoured me by visiting my shop this morning."
+
+"Indeed," said Browne.  "In that case you might let me know where I can
+find her."
+
+"I will do so at once," the man replied.  "If you will excuse me for a
+moment I will have it written out for you."
+
+He disappeared forthwith into an office at the end of the shop, leaving
+Browne staring at the picture as if he could not take his eyes off it.
+So engaged was he with the thoughts it conjured up that he quite forgot
+the fact that he was standing in a shop in London with hansoms and
+'buses rolling by outside.  In spirit he was on the steep side of a
+Norwegian mountain, surrounded by fog and rain, endeavouring to
+discover from what direction a certain cry for help proceeded.  Then
+the fog rolled away, and, looking up at him, he saw what he now knew to
+be the sweetest and most womanly face upon which he had ever gazed.  He
+was still wrapped in this day-dream when the shopman returned, and
+roused him by placing on the counter before him an envelope upon which
+was written:--
+
+  Miss KATHERINE PETROVITCH.
+  43, _German Park Road, West._
+
+
+"That is it, sir," said the man.  "If it would be any convenience to
+you, sir, it will give me the greatest pleasure to write to the young
+lady, and to tell her that you have purchased her picture and would
+like her to call upon you."
+
+"I must beg of you not to do anything of the kind," Browne replied,
+with the most impressive earnestness.  "I must make it a condition of
+my purchase that you do not mention my name to her in any way."
+
+The shopman looked a little crestfallen.  "Very good, sir; since you do
+not wish it, of course I will be sure not to do so," he answered
+humbly.  "I thought perhaps, having purchased an example of her work,
+and being such a well-known patron of art, you might be anxious to help
+the young lady."
+
+"What do you mean by helping her?" inquired Browne.  "Do you think she
+needs assistance?"
+
+"Well, sir, between ourselves," returned the other, "I do not fancy she
+is very well off.  She was in a great hurry, at any rate, to sell this
+picture."
+
+Browne winced; it hurt him to think that the girl had perhaps been
+compelled to haggle with this man in order to obtain the mere
+necessaries of life.  He, however, thanked the man for his courtesy,
+and bidding him send the picture to his residence as soon as possible,
+left the shop and joined Foote on the pavement outside.
+
+"Well, I hope you have been long enough," remarked that gentleman in an
+injured tone, as they proceeded up the street together.  "Have you
+purchased everything in the shop?"
+
+"Don't be nasty, Jimmy," said Browne, with sudden joviality.  "It
+doesn't suit you.  You are the jolliest little fellow in the world when
+you are in a good temper; but when you are not--well, words fail me."
+
+"Don't walk me off my legs, confound you!" said Jimmy snappishly.  "The
+night is but young, and we're not performing pedestrians, whatever you
+may think."
+
+Browne was not aware that he was walking faster than usual, but he
+slowed down on being remonstrated with.  Then he commenced to whistle
+softly to himself.
+
+"Now you are whistling," said Jimmy, "which is a thing, as you are well
+aware, that I detest in the street.  What on earth is the matter with
+you to-night?  Ten minutes ago you were as glum as they make 'em;
+nothing suited you.  Then you went into that shop and bought that
+picture, and since you came out you seem bent on making a public
+exhibition of yourself."
+
+"So I am," said Browne; and then, suddenly stopping in his walk, he
+rapped with the ferrule of his umbrella on the pavement.  "I am going
+to give an exhibition, and a dashed good one, too.  I'll take one of
+the galleries, and do it in a proper style.  I'll have the critics
+there, and all the swells who buy; and if they don't do as I want, and
+declare it to be the very finest show of the year, I'll never buy one
+of their works again."  Then, taking his friend's arm, he continued his
+walk, saying, "What you want, Jimmy, my boy, is a proper appreciation
+of art.  There is nothing like it in the world, take my word for it.
+Nothing!  Nothing at all!"
+
+"You've said that before," retorted his friend, "and you said it with
+sufficient emphasis to amuse the whole street.  If you're going to give
+me an exposition of art in Regent Street on a foggy afternoon in March,
+I tell you flatly I'm going home.  I am not a millionaire, and my
+character won't stand the strain.  What's the matter with you, Browne?
+You're as jolly as a sandboy now, and, for the life of me, I don't see
+how a chap can be happy in a fog like this and still retain his reason."
+
+"Fog, my boy," continued Browne, still displaying the greatest good
+humour.  "I give you my word, there's nothing like a fog in the world.
+I adore it!  I revel in it!  Talk about your south of France and
+sunshine--what is it to London and a fog?  A fog did me a very good
+turn once, and now I'm hanged if another isn't going to do it again.
+You're a dear little chap, Jimmy, and I wouldn't wish for a better
+companion.  But there's no use shutting your eyes to one fact, and that
+is you're not sympathetic.  You want educating, and when I've a week or
+two to spare I'll do it.  Now I'm going to leave you to think out what
+I've said.  I've just remembered a most important engagement.  Let me
+find a decent hansom and I'll be off."
+
+"I thought you said just now this was not the weather for driving in
+hansoms?  I thought you said you had nothing to do, and that you were
+going to employ yourself entertaining me?  John Grantham Browne, I tell
+you what it is, you're going in that hansom to a lunatic asylum."
+
+"Better than that, my boy," said Browne, with a laugh, as the cab drew
+up at the pavement and he sprang in.  "Far better than that."  Then,
+looking up through the trap in the roof at the driver, he added
+solemnly: "Cabby, drive me to 43, German Park Road, as fast as your
+horse can go."
+
+"But, hold on," said Foote, holding up his umbrella to detain him.
+"Before you do go, what about to-morrow?  What train shall we catch?
+And have you sent the wire to your skipper to have the yacht in
+readiness?"
+
+"Bother to-morrow," answered Browne.  "There is no to-morrow, there are
+no trains, there is no skipper, and most certainly there is no yacht.
+I've forgotten them and everything else.  Drive on, cabby.  Bye-bye,
+Jimmy."
+
+The cab disappeared in the fog, leaving Mr. Foote standing before the
+portico of the Criterion looking after it.
+
+"My friend Browne is either mad or in love," said that astonished
+individual as the vehicle disappeared in the traffic.  "I don't know
+which to think.  He's quite unnerved me.  I think I'll go in here and
+try a glass of dry sherry just to pull myself together.  What an idiot
+I was not to find out who painted that picture!  But that's just like
+me; I never think of things until too late."
+
+When he had finished his sherry he lit a cigarette, and presently found
+himself making his way towards his rooms in Jermyn Street.  As he
+walked he shook his head solemnly.  "I don't like the look of things at
+all," he said.  "I said a lunatic asylum just now; I should have
+mentioned a worse place--'St. George's, Hanover Square.'  One thing,
+however, is quite certain.  If I know anything of signs, Algiers will
+not have the pleasure of entertaining me."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+While Foote was cogitating in this way, Browne's cab was rolling along
+westward.  He passed Apsley House and the Park, and dodged his way in
+and out of the traffic through Kensington Gore and the High Street.  By
+the time they reached the turning into the Melbury Road he was in the
+highest state of good humour, not only with himself but the world in
+general.
+
+When, however, they had passed the cab-stand, and had turned into the
+narrow street which was his destination, all his confidence vanished,
+and he became as nervous as a weak-minded school-girl.  At last the
+cabman stopped and addressed his fare.
+
+"The fog's so precious thick hereabouts, sir," he said, "that I'm blest
+if I can see the houses, much less the numbers.  Forty-three may be
+here, or it may be down at the other end.  If you like I'll get down
+and look."
+
+"You needn't do that," said Browne.  "I'll find it for myself."
+
+It may have been his nervousness that induced him to do such a
+thing--on that point I cannot speak with authority--but it is quite
+certain that when he did get down he handed the driver
+half-a-sovereign.  With the characteristic honesty of the London
+cabman, the man informed him of the fact, at the same time remarking
+that he could not give him change.
+
+"Never mind the change," said Browne; adding, with fine cynicism, "Put
+it into the first charity-box you come across."
+
+The man laughed, and with a hearty "Thank ye, sir; good-night," turned
+his horse and disappeared.
+
+"Now for No. 43," said Browne.
+
+But though he appeared to be so confident of finding it, it soon
+transpired that the house was more difficult to discover than he
+imagined.  He wandered up one pavement and down the other in search of
+it.  When he did come across it, it proved to be a picturesque little
+building standing back from the street, and boasted a small garden in
+front.  The door was placed at the side.  He approached it and rang the
+bell.  A moment later he found himself standing face to face with the
+girl he had rescued on the Gieranger Fjord seven months before.  It may
+possibly have been due to the fact that when she had last seen him he
+had been dressed after the fashion of the average well-to-do tourist,
+and that now he wore a top-hat and a great coat; it is quite certain,
+however, that for the moment she did not recognise him.
+
+"I am afraid you do not know me," said Browne, with a humility that was
+by no means usual with him.  But before he had finished speaking she
+had uttered a little exclamation of astonishment, and, as the young man
+afterwards flattered himself, of pleasure.
+
+"Mr. Browne!" she cried.  "I beg your pardon, indeed, for not
+recognising you.  You must think me very rude; but I had no idea of
+seeing you here."
+
+"I only learnt your address an hour ago," the young man replied.  "I
+could not resist the opportunity of calling on you."
+
+"But I am so unknown in London," she answered.  "How could you possibly
+have heard of me!  I thought myself so insignificant that my presence
+in this great city would not be known to any one."
+
+"You are too modest," said Browne, with a solemnity that would not have
+discredited a State secret.  Then he made haste to add, "I cannot tell
+you how often I have thought of that terrible afternoon."
+
+"As you may suppose, I have never forgotten it," she answered.  "It is
+scarcely likely I should."
+
+There was a little pause; then she added, "But I don't know why I
+should keep you standing out here like this.  Will you not come in?"
+
+Browne was only too glad to do so.  He accordingly followed her into
+the large and luxuriously furnished studio.
+
+"Won't you sit down?" she said, pointing to a chair by the fire.  "It
+is so cold and foggy outside that perhaps you would like a cup of tea."
+
+Tea was a beverage in which Browne never indulged, and yet, on this
+occasion, so little was he responsible for his actions that he
+acquiesced without a second thought.
+
+"How do you prefer it?" she asked.  "Will you have it made in the
+English or the Russian way?  Here is a teapot, and here a samovar; here
+is milk, and here a slice of lemon.  Which do you prefer?"
+
+Scarcely knowing which he chose, Browne answered that he would take it
+_a la Russe_.  She thereupon set to work, and the young man, as he
+watched her bending over the table, thought he had never in his life
+before seen so beautiful and so desirable a woman.  And yet, had a
+female critic been present, it is quite possible--nay, it is almost
+probable that more than one hole might have been picked in her
+appearance.  Her skirt--in order to show my knowledge of the
+technicalities of woman's attire--was of plain merino, and she also
+wore a painting blouse that, like Joseph's coat, was of many colours.
+To go further, a detractor would probably have observed that her hair
+might have been better arranged.  Browne, however, thought her
+perfection in every respect, and drank his tea in a whirl of
+enchantment.  He found an inexplicable fascination in the mere swish of
+her skirts as she moved about the room, and a pleasure that he had
+never known before in the movement of her slender hands above the tray.
+And when, their tea finished, she brought him a case of cigarettes, and
+bade him smoke if he cared to, it might very well have been said that
+that studio contained the happiest man in England.  Outside, they could
+hear the steady patter of the rain, and the rattle of traffic reached
+them from the High Street; but inside there was a silence of a
+Norwegian fjord, and the memory of one hour that never could be effaced
+from their recollections as long as they both should live.  Under the
+influence of the tea, and with the assistance of the cigarette, which
+she insisted he should smoke, Browne gradually recovered his presence
+of mind.  One thing, however, puzzled him.  He remembered what the
+shopman had told him, and for this reason he could not understand how
+she came to be the possessor of so comfortable a studio.  This,
+however, was soon explained.  The girl informed him that after his
+departure from Merok (though I feel sure she was not aware that he was
+the owner of the magnificent vessel she had seen in the harbour) she
+had been unable to move for upwards of a week.  After that she and her
+companion, Madame Bernstein, had left for Christiania, travelling
+thence to Copenhagen, and afterwards to Berlin.  In the latter city she
+had met an English woman, also an artist.  They had struck up a
+friendship, with the result that the lady in question, having made up
+her mind to winter in Venice, had offered her the free use of her
+London studio for that time, if she cared to cross the Channel and take
+possession of it.
+
+"Accordingly, in the daytime, I paint here," said the girl; "but Madame
+Bernstein and I have our lodgings in the Warwick Road.  I hope you did
+not think this was my studio; I should not like to sail under false
+colours."
+
+Browne felt that he would have liked to give her the finest studio that
+ever artist had used a brush and pencil in.  He was wise enough,
+however, not to say so.  He changed the conversation, therefore, by
+informing her that he had wintered in Petersburg, remarking at the same
+time that he had hoped to have had the pleasure of meeting her there.
+
+"You will never meet me in Petersburg," she answered, her face changing
+colour as she spoke.  "You do not know, perhaps, why I say this.  But I
+assure you, you will never meet me or mine within the Czar's dominions."
+
+Browne would have given all he possessed in the world not to have given
+utterance to that foolish speech.  He apologised immediately, and with
+a sincerity that made her at once take pity on him.
+
+"Please do not feel so sorry for what you said," she replied.  "It was
+impossible for you to know that you had transgressed.  The truth is, my
+family are supposed to be very dangerous persons.  I do not think, with
+one exception, we are more so than our neighbours; but, as the law now
+stands, we are prohibited.  Whether it will ever be different I cannot
+say.  That is enough, however, about myself.  Let us talk of something
+else."
+
+She had seated herself in a low chair opposite him, with her elbows on
+her knees and her chin resting on her hand.  Browne glanced at her, and
+remembered that he had once carried her in his arms for upwards of a
+mile.  At this thought such a thrill went through him that his teacup,
+which he had placed on a table beside him, trembled in its saucer.
+Unable to trust himself any further in that direction, he talked of
+London, of the weather, of anything that occurred to him; curiously
+enough, however, he did not mention his proposed departure for the
+Mediterranean on the morrow.  In his heart he had an uneasy feeling
+that he had no right to be where he was.  But when he thought of the
+foggy street outside, and realised how comfortable this room was, with
+its easy chairs, its polished floor, on which the firelight danced and
+played, to say nothing of the girl seated opposite him, he could not
+summon up sufficient courage to say good-bye.
+
+"How strange it seems," she said at last--"does it not?--that you and I
+should be sitting here like this!  I had no idea, when we bade each
+other good-bye in Norway, that we should ever meet again."
+
+"I felt certain of it," Browne replied, but he failed to add why he was
+so sure.  "Is it settled how long you remain in England?"
+
+"I do not think so," she answered.  "We may be here some weeks; we may
+be only a few days.  It all depends upon Madame Bernstein."
+
+"Upon Madame Bernstein?" he said, with some surprise.
+
+"Yes," she answered; "she makes our arrangements.  You have no idea how
+busy she is."
+
+Browne certainly had no idea upon that point, and up to that moment he
+was not sure that he was at all interested; now, however, since it
+appeared that madame controlled the girl's movements, she became a
+matter of overwhelming importance to him.
+
+For more than an hour they continued to chat; then Browne rose to bid
+her good-bye.
+
+"Would you think me intrusive if I were to call upon you again?" he
+asked as he took her hand.
+
+"Do so by all means, if you like," she answered, with charming
+frankness.  "I shall be very glad to see you."
+
+Then an idea occurred to him--an idea so magnificent, so delightful,
+that it almost took his breath away.
+
+"Would you think me impertinent if I inquired how you and Madame
+Bernstein amuse yourselves in the evenings?  Have you been to any
+theatres or to the opera?"
+
+The girl shook her head.  "I have never been inside a theatre in
+London," she replied.
+
+"Then perhaps I might be able to persuade you to let me take you to
+one," he answered.  "I might write to Madame Bernstein and arrange an
+evening.  Would she care about it, do you think?"
+
+"I am sure she would," she answered.  "And I know that I should enjoy
+it immensely.  It is very kind of you to ask us."
+
+"It is very kind of you to promise to come," he said gratefully.  "Then
+I will arrange it for to-morrow night if possible.  Good-bye."
+
+"Good-bye," she answered, and held out her little hand to him for the
+second time.
+
+When the front door had closed behind him and he was fairly out in the
+foggy street once more, Browne set off along the pavement on his return
+journey, swinging his umbrella and whistling like a schoolboy.  To a
+crusty old bachelor his state of mind would have appeared inexplicable.
+There was no sort of doubt about it, however, that he was happy; he
+walked as if he were treading on air.  It was a good suggestion, that
+one about the theatre, he said to himself, and he would take care that
+they enjoyed themselves.  He would endeavour to obtain the best box at
+the opera; they were playing _Lohengrin_ at the time, he remembered.
+He would send one of his own carriages to meet them, and it should take
+them home again.  Then a still more brilliant idea occurred to him.
+Why should he not arrange a nice little dinner at some restaurant
+first?  Not one of your flash dining-places but a quiet, comfortable
+little place--Lallemand's, for instance, where the cooking is
+irreproachable, the wine and waiting faultless, and the company who
+frequent it beyond suspicion.  And yet another notion, and as it
+occurred to him he laughed aloud in the public street.
+
+"There will be three of us," he said, "and the chaperon will need an
+escort.  By Jove!  Jimmy called me mad, did he?  Well, I'll be revenged
+on him.  _He shall sit beside Madame Bernstein_."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+If Browne had ever looked forward to anything in his life, he did to
+the dinner-party he had arranged for the evening following his visit to
+the studio in the German Park Road.  On more than one occasion he had
+entertained royalty at his house in Park Lane, and at various times he
+had invited London society to functions which, for magnificence and
+completeness, had scarcely ever been equalled and never excelled.  Upon
+none of these affairs, however, had he bestowed half so much care and
+attention as he did upon the dinner which it is now my duty to
+describe.  Having written the formal invitation, he posted it himself;
+after which he drove to the restaurant which was to be honoured with
+Katherine Petrovitch's presence, and interviewed the proprietor in his
+own sanctum.
+
+"Remember, Alphonse," he said to that delightful little man, "good as
+the others have been, this must be the very best dinner you have ever
+arranged for me.  It must not be long, nor must it be in the least
+degree heavy.  You know my taste in wine, and I give you _carte
+blanche_ to ransack London for what you consider necessary in the way
+of rarities.  Reserve 'No. 6' for me, if it is not already engaged; and
+make it look as nice as you possibly can.  I will send the flowers from
+my house, and my own man shall arrange them."
+
+Alphonse chuckled and rubbed his hands.  This was just the sort of
+order he delighted to receive.
+
+"Ver' good; it shall be done, M'sieu Browne," he said, bowing and
+spreading his hands apart in his customary fashion when pleased.  "I
+have made you many, many dinners before, but I give you the word of
+Alphonse that this shall be the best of all.  _Ma foi!_ but I will give
+you a dinner zat for its betterment you cannot get in England.  Ze cost
+I will----"
+
+"Never mind the cost," answered the reckless young man; "remember, it
+must be the best in every way.  Nothing short of that will do."
+
+"I will satisfy you, m'sieu; never fear that.  It is my honour.
+Perhaps it is royalty zat you have to come to my house?"
+
+"It is nothing of the sort," Browne replied scornfully.  "I am asking
+two ladies and one gentleman."
+
+Alphonse's face expressed his surprise.  It looked as if his beautiful
+dinner was likely to be wasted.
+
+Having arranged the hour and certain other minor details, Browne
+returned to his cab once more, and drove off in search of Jimmy Foote.
+It was some time before he found him, and, when he did, a considerable
+period elapsed before he could obtain speech with him.  Jimmy was at
+the Welter Club, playing black pool with two or three youths of his own
+type.  From the manner in which their silver was changing hands, it
+certainly looked as if that accomplished young gentleman was finding
+his time very fully taken up, picking half-crowns off the rim of the
+table, placing them in his pocket, and paying them out again.
+
+"Hullo, Browne!" said Bellingham of the Blues, after the black ball had
+disappeared into the top pocket and while the marker was spotting it
+again.  "Are you coming in?"
+
+"Not if I know it," said Browne, shaking his head.  "Judging from the
+anxious expression upon Jimmy's face, things are getting a little too
+hot with you all."
+
+At the end of the next round, the latter retired from the game, and,
+putting his arm through that of his friend, led him to the smoking-room
+on the other side of the hall.
+
+"I hope you have calmed down, old fellow," said Jimmy as they seated
+themselves near the fire.  "To what do I owe the honour of seeing you
+here to-night?"
+
+"I want you to do me a favour," Browne returned, a little nervously,
+for he was afraid of what Jimmy would say when he knew everything.
+
+"Anything you like in the world, old man," said the latter.  "You have
+only to ask.  There is nothing wrong, I hope?"
+
+"Nothing at all," replied Browne.  "Rather the other way round, I
+fancy.  The fact of the matter is, I have asked two ladies to dine with
+me to-morrow evening at Lallemand's, and to go to the Opera afterwards.
+I want you to make one of the party."
+
+"The young lady is the painter of that charming Norwegian picture,"
+said Jimmy, with imperturbable gravity, "and the other is her chaperon."
+
+"How on earth did you know it?" asked Browne, blushing like a
+schoolboy, for the simple reason that he thought his secret was
+discovered.
+
+"It's very plain that you never knew I was a wizard," returned his
+companion, with a laugh.  "You old duffer; put two and two together for
+yourself--that is to say, if you have any brains left to do it with.
+In the first place, did you not yesterday afternoon invite me to
+accompany you on a delightful yachting trip to the Mediterranean?  You
+were tired of England, you said, and I gathered from your remarks that
+you were counting the hours until you could say 'good-bye' to her.  We
+went for a walk, and as we passed up Waterloo Place I happened to show
+you a picture.  You turned as white as a sheet at once, and immediately
+dived into the shop, bidding me wait outside.  When you reappeared you
+acted the part of an amiable lunatic; talked a lot of bosh about
+preferring fogs to sunshine; and when I informed you that you were on
+the high-road to an asylum, said it was better than that--you were
+going to the German Park Road.  Our yachting cruise has been thrown to
+the winds; and now, to make up for it, you have the impudence to ask me
+to play gooseberry for you, and try to propitiate me with one of
+Lallemand's dinners, which invariably upset me for a week, and a dose
+of Wagner which will drive me crazy for a month."
+
+"How do you know I want you to play gooseberry?" asked Browne savagely.
+"It's like your impudence to say such a thing."
+
+"How do I know anything?" said Jimmy, with delightful calmness.  "Why,
+by the exercise of my own common-sense, of course--a commodity you will
+never possess if you go on like this.  You are spoons on this girl, I
+suppose, and since there's another coming with her, it's pretty plain
+to me somebody must be there to keep that other out of the way."
+
+"You grow very coarse," retorted Browne, now thoroughly on his dignity.
+
+"It's a coarse age, they say," Foote replied.  "Don't I know by
+experience exactly what that second party will be like!"
+
+"If you do you are very clever," said Browne.
+
+"One has to be clever to keep pace with the times," Jimmy replied.
+"But, seriously, old man, if you want me, I shall be only too glad to
+come to your dinner; but, mind, I take no responsibility for what
+happens.  I am not going to be called to account by every London mother
+who possesses a marriageable daughter."
+
+"You needn't be afraid," said Browne.  "I will absolve you from all
+responsibility.  At any rate you assure me that I can depend upon you?"
+
+"Of course you can, and anything else you like besides," Foote replied.
+Then, laying his hand upon Browne's shoulder, he added: "My dear old
+Jack, in spite of our long acquaintance, I don't think you quite know
+me yet.  I talk a lot of nonsense, I'm afraid; but as far as you are
+concerned you may depend the heart's in the right place.  Now I come to
+think of it, I am not quite certain it would not be better for you to
+be decently married and out of harm's way.  Of course, one doesn't like
+to see one's pals hurried off like that; but in your case it's
+different."
+
+"My dear fellow," said Browne, "as you said just now, you certainly do
+talk a lot of nonsense.  Whoever said anything about marriage?  Of
+course I'm not going to be married.  I have never contemplated such a
+thing.  It's always the way; directly a man shows a little extra
+courtesy to a woman, talks to her five minutes longer than he is
+accustomed to do, perhaps, or dances with her twice running, you
+immediately get the idea that everything is settled between them, and
+that all you have to do is to wonder what sort of wedding present you
+ought to give them."
+
+"When a man gives himself away as completely as you have done in this
+particular instance, it is not to be wondered that his friends think
+there is something in the air," said Jimmy.  "However, you know your
+own business best.  What time is the dinner?"
+
+"Seven o'clock sharp," said Browne.  "You had better meet me there a
+few minutes before.  Don't forget we go to the Opera afterwards."
+
+"I am not likely to forget it," said Jimmy, with a doleful face.
+
+"Very well, good-bye until to-morrow evening."
+
+There was a little pause, and then Browne held out his hand.
+
+"Thank you, Jimmy," he said with a sincerity that was quite
+inconsistent with the apparent importance of the subject.  "I felt sure
+I could rely upon you."
+
+"Rely upon me always," Jimmy replied.  "I don't think you'll find me
+wanting."
+
+With that Browne bade him good-bye, and went out into the street.  He
+hailed a cab, and bade the man drive him to Park Lane.
+
+Once it had started, he laid himself back on the cushions and gave free
+rein to his thoughts.  Though he had to all intents and purposes denied
+it a few minutes before, there could be no doubt that he was in
+love--head over ears in love.  He had had many passing fancies before,
+it is true, but never had he experienced such a strong attack of the
+fever as at present.  As the cab passed along the crowded street he
+seemed to see that sweet face, with its dark eyes and hair; that
+slender figure, and those beautiful white hands, with their long
+tapering fingers; and to hear again the soft tones of Katherine's voice
+as she had spoken to him in the studio that afternoon.  She was a queen
+among women, he told himself, and was worthy to be loved as such.  But
+if she were so beautiful and so desirable, could she be induced to have
+anything to do with himself?  Could she ever be brought to love him?
+It was consistent with the man's character to be so humble, and yet it
+was strange that he should have been so.  Ever since he had been
+eligible for matrimony he had been the especial prey of mothers with
+marriageable daughters.  They had fawned upon him, had petted him, and
+in every way had endeavoured to effect his capture.  Whether or not
+Katherine Petrovitch knew of his wealth it was impossible for him to
+say.  He hoped she did not.  It was his ambition in life to be loved,
+and be loved for himself alone.  If she would trust him, he would
+devote his whole life to making her happy, and to proving how well
+founded was the faith she had reposed in him.  Vitally important as the
+question was, I believe he had never for one moment doubted her.  His
+nature was too open for that, while she herself, like Caesar's wife, was
+of course above suspicion.  The fact that she had confessed to him that
+her family was prohibited in Russia only served to intensify his
+admiration for her truthful qualities.  Though he knew nothing of her
+history or antecedents, it never for one moment caused him any
+uneasiness.  He loved her for herself, not for her family.  When he
+went to bed that night he dreamt of her, and when he rose in the
+morning he was, if possible, more in love than before.  Fully occupied
+as his day usually was, on this occasion he found it more than
+difficult to pass the time.  He counted the hours--nay, almost the
+minutes--until it should be possible for him to set off to the
+restaurant.  By the midday post a charming little note arrived, signed
+Katherine Petrovitch.  Browne was in his study when it was brought to
+him, and it was with the greatest difficulty he could contain his
+impatience until the butler had left the room.  The instant he had done
+so, however, he tore open the envelope and drew out the contents.  The
+writing was quaint and quite un-English, but its peculiarities only
+served to make it the more charming.  It would give Madame Bernstein
+and the writer, it said, much pleasure to dine with him that evening.
+He read and re-read it, finding a fresh pleasure in it on each
+occasion.  It carried with it a faint scent which was as intoxicating
+as the perfume of the Lotus Blossom.
+
+Had the beautiful Miss Verney, who, it must be confessed, had more than
+once written him letters of the most confidential description, guessed
+for a single moment that he preferred the tiny sheet he carried in his
+coat-pocket to her own epistles, it is certain her feelings would have
+been painful in the extreme.  The fact remains, however, that Browne
+preserved the letter, and, if I know anything of human nature, he has
+it still.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+The dinner that evening must be counted a distinct success.  Browne was
+the first to arrive at the rendezvous, and it was not wonderful that he
+should have been, considering that he had spent the whole of his day
+waiting for that moment.  The owner of the restaurant received him
+personally.
+
+"Well, Lallemand," said Browne, with an anxiety that was almost
+ludicrous, "how are your preparations?  Is everything ready?"
+
+"Certainly, monsieur," Lallemand replied, spreading his hands apart.
+"Everything is ready; Felix himself has done ze cooking, I have chosen
+ze wine, and your own gardener has arranged ze flowers.  You have ze
+best men-servants in London to wait upon you.  I have procured you four
+kinds of fruit that has only a few times been seen in England before;
+and now I give you ze word of Lallemand zat you will have ze most
+perfect little dinner in ze city of London."
+
+"I am glad to hear it," said Browne.  "I am exceedingly obliged to you
+for the trouble you have taken in the matter."
+
+"I beg you will not mention ze trouble, monsieur," replied Lallemand
+politely.  "It is ze pleasure of my life to serve you."
+
+He had scarcely spoken before a cab drew up before the door, and Jimmy
+Foote made his appearance, clad in immaculate evening-dress.  He
+greeted Browne with a somewhat sheepish air, as if he were ashamed of
+himself for something, and did not quite know what that something was.
+
+"Well, old man," he said.  "Here I am, you see; up to time, I hope.
+How d'ye do, Lallemand?"
+
+"I hope you are most well, Monsieur Foote," replied Lallemand, with one
+of his inimitable bows.
+
+"I am better than I shall be after your dinner," Foote replied, with a
+smile.  "Human nature is weak.  I am tempted, and I know that I shall
+fall."
+
+Browne all this time was showing signs of impatience.  He glanced
+repeatedly at his watch, and as seven o'clock drew near he imagined
+that every vehicle pulling up outside must contain the two ladies for
+whom he was waiting so eagerly.  When at last they did arrive he
+hastened to the door to greet them.  Madame Bernstein was the first to
+alight, and Katherine Petrovitch followed her a moment later.  She gave
+her hand to Browne, and as he took it such a thrill went through him
+that it was wonderful the young man did not collapse upon the pavement.
+
+Having conducted them to the room in which they were to take off their
+wraps, Browne went in search of Foote, whom he found in the dining-room.
+
+"Pull yourself together, old chap," said Jimmy as he glanced at him;
+"you are all on the jump.  What on earth is the matter with you?  Take
+my advice and try a pick-me-up."
+
+"I wouldn't touch a drop for worlds," said Browne, with righteous
+indignation.  "I wonder you can suggest such a thing."
+
+Instead, he went to the table and moved a flower-vase which was an
+eighth of an inch from the centrepiece farther than its companion on
+the other side.
+
+"This is as bad a case as I ever remember," said Foote to himself; and
+at the same moment Katherine Petrovitch and Madame Bernstein entered
+the room.  A somewhat painful surprise was in store for Browne.  There
+could be no doubt about one thing: Madame Bernstein had dressed herself
+with due regard to the importance of the occasion.  Her gown was of
+bright ruby velvet; her arms were entirely bare; and while her bodice
+was supported by the most slender of shoulder-straps, it was cut
+considerably lower than most people would have considered compatible
+with either her age or her somewhat portly appearance.  Round her neck
+and studded in her hair were many diamonds, all so palpably false as to
+create no suspicion of the means by which she had obtained them.  Her
+companion's costume, on the other hand, was simplicity itself.  She was
+attired in black, unrelieved by any touch of colour; a plain band of
+velvet encircled her throat, and Browne confessed to himself afterwards
+that he had never in his life seen anything more becoming.  He
+presented Foote to the ladies with due ceremony; and when their places
+had been allotted them they sat down to dinner, madame on Browne's
+right, Katherine on his left.
+
+Despite the knowledge that the dinner had been prepared by one of the
+most admirable _chefs_ in the world, and the fact that Lallemand
+himself had given his assurance that everything was satisfactory,
+Browne was nevertheless exercised in his mind lest anything should go
+wrong.  He might have spared himself the anxiety, however, for the
+dinner was perfection itself.  One other thing troubled him, and that
+was that the person he was most anxious to please scarcely touched
+anything.  But if she did not, Madame Bernstein made ample amends for
+her.  She allowed no dish to pass her untasted; the connoisseur was
+apparent in her appreciation of the wines, while her praise of the
+cooking was volubility itself.  From what he had seen of her, Browne
+had been prepared to dislike her intensely; to his surprise, however,
+he discovered that she improved on acquaintance.  Seemingly, she had
+been everywhere and had seen everything; in her youth she had known
+Garibaldi personally, had met Kossuth, and been brought into contact
+with many other European liberators.  For this reason alone her
+conversation could scarcely have failed to prove interesting.
+Katherine, on the other hand, was strangely quiet.
+
+The dinner at an end, the ladies withdrew to put on their cloaks; and
+while they were absent Browne ascertained that his carriage was at the
+door.  In it they drove to Covent Garden.  The box was on the prompt
+side of the house, and was the best that influence and money could
+secure.  Madame Bernstein and Katherine Petrovitch took their places in
+the front, while Browne managed to manoeuvre his chair into such a
+position that he could speak to Katherine without the others
+overhearing what he said.
+
+"You are fond of music, are you not?" he inquired as the orchestra took
+their places.  He felt as he said it that he need not have asked; with
+such a face she could scarcely fail to be.
+
+"I am more than fond of it," she answered, playing with the handle of
+her fan.  "Music and painting are my two greatest pleasures."
+
+She uttered a little sigh, which seemed to suggest to Browne that she
+had not very much pleasure in her life.  At least, that was the way in
+which he interpreted it.
+
+Then the curtain went up, and Browne was forced to be silent.  I think,
+if you were to ask him now which was the happiest evening of his life,
+he would answer, "That on which I saw Lohengrin with Katherine
+Petrovitch."  If the way in which the time slipped by could be taken as
+any criterion, it must certainly have been so, for the evening seemed
+scarcely to have begun ere it was over and the National Anthem was
+being played.  When the curtain descended the two young men escorted
+the ladies to the entrance hall, where they waited while the carriage
+was being called.  It was at this juncture that Jimmy proved of use.
+Feeling certain Browne would be anxious to have a few minutes alone
+with Katherine, he managed, with great diplomacy, to draw Madame
+Bernstein on one side, on the pretence of telling her an amusing story
+concerning a certain Continental military attache with whom they were
+both acquainted.
+
+"How long do you think it will be before I may venture to see you
+again?" Browne asked the girl when they were alone together.
+
+"I cannot say," she replied, with an attempt at a smile.  "I do not
+know what Madame Bernstein's arrangements are."
+
+"But surely Madame Bernstein does not control all your actions?" he
+asked, I fear a little angrily; for he did not like to think she was so
+dependent on the elder woman.
+
+"No, she does not altogether control them, of course," Katherine
+replied; "but I always have so much to do for her that I do not feel
+justified in making any arrangements without first consulting her."
+
+"But you must surely have some leisure," he continued.  "Perhaps you
+shop in the High Street, or walk in the Park or Kensington Gardens on
+fine mornings.  Might I not chance to find you in one of those places?"
+
+"I fear not," she answered, shaking her head.  "If it is fine I have my
+work to do."
+
+"And if it should be wet?" asked Browne, feeling his heart sink within
+him as he realised that she was purposely placing obstacles in the way
+of their meeting.  "Surely you cannot paint when the days are as gloomy
+as they have been lately."
+
+"No," she answered; "that is impossible.  But it gives me no more
+leisure than before; for in that case I have letters to write for
+Madame Bernstein, and she has an enormous amount of correspondence."
+
+Though Browne wondered what that correspondence could be, he said
+nothing to her on the subject, nor had he any desire to thrust his
+presence upon the girl when he saw she was not anxious for it.  It was
+plain to him that there was something behind it all--some reason to
+account for her pallor and her quietness that evening.  What that
+reason was, however, he could not for the life of him understand.
+
+They had arrived at this point when the carriage reached the door.
+Madame Bernstein and Foote accordingly approached them, and the
+quartette walked together towards the entrance.
+
+"I thank you many times for your kindness to-night," said Katherine,
+looking shyly up at Browne.
+
+"Please, don't thank me," he replied.  "It is I who should thank you.
+I hope you have enjoyed yourself."
+
+"Very much indeed," she answered.  "I could see _Lohengrin_ a hundred
+times without growing in the least tired of it."
+
+As she said this they reached the carriage.  Browne placed the ladies
+in it, and shook hands with them as he bade them good-night.  He gave
+the footman his instructions, and presently the carriage rolled away,
+leaving the two young men standing on the pavement, looking after it.
+It was a beautiful starlight night, with a touch of frost in the air.
+
+"Are we going to take a cab, or shall we walk?" said Foote.
+
+"Let us walk, that is if you don't mind," Browne replied.  "I feel as
+if I could enjoy a ten-mile tramp to-night after the heat of that
+theatre."
+
+"I'm afraid I do not," Foote replied.  "My idea is the 'Perigord' for a
+little supper, and then to bed.  Browne, old man, I have been through a
+good deal for you to-night.  I like the young lady very much, but
+Madame Bernstein is--well, she is Madame Bernstein.  I can say no more."
+
+"Never mind, old chap," said Browne, patting his companion on the
+shoulder.  "You have the satisfaction of knowing that your martyrdom is
+appreciated; the time may come when you will want me to do the same
+thing for you.  One good turn deserves another, you know."
+
+"When I want a turn of that description done for me, I will be sure to
+let you know," Foote continued; "but if I have any sort of luck, it
+will be many years before I come to you with such a request.  When I
+remember that, but for my folly in showing you that picture in Waterloo
+Place, we should by this time be on the other side of the Eddystone,
+_en route_ for the Mediterranean and sunshine, I feel as if I could sit
+down and weep.  However, it is _kismet_, I suppose?"
+
+Browne offered no reply.
+
+"Are you coming in?" said Foote as they reached the doorstep of the
+Perigord Club.
+
+"No, thank you, old man," said Browne.  "I think, if you will excuse
+me, I will get home."
+
+"Good-night, then," said Foote; "I shall probably see you in the
+morning."
+
+Having bidden him good-night, Browne proceeded on his way.
+
+Next morning, as soon as breakfast was over, he betook himself to
+Kensington Gardens, where he wandered about for upwards of an hour, but
+saw no sign of the girl he hoped to meet.  Leaving the Gardens, he made
+his way to the High Street, with an equally futile result.  Regardless
+of the time he was wasting, and of everything else, he passed on in the
+direction of Addison Road.  As disappointment still pursued him, he
+made up his mind to attempt a forlorn hope.  Turning into the Melbury
+Road, he made for German Park Road, and reaching the studio, rang the
+bell.  When the door was opened he found himself confronted with an
+elderly person, wearing a sack for an apron, and holding a bar of
+yellow soap in her hand.
+
+"I have called to see Miss Petrovitch," he said.
+
+"She is not at home, sir," the woman replied.  "She has not been here
+this morning.  Can I give her any message?"
+
+"I am afraid not," Browne replied.  "I wanted to see her personally;
+but you might tell her that Mr. Browne called."
+
+"Mr. Browne," she repeated.  "Very good, sir.  You may be sure I will
+tell her."
+
+Browne thanked her, and, to make assurance doubly sure, slipped five
+shillings into her hand.  Then, passing out of the garden, he made his
+way back to the High Street.  He had not proceeded more than a hundred
+yards down that interesting thoroughfare, however, before he saw no
+less a person than Katherine herself approaching him.
+
+They were scarcely a dozen paces apart when she recognised him.
+
+"Good-morning, Miss Petrovitch," he said, raising his hat and speaking
+a little nervously.  "I have just called at your studio in the hope
+that I might see you.  The woman told me that she did not know when you
+would return.  I thought I might possibly meet you here."
+
+It was a poor enough excuse, but the only one he could think of at the
+moment.
+
+"You wanted to see me?" she said in a tone of surprise.
+
+"Are you angry with me for that?" he asked.  "I did not think you would
+be; but if you are I will go away again.  By this time you should know
+that I have no desire save to make you happy."
+
+This was the first time he had spoken so plainly.  Her face paled a
+little.
+
+"I did not know that you were so anxious to see me," she said, "or I
+would have made a point of being at home."
+
+All this time they had been standing on the spot where they had first
+met.
+
+"Perhaps you will permit me to walk a little way with you?" said
+Browne, half afraid that she would refuse.
+
+"I shall be very pleased," she answered promptly.
+
+Thereupon they walked back in the direction of the studio.
+
+At the gate they stopped.  She turned and faced him, and as she did so
+she held out her hand; it was plain that she had arrived at a decision
+on some important point.
+
+"Good-bye, Mr. Browne," she said, and as she said it Browne noticed
+that her voice trembled and her eyes filled with tears.  He could bear
+it no longer.
+
+"Miss Petrovitch," he began, "you must forgive my rudeness; but I feel
+sure that you are not happy.  Will you not trust me and let me help
+you?  You know how gladly I would do so."
+
+"There is no way in which you can help me," she answered, and then she
+bade him good-bye, and, with what Browne felt sure was a little sob,
+vanished into the studio.  For some moments he stood waiting where he
+was, overwhelmed by the suddenness of her exit, and hoping she might
+come out again; then, realising that she did not intend doing so, he
+turned on his heel and made his way back to the High Street, and so to
+Park Lane.  His afternoon was a broken and restless one; he could not
+rid himself of the recollection of the girl's face, and he felt as sure
+as a man could well be that something was amiss.  But how was he to
+help her?  At any rate he was going to try.
+
+The clocks in the neighbourhood were striking eleven next morning as he
+alighted from his hansom and approached the door of the studio.  He
+rang the bell, but no answer rewarded him.  He rang again, but with the
+same result.
+
+Not being able to make any one hear, he returned to his cab and set off
+for the Warwick Road.  Reaching the house, the number of which
+Katherine had given him, he ascended the steps and rang the bell.  When
+the maid-servant answered his summons, he inquired for Miss Petrovitch.
+
+"Miss Petrovitch?" said the girl, as if she were surprised.  "She is
+not here, sir.  She and Madame Bernstein left for Paris this morning."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+When Browne heard the maid's news, his heart sank like lead.  He could
+scarcely believe his ill-fortune.  Only a moment before he had been
+comforting himself with the thought that he would soon be standing face
+to face with Katherine, ready to ask her a question which should decide
+the happiness of his life.  Now his world seemed suddenly to have
+turned as black as midnight.  Why had she left England so suddenly?
+What had taken her away?  Could it have been something in connection
+with that mysterious business of Madame Bernstein's of which he had
+heard so much of late?  Then another idea struck him.  Perhaps it was
+the knowledge that she was leaving that had occasioned her unhappiness
+on the previous afternoon.  The maid who had opened the door to him,
+and whose information had caused him such disappointment, was a typical
+specimen of the London boarding-house servant, and yet there was
+sufficient of the woman left in her to enable her to see that her news
+had proved a crushing blow to the man standing before her.
+
+"Can you tell me at what hour they left?" Browne inquired.  "I was
+hoping to have seen Miss Petrovitch this morning."
+
+"I can tell you what the time was exactly," the girl replied.  "It was
+on the stroke of nine when they got into the cab."
+
+"Are you quite certain upon that point?" he asked.
+
+"Quite certain, sir," she answered.  "I know it was nine o'clock,
+because I had just carried in the first floor's breakfast; and a
+precious noise, sir, he always makes if it is not on the table punctual
+to the minute.  There were some letters for Madame Bernstein by the
+post, which the other girl took up to her bedroom.  As soon as she read
+them she sent down for Mrs. Jimson and called for her bill.  'I leave
+for Paris in an hour's time, Mrs. Jimson,' says she, sort of
+short-like, for I heard her myself; 'so make me out my bill and let me
+have it quickly.'"
+
+"And did Miss Petrovitch appear at all surprised or put out at having
+to leave London at such short notice?" Browne asked, not without a
+little trepidation.
+
+"Well, sir, that was exactly what I was a-going to tell you," the girl
+replied, dropping her voice a little, and glancing back over her
+shoulder into the house, as if she were afraid of being overheard.
+"She did seem precious put out about it; at least so the other girl
+says.  Jane tells me she feels certain Miss Petrovitch had been crying,
+her eyes were that red, and when she went into the room she and madame
+were at it hammer and tongs.
+
+"I suppose they left no message for any one?" Browne inquired, refusing
+to comment on what the girl had just told him.
+
+"Not as I know of, sir," the young woman replied.  "But if you will
+just wait a minute I'll go in and ask Mrs. Jimson.  She will be sure to
+know."
+
+Browne contained his patience as best he could for some five or six
+minutes.  Then the girl returned and shook her head.
+
+"There's no message of any sort, sir," she said; "at least not as Mrs.
+Jimson knows of."
+
+"Thank you," said Browne simply.  "I am much obliged to you."
+
+As he said it he slipped half a sovereign into the girl's hand.  The
+bribe completed the effect the touch of romance, combined with his
+pleasing personality, to say nothing of his smart cab drawn up beside
+the pavement, had already produced.  Not only would she have told him
+all she knew, but, had she dared, she would have gone so far as to have
+expressed her sympathy with him.
+
+Browne was about to descend the steps, when another idea occurred to
+him, and he turned to the girl again.
+
+"You do not happen to be aware of their address in Paris, I suppose?"
+he inquired.  "I have a particular reason for asking the question."
+
+"Hush, sir!" she whispered.  "If you really want to know it, I believe
+I can find out for you.  Madame Bernstein wrote it down for Mrs.
+Jimson, so that she could send on any letters that came for her.  I
+know where Mrs. Jimson put the piece of paper, and if you'll just wait
+a minute longer, I'll see if I can find it for you and copy it out.  I
+won't be a minute longer than I can help."
+
+Feeling very much as if he were being guilty of a dishonourable action,
+Browne allowed her to depart upon her errand.  This time she was
+somewhat longer away, but when she returned she carried, concealed in
+her hand, a small slip of paper.  He took it from her, and, once more
+thanking her for her kindness, returned to his cab.
+
+"Home, Williams," he cried to his coachman, "and as quickly as
+possible.  I have no time to spare."
+
+As the vehicle sped along in the direction of the High Street, Browne
+unfolded and glanced at the paper the girl had given him.  Upon it,
+written in a clumsy hand, was the address he wanted, and which he would
+have fought the world to obtain.
+
+"Madame Bernstein," so it ran, "35, Rue Jacquarie, Paris."
+
+"Very good," said Browne to himself triumphantly.  "Now I know where to
+find them.  Let me see!  They were to leave London in an hour from nine
+o'clock; that means that they started from Victoria and are travelling
+_via_ Newhaven and Dieppe.  Now, there's a train from Charing Cross,
+_via_ Dover and Calais, at eleven.  If I can catch that I shall be in
+Paris an hour and a half after them."
+
+He consulted his watch anxiously, to find that he had barely an hour in
+which to pack his bag and to get to the station.  However, if it could
+be done, he was determined to do it; accordingly he bade his man drive
+faster.  Reaching Park Lane, he rang for his valet, and when that
+somewhat stolid individual put in an appearance, bade him pack a few
+necessaries and be ready to start for the Continent at once.  Being a
+well-drilled servant, and accustomed, by long usage, to his master's
+rapid flittings from place to place, the man offered no comment, but
+merely saying, "Very good, sir," departed to carry out his instructions.
+
+Two minutes to eleven found Browne standing upon the platform at
+Charing Cross Station.  It was not until he was comfortably installed
+in the carriage and the train was rolling out of the station, that the
+full meaning of what he was doing struck him.  Why was he leaving
+England?  To follow this girl.  And why?  For one very good
+reason--_because he loved her_!  But why _should_ he have loved her,
+when, with his wealth, he could have married the daughter of almost any
+peer in England; when, had he so desired, he could have chosen his wife
+from among the most beautiful or most talented women in Europe?
+Katherine Petrovitch, attractive and charming as she was, was neither
+as beautiful, rich, or clever as a hundred women he had met.  And yet
+she was the one in the world he desired for his wife.
+
+So concerned was he about her that, when they reached Dover, his first
+thought was to examine the sea in order to convince himself that she
+had had a good crossing.  He boarded the steamer, the lines were cast
+off, and presently the vessel's head was pointing for the Continent.
+Little by little the English coast dropped behind them and the shores
+of France loomed larger.  Never before had the coast struck him as
+being so beautiful.  He entered the train at Calais with a fresh
+satisfaction as he remembered that every revolution of the wheels was
+bringing him closer to the woman he loved.  The lights were lit in the
+cafes and upon the boulevards, when he reached Paris, and as he drove
+through the crowded streets in the direction of the hotel he usually
+affected the city seemed all glitter, gaiety, and life.
+
+Familiar as he was with the city, it seemed altogether different to him
+to-night.  The loungers in the courtyard of the hotel, the bustling
+waiters, the very chambermaids, served to remind him that, while in the
+flesh he was still the same John Grantham Browne, in the spirit he was
+an altogether separate and distinct individual from the man they had
+previously known.  On reaching his own room he opened the window, leant
+out, and looked upon Paris by night.  The voice of the great city spoke
+to him, and greeted him as with the sweetest music.  Once more he was
+sharing the same city with Katherine Petrovitch, breathing the same
+air, and hearing the same language.
+
+Shutting the window at last, he washed off the stains of travel,
+changed his attire, and descended to the dining-hall.
+
+Having no desire to lose time, he resolved to institute inquiries at
+once about the Rue Jacquarie, and to seek, and if possible to obtain,
+an interview with Katherine before she could possibly depart from Paris
+again.  How was he to know that Madame Bernstein's plans might not
+necessitate another removal to Rome, Berlin, or St. Petersburg?--in
+which case he might very easily lose sight of her altogether.  He had
+never trusted madame, and since her departure from England he was even
+less disposed to do so than before.  There was something about her that
+he did not altogether appreciate.  He had told himself that he did not
+like her the first day he had met her at Merok, and he was even more
+convinced of the fact now.  What the link was between the two women he
+could not think, and he was almost afraid to attempt to solve the
+mystery.
+
+Dinner at an end, he rose and went to his room to put on a cloak.  In
+love though he was, he had still sufficient of his father's prudence
+left to be careful of his health.
+
+Descending to the courtyard once more, he called a fiacre, and, when
+the man had driven up, inquired whether he knew where the Rue Jacquarie
+was.  The man looked at him with some show of surprise.
+
+"Oui, m'sieu," he replied, "I know the Rue Jacquarie, of course;
+but----"
+
+"Never mind any buts," Browne replied, as he jumped into the cab.  "I
+have business in the Rue Jacquarie, so drive me there at once."
+
+"To what number?" the man inquired, in a tone that implied that he was
+not over-anxious for the job.
+
+"Never mind the number," said Browne; "drive me to the corner and set
+me down there."
+
+The man whipped up his horse, and they started _via_ the Rue Tronchet.
+Turning into the Rue St. Honore, and thence into the Place de la
+Madeleine, they proceeded in the direction of Montmartre.  For some
+time Browne endeavoured to keep tally of the route; eventually,
+however, he was obliged to relinquish the attempt in despair.  From one
+street they passed into another, and to Browne it seemed that every one
+was alike.  At last the driver stopped his horse.
+
+"This is the Rue Jacquarie," he said, pointing with his whip down a
+long and somewhat dingy thoroughfare.
+
+Browne bade him wait for him, and then proceeded down the street on
+foot in search of No. 35.  After the magnificent quarter of the city in
+which he had installed himself, the Rue Jacquarie seemed mean and
+contemptible in the extreme.  The houses were small and dingy, and it
+was plain that they were occupied by people who were not the possessors
+of any conspicuous degree of wealth.  He walked the whole length of the
+street in search of No. 35, and, not finding it, returned upon the
+other side.  At last he discovered the house he wanted.  He thereupon
+crossed the road, and, standing on the opposite pavement, regarded it
+steadfastly.
+
+Lights shone from three of the windows, and Browne's pulses beat more
+quickly as he reflected that it was just possible one of them might
+emanate from Katherine's room.
+
+It was now close upon ten o'clock, and if all had gone well with them
+the girl should now have been in Paris some three hours.  It was
+extremely unlikely that, after such a journey, she would have gone out,
+so that he had every reason for feeling certain she must be in the
+house before him.  In spite of the thin rain that was falling, he stood
+and watched the building for some minutes.  Once a woman's shadow
+passed across a blind upon the second floor, and Browne felt his heart
+leap as he saw it.  A few moments later a man and a woman passed the
+concierge.  They paused upon the doorstep to wish some one within
+"good-night"; then, descending the steps, they set off in the same
+direction in which Browne himself had come.  Before doing so, however,
+they turned and looked up and down the street, as if they were afraid
+they might be observed.  Seeing Browne watching the house, they
+hastened their steps, and presently disappeared down a side
+thoroughfare.  For an ordinary observer this small event might have had
+little or no significance; but to Browne, in whose mind indefinable
+suspicions were already shaping themselves, it seemed more than a
+little disquieting.  That they had noticed him, and that they were
+alarmed by the knowledge that he was watching the house, was as plain
+as the lights in the windows opposite.  But why they should have been
+so frightened was what puzzled him.  What was going on in the house, or
+rather what had they been doing that they should fear being overlooked?
+He asked himself these questions as he paced down the street in the
+direction of his cab.  But he could not answer them to his satisfaction.
+
+"Drive me to the Amphitryon Club," he said, as he took his place in the
+vehicle once more; and then continued to himself, "I'd give something
+to understand what it all means."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+Now the Amphitryon Club is situated in the Avenue de l'Opera, as all
+the world knows, and is one of the most exclusive and distinguished
+clubs in Europe.  Browne had been a member for many years, and during
+his stays in Paris was usually to be found there.
+
+It was a fine building, in which everything was done in the most
+sumptuous and luxurious fashion.  You might lunch there on bread and
+cheese or a Porter-house steak; but the bread, the cheese, and the
+steak, while unpretentious in themselves, would be the very best
+obtainable of their kind.  What led him there on that particular
+evening Browne did not quite know.  It was Destiny!  Blind Fate had him
+in hand, and was luring him on to what was to be the most momentous
+half-hour of his life.  He knew he was pretty certain of finding some
+one there with whom he was acquainted; but he was certainly not
+prepared for the surprise, which greeted him, when he pushed open the
+swing-doors and passed into the smoking-room.  Seated in a chair by the
+fire, and looking into it in the meditative fashion of a man, who has
+dined well and feels disinclined for much exertion, was no less a
+person than Maas.
+
+"Mon cher ami," he cried, springing to his feet and holding out his
+hand, "this is a delightful surprise.  I had no notion you were in
+Paris."
+
+"I only arrived this evening," Browne replied.  "But I might return the
+compliment, for I thought you were in St. Petersburg."
+
+"No such thing," said Maas, shaking his head.  "Petersburg at this time
+of the year does not agree with my constitution.  To be able to
+appreciate it one must have Slav blood in one's veins, which I am
+discourteous enough to be glad to say I have not.  But what brings you
+to the gay city?  Is it on business or pleasure?  But there, I need not
+ask.  I should have remembered that business does not enter into your
+life."
+
+"A false conclusion on your part," said Browne as he lit a cigar.  "For
+a man who has nothing to do, I have less leisure than many people who
+declare they are overworked."
+
+"By the way," Maas continued, "they tell me we have to congratulate you
+at last."
+
+"Upon what?" Browne inquired.  "What have I done now that the world
+should desire to wish me well?"
+
+"I refer to your approaching marriage," said Maas.  "Deauville was in
+here the other day, _en route_ to Cannes, and he told us that it was
+stated in a London paper that you were about to be married.  I told him
+I felt sure he must be mistaken.  If you had been I should probably
+have known it."
+
+"It's not true," said Browne angrily.  "Deauville should know better
+than to attach any credence to such a story."
+
+"Exactly what I told him," said Maas, with his usual imperturbability.
+"I said that, at his age, he should know better than to believe every
+silly rumour he sees in the press.  I assured him that you were worth a
+good many married men yet."
+
+As he said this Maas watched Browne's face carefully.  What he saw
+there must have satisfied him on certain points upon which he was
+anxious for information, for he smiled a trifle sardonically, and
+immediately changed the conversation by inquiring what Browne intended
+doing that night.
+
+"Going home to bed," said Browne promptly.  "I have had a long day's
+travelling, and I've a lot to do to-morrow.  I think, if you'll excuse
+me, old chap, I'll wish you good-night now."
+
+"Good-night," said Maas, taking his hand.  "When shall I see you again?
+By the way, I hope, if it's any convenience to you, you'll let me put
+my rooms at your disposal.  But there, I forgot you have your own
+magnificent palace to go to.  To offer you hospitality would be
+superfluous."
+
+"You talk of my house as if I should be likely to go there," said
+Browne scornfully.  "You know as well as I do that I never enter the
+doors.  What should I do in a caravanserai like that?  No; I am staying
+at the usual place in the Place Vendome.  Now, good-night once more."
+
+"Good-night," said Maas, and Browne accordingly left the room.  When
+the swingdoors had closed behind him Maas went back to his chair and
+lit another cigarette.
+
+"Our friend Browne is bent upon making a fool of himself," he said to
+his cigarette; "and, what is worse, he will put me to a lot of trouble
+and inconvenience.  At this stage of the proceedings, however, it would
+be worse than useless to endeavour to check him.  He has got the bit
+between his teeth, and would bolt right out if I were to try to bring
+him to a standstill.  The only thing that can be done, as far as I can
+see, is to sit still and watch the comedy, and step in like the god out
+of the machine, when all is ready."
+
+Having thus expressed himself, he lit another cigarette, and went off
+in search of the supper Browne had declined.
+
+Browne's first night in Paris was destined to prove a restless one.
+Whether it was the journey or his visit to the Rue Jacquarie that was
+responsible for it, I cannot say; one thing, however, is quite certain:
+do what he would, he could not sleep.  He tried all the proverbial
+recipes in vain.  He walked about his room, drank a glass of cold
+water, tried to picture sheep jumping over a hedge; but in vain.  Do
+what he would, the drowsy god would not listen to his appeal.  Indeed,
+the first beams of the morning sun were stealing into his room before
+his eyelids closed.  When his man came in to dress him he felt as
+drowsy as if he had not closed his eyes all night.  He was not going to
+lie in bed, however.  During breakfast he debated with himself what he
+should do with regard to the Rue Jacquarie.  Should he loiter about the
+streets in the hope of intercepting Katherine when she went abroad?  Or
+should he take the bull by the horns and march boldly up to the house
+and ask for an interview?  Anxious as he was to see her, he had no
+desire to thrust his presence upon her if it was not wanted.  He knew
+that she would be the first to resent that, and yet he felt he _must_
+see her, happen what might.  As soon as breakfast was finished he put
+on his hat and set out for a stroll.  The clouds of the previous night
+had departed, the sky was blue, and the breeze fresh and invigorating.
+Many a bright eye and captivating glance was thrown at the healthy,
+stalwart young Englishman, who carried himself as if fatigue were a
+thing unknown to him.  Then, suddenly, he found himself face to face
+with Katherine Petrovitch!
+
+He lifted his hat mechanically, but for a moment he stood rooted to the
+spot with surprise, not knowing what to say or do.  Great as was his
+astonishment, however, hers was infinitely greater.  She stood before
+him, her colour coming and going, and with a frightened look in her
+eyes.
+
+"Mr. Browne, what does this mean?" she asked, with a little catch of
+the breath.  "You are the last person I expected to see in Paris."
+
+"I was called over here on important business," he replied, with
+unblushing mendacity; and as he said it he watched her face, and found
+it more troubled than he had ever yet seen it.  "But why, even if we
+are surprised to see each other, should we remain standing here?" he
+continued, for want of something better to say.  "May I not walk a
+short distance with you?"
+
+"If you wish it," she replied, but with no great display of
+graciousness.  It was very plain that she did not attach very much
+credence to his excuse, and it was equally certain that she was
+inclined to resent it.  Nothing was said on the latter point, however,
+and they strolled along the pavement together, he wondering how he
+could best set himself right with her, and she combating a feeling of
+impending calamity, and at the same time trying to convince herself
+that she was extremely angry with him, not only for meeting her, but
+for being in Paris at all.  It was not until they reached the Rue des
+Tuileries that Browne spoke.
+
+"May we not go into the Gardens?" he asked a little nervously.  "I
+always think that the children one sees there are the sweetest in
+Europe."
+
+"If you wish," Katherine replied coldly.  "I shall not be able to stay
+very long, however, as Madame Bernstein will be expecting me."
+
+Browne felt inclined to anathematise Madame Bernstein, as he had done
+several times before; but he wisely kept his thoughts to himself.  They
+accordingly crossed the road and entered the Gardens by the Broad Walk.
+Passing the Omphale by Eude and the statue of AEneas bearing Anchises
+through the flames of Troy, they entered one of the small groves on the
+right, and seated themselves upon two chairs they found there.  An
+awkward silence followed, during which Katherine looked away in the
+direction they had come, while Browne, his elbows on his knees, dug
+viciously into the path with the point of his umbrella, as if he would
+probe his way down to the nether regions before he would let her get an
+inkling of his embarrassment.  Three children with their attendant
+_bonnes_ passed them while they were so occupied, and one small toddler
+of four or five stopped and regarded the silent couple before him.
+Katherine smiled at the child's chubby, earnest face, and Browne took
+this as a sign that the ice was breaking, though not so quickly as he
+could have wished.
+
+"I am afraid you are angry with me," he said, after the child had
+passed on his way again and they were left to each other's company.
+"How have I been unfortunate enough to offend you?"
+
+"I do not know that you have offended me at all," the girl replied,
+still looking away from him.  "After all your kindness to me, I should
+be very ungrateful if I were to treat you so."
+
+"But there can be no doubt you _are_ offended," Browne replied.  "I
+could see from the expression on your face, when I met you on the
+boulevard just now, that you were annoyed with me for being there."
+
+"I must confess I was surprised," she answered; "still, I certainly did
+not wish you to think I was annoyed."
+
+Browne thereupon took fresh heart, and resolved upon a bold plunge.
+"But you were not pleased?" he said, and as he said it he watched her
+to see what effect his words produced.  She still kept her face turned
+away.  "Don't you think it was a little unkind of you to leave London
+so suddenly without either saying good-bye or giving the least warning
+of your intentions?" he continued, his spirits rising with every word
+he uttered.
+
+"I was not certain that we were to leave so soon," the girl replied.
+"It was not until yesterday morning that we found it would be necessary
+for us to set off at once.  But how did you know that we _had_ left?"
+
+Browne fell into the trap unheedingly.
+
+"Because I called at your lodgings an hour after you had left, in the
+hope of seeing you," he answered promptly.  "The servant who opened the
+door to me informed me that you and Madame Bernstein had departed for
+Paris.  You may imagine my surprise."
+
+"But if you were there within an hour of our leaving, what train did
+you catch?" she inquired, with a simplicity that could scarcely have
+failed to entrap him.
+
+"The eleven o'clock express from Charing Cross _via_ Dover and Calais,"
+he replied.
+
+"You admit, then, that your important business in Paris was to follow
+us?" she answered, and as she said it Browne realised what a mistake he
+had made.  She rose without another word, and made as if she would
+leave the Gardens.  Browne also sprang to his feet, and laid his hand
+upon her arm as if to detain her.
+
+"Again I fear I have offended you," he said; "but believe me, I had not
+the least intention of doing so.  I think at least you should know me
+well enough for that."
+
+"But you should not have followed me at all," she said, her womanly wit
+showing her that if she wished to escape she must beg the question and
+attack the side issue.  "It was not kind of you."
+
+"Not kind?" he cried.  "But why should it not be?  I cannot see that I
+have done anything wrong; and, even if I have, will you not be
+merciful?"
+
+Large tears had risen in her eyes; her manner was firm, nevertheless.
+It seemed to Browne later on, when he recalled all that had happened on
+that memorable morning, as if two emotions, pride and love, were
+struggling in her breast for the mastery.
+
+"Will you not forgive me?" he asked, more humbly than he had probably
+ever spoken to a human being in his life before.
+
+"If you will promise not to repeat the offence," she replied, with a
+feeble attempt at a smile.  "Remember, if I _do_ forgive you, I shall
+expect you to adhere to your word."
+
+"You do not know how hard it is for me to promise," said Browne; "but
+since you wish it, I will do as you desire.  I promise you I will not
+follow you again."
+
+"I thank you," she answered, and held out her hand.  "I must go now, or
+madame will be wondering what has become of me.  Good-bye, Mr. Browne."
+
+"But do you mean that I am never to see you again?" he inquired in
+consternation.
+
+"For the moment that is a question I cannot answer," she replied.  "I
+have told you before that my time is not my own; nor do I know how long
+we shall remain in Paris."
+
+"But if I am to promise this, will you not promise _me_ something in
+return?" he asked, with a tremble in his voice that he could not
+control.
+
+"What is it you wish me to promise?" she inquired suspiciously.  "You
+must tell me first."
+
+"It is that you will not leave Paris without first informing me," he
+answered.  "I will not ask you to tell me where you are going, or ask
+for an interview.  All I desire is that you should let me know that you
+are leaving the city."
+
+She was silent for a moment.
+
+"If you will give me your address, I will promise to write and let you
+know," she said at last.
+
+"I thank you," he answered.  Then, refusing to allow him to accompany
+her any farther, she held out her hand and bade him good-bye.  Having
+done so, she passed up the Broad Walk in the direction they had come,
+and presently was lost to his view.
+
+"Well, I am a fool if ever there was one," said Browne to himself when
+he was alone.  "If only I had kept a silent tongue in my head about
+that visit to the Warwick Road, I should not be in the hole I am now.
+I've scored one point, however; she has promised to let me know when
+she leaves Paris.  I will stay here until that time arrives, on the
+chance of meeting her again, and then----.  Well, what matters what
+happens then?  How sweet she is!"
+
+The young man heaved a heavy sigh, and returned to his hotel by the Rue
+de Rivoli.
+
+From that moment, and for upwards of a week, he neither saw nor heard
+anything further of her.  Although he paraded the streets with untiring
+energy, and even went so far as to pay periodical visits on foot to the
+Rue Jacquarie, he was always disappointed.  Then assistance came to
+him, and from a totally unexpected quarter.
+
+Upon returning to his hotel, after one of his interminable
+peregrinations, he found upon the table in his sitting-room a note,
+written on pale-pink paper and so highly scented that he became aware
+of its presence there almost before he entered the room.  Wondering
+from whom it could have come, for the writing was quite unknown to him,
+he opened it and scanned the contents.  It was written in French, and,
+to his surprise, proved to be from Madame Bernstein.
+
+"My dear Monsieur Browne," it ran, "if you could spare a friend a few
+moments of your valuable time, I should be so grateful if you could let
+me see you.  The matter upon which I desire to consult you, as my
+letter would lead you to suppose, is an exceedingly important one.
+Should you chance to be disengaged to-morrow (Thursday) afternoon, I
+will remain in, in the hope of seeing you.--  Always your friend, and
+never more than now,
+
+"SOPHIE BERNSTEIN."
+
+
+Browne read this curious epistle three times, and each time was farther
+from being able to understand it.  What was this matter upon which
+Madame Bernstein desired to consult him?  Could it have any connection
+with Katherine?  If not, what else could it possibly be?  And why did
+she call herself his friend, and wind up with "and never more than
+now"?  It had one good point, however; it would, in all probability,
+furnish him with another opportunity of seeing the girl he loved.  And
+yet there were twenty hours to be disposed of before he could possibly
+keep the appointment.  Never in his life had time seemed so long.
+
+Punctually to the minute he arrived at the door of the commonplace
+building in the Rue Jacquarie.  The _concierge_ looked out from her
+cubby-hole at him, and inquired his business.  In reply he asked the
+number of Madame Bernstein's rooms, and, having been informed, went
+upstairs in search of them.  He had not very far to go, however, for he
+encountered madame herself on the landing half-way up.
+
+"Ah, monsieur!" she cried, holding out her hand with an impetuous
+gesture, that was as theatrical as her usual behaviour, "this is most
+kind of you to come to see me so promptly.  I know that I am
+trespassing both upon your good nature and your time."
+
+"I hope you will not mention that," said Browne politely.  "If I can be
+of any use to you, I think you know you may command me."
+
+"It is not for myself that I have asked you to come," she answered.
+"But do not let us talk here.  Will you not accompany me to my rooms?"
+
+She accordingly led the way up the next flight of stairs and along a
+corridor to a room that was half drawing-room half boudoir.  Madame
+carefully closed the door, and then bade him be seated.  Browne took
+possession of an easy-chair, wondering what was going to happen next.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+"Now, Monsieur Browne," said Madame Bernstein, as she seated herself
+with her back to the window, "we can talk in comfort, and, what is
+better still, without fear of being disturbed.  It is indeed kind of
+you to come and see me, for I expect you were considerably surprised at
+receiving my poor little note yesterday.  What you must have thought of
+it I dare not think; but I must console myself with the reflection,
+that it was written in the interests of another person, whose happiness
+is dearer to me than I can make you understand.  To tell you the truth,
+it is a most delicate matter.  I think you will admit as much when you
+have heard what I have to say."
+
+Browne accordingly reserved his judgment.  His distrust of the woman,
+however, was rapidly coming back upon him, and he could not help
+feeling that, plausible as her words were, and desirous as she appeared
+to be of helping a third person, she was in some way attempting to
+deceive himself.
+
+"I beg that you will not consider me at all in the matter," he said,
+seeing that he was expected to say something.  "I am, as you know, only
+too glad to do anything I can to help you.  Perhaps it is regarding
+Mademoiselle Petrovitch that you desire to speak to me?"
+
+"You have guessed correctly," said madame.  "It is about Katherine.
+The poor child, as I have reason to know, is in terrible trouble just
+now."
+
+"I am indeed sorry to hear that," said Browne, a fear of he knew not
+what taking possession of him.  "But I hope the trouble is one that can
+be easily set right."
+
+"It is possible it may," madame replied.  "But I think it depends, if
+you will permit me to say so, in a very great measure upon yourself."
+
+"Upon me?" cried the young man, this time with real surprise.  "How can
+that be?  I should never forgive myself if I thought I had made Miss
+Petrovitch unhappy."
+
+"Not perhaps exactly in the sense you mean," said madame, moving a
+little nearer him, and speaking in a tone that was low and
+confidential; "but still you have done so in another way, Monsieur
+Browne.  Before I go any further, however, it is necessary that I
+should remind you that I am an old woman."  Here she smiled a little
+coquettishly, as if to remind him that her words, in this particular
+instance, must not be taken too literally.  "I am an old woman," she
+continued--"old enough to be your mother, perhaps; at any rate, old
+enough to be able to say what I am going to say, without fear of giving
+offence, or of having my motives misconstrued.  Monsieur Browne, as you
+are well aware, Katherine is only a young girl, and, like other young
+girls, she has her dreams.  Into those dreams you have come, and what
+is the result?  I will leave it to your common-sense, and perhaps a
+little to your vanity, to read between the lines.  Had you been
+differently situated it would not have mattered.  At the time that you
+rendered her that great service on the mountains above Merok, she had
+no idea who you were.  But later on, when you were so kind to us in
+London, though you did your best to prevent it, we discovered all about
+you.  Immediately, as is often the way with young girls, a change came.
+She is simplicity itself.  She is also the soul of honour.  She feared
+to let her true soul be seen, lest you might think that we were
+cultivating your acquaintance for the sake of your wealth."
+
+"I never dreamt of such a thing," Browne replied indignantly.  "That is
+the worst part of being a rich man, Madame Bernstein.  One-half of the
+world preys upon you for your money, while a large number will not be
+friendly to you lest they may be supposed to be doing the same.  I
+should be a cad of the first water if I had ever thought for a moment,
+that Miss Petrovitch was capable of such a thing."
+
+From the way he spoke Madame Bernstein saw that she had overshot her
+mark, and she was quick to make up for her mistake.
+
+"I do not think I said that we thought so, Monsieur Brown," she said.
+"I only remarked that I feared my ward was afraid lest you might do so."
+
+"She might have known me better than that," said Browne a little
+reproachfully.  "But perhaps you will tell me what it is you wish me to
+do?"
+
+"Ah!  In asking that question you bring me to the most difficult point
+in our interview," she replied.  "I will show you why.  Before I do so,
+however, I want you to give me your promise that you will not be
+offended at what I am about to say to you."
+
+"I will certainly promise that," Browne answered.
+
+"I am going to put your friendship to a severe test," Madame continued.
+She paused for a moment as if to collect her thoughts.  When she spoke
+again it was with an abruptness that was most disconcerting.  "You must
+be blind indeed," she said, "if you cannot see, Monsieur Browne, that
+Katherine loves you."
+
+The revulsion of feeling caused by her announcement of this fact was so
+strong that, though Browne tried to speak, he found he was incapable of
+uttering a word.  And yet, though she seemed so certain of what she
+said, there was something in the way she said it that did not ring
+quite true.
+
+"Monsieur Browne," she went on, leaning a little forward and speaking
+with still greater earnestness, "I feel sure you will understand how
+much all this means, not only to her but to me.  Since my poor
+husband's death she has been all I have had to live for, and it cuts my
+heart in pieces to see her so unhappy."
+
+"But what would you have me do?" inquired Browne.
+
+"That is the very subject I wished to speak to you about," Madame
+replied.  Then, shaking her head sadly, she continued: "Ah, Monsieur
+Browne, you do not know what it is to love, and to love in vain.  The
+favour I am going to ask of you is that you should go away; that you
+should not let Katherine see you again."
+
+"But, madame," said Browne, "why should I go away?  What if I love her
+as you say she loves me?"
+
+The lady uttered a little cry as if of astonishment.
+
+"If you loved her all would be different," she cried, clasping her
+hands together--"so very, very different."
+
+"Then let it be as different as you please," cried Browne, springing to
+his feet.  "For I do love her, and with my whole heart and soul, as I
+should have told her, had she not left London so suddenly the other
+day."
+
+Looking back on it now, Browne is obliged to confess that the whole
+scene was theatrical in the extreme.  Madame Bernstein, on hearing the
+news, behaved with a most amiable eccentricity; she sprang from her
+chair, and, taking his hand in hers, pressed it to her heart.  If her
+behaviour counted for anything, this would seem to have been the
+happiest moment of her life.  In the middle of it all the sound of a
+light footstep reached them from the corridor outside.
+
+"Hush!" said Madame Bernstein, holding up her finger in warning.  "It
+is Katherine!  I implore you not to tell her that I have said this to
+you."
+
+"You may depend upon my not doing so," Browne answered.
+
+An instant later the girl, whose happiness they appeared to be so
+anxious to promote, entered the room.  Her surprise and confusion at
+finding Browne there may be better imagined than described.  But if the
+position were embarrassing for her, how much more so was it for Browne!
+He stood before her like a schoolboy detected in a fault, and who waits
+to be told what his punishment will be.
+
+"Monsieur Browne was kind enough to take pity on my loneliness," said
+Madame Bernstein, by way of explanation, but with a slight falter in
+her voice which told the young man that, although she wished him to
+think otherwise, she really stood in some awe of her companion.  "We
+have had a most interesting discussion on modern French art.  I had no
+idea that Monsieur Browne was so well acquainted with the subject."
+
+"It is the one thing of all others in which I take the greatest
+possible interest," replied Browne, with corresponding gravity.  But he
+dared not look at Katherine's face, for he knew she was regarding him
+with a perplexed and somewhat disappointed look, as if she were not
+quite certain whether he was telling the truth.  She did not know how
+to account for his presence there, and in some vague way it frightened
+her.  It was plain, at any rate, that she placed no sort of reliance in
+her guardian's somewhat far-fetched explanation.
+
+Seeing that she was likely to be _de trop_, that lady made an excuse
+and left the room.  After she had gone, and the door had closed behind
+her, things passed from bad to worse with the couple she had left
+behind.  Browne knew exactly what he wanted to say, but he did not know
+how to say it.  Katherine said nothing at all; she was waiting for him
+to make the first move.
+
+At last Browne could bear the silence no longer.  Advancing towards the
+girl, he managed to obtain possession of her hands before she became
+aware of his intention.
+
+Holding them in his, he looked into her face and spoke.
+
+"Katherine," he said, in a voice that trembled with emotion, "cannot
+you guess why I am here?"
+
+"I understood that you came to see Madame Bernstein," she faltered, not
+daring to look up into his face.
+
+"You know as well as I do that, while I made that the excuse, it was
+not my real reason," he answered.  "Katherine, I came to see you
+because I have something to say to you, which must be said at once,
+which cannot be delayed any longer.  I would have spoken to you in
+London, had you vouchsafed me an opportunity, but you left so suddenly
+that I never had the chance of opening my lips.  What I want to tell
+you, Katherine, is, that I love you with my whole heart and soul; God
+knows I love you better than my life, and I shall love you to the day
+of my death."
+
+She uttered a little cry, and endeavoured to withdraw her hands from
+his grasp, but he would not let them go.
+
+"Surely you must have known all this long since," he continued with
+relentless persistence.  "You believe, don't you, that I mean what I
+say?"
+
+"I must not hear you," she answered.  "I cannot bear it.  You do not
+know what you are saying."
+
+"I know all I want to know," said Browne; "and I think, Katherine, you
+on your part know how deeply in earnest I am.  Try to remember, before
+you speak, that the whole happiness of my life is at stake."
+
+"That is exactly why I say that I cannot listen to you," she answered,
+still looking away.
+
+"Is my love so distasteful to you, then, that you cannot bear to hear
+me speak of it?" he said, a little reproachfully.
+
+"No, no," she answered; "it is not that at all.  It is that----  But
+there, I cannot, I must not hear you any further.  Please do not say
+any more about it; I beg of you to forget that you have ever told me of
+it."
+
+"But I _must_ say more," cried Browne.  "I love you, and I cannot and
+will not live without you.  I believe that you love me, Katherine; upon
+my honour I do.  If so, why should you be so cruel to me?  Will you
+answer me one question, honestly and straight-forwardly?"
+
+"What is it?"
+
+"Will you be my wife?"
+
+"I cannot.  It is impossible," she cried, this time as if her heart
+were breaking.  "It is useless to say more.  Such a thing could never
+be."
+
+"But if you love me, it both can and shall be," replied Browne.  "If
+you love me, there is nothing that can separate us."
+
+"There is everything.  You do not know how impossible it is."
+
+"If there is a difficulty I will remove it.  It shall cease to exist.
+Come, Katherine, tell me that you love me."
+
+She did not reply.
+
+"Will you not confess it?" he repeated.  "You know what your answer
+means to me.  Say that you do, and nothing shall part us; I swear it.
+If you do not, then I give you my word I will go away, and never let
+you see my face again."
+
+This time she looked up at him with her beautiful eyes full of tears.
+
+"I _do_ love you," she whispered; and then added, in a louder voice,
+"but what is the use of my saying so, when it can make no difference?"
+
+"It makes all the difference in the world, darling," cried Browne, with
+a triumph in his voice that had not been there a moment before.  "Now
+that I know you love me, I can act.  I am not afraid of anything."
+Before she could protest he had taken her in his arms and covered her
+face with kisses.  She struggled to escape, but he was too strong for
+her.  At last he let her go.
+
+"Oh! you do not know what you are doing," she cried.  "Why will you not
+listen to me and go away before it is too late?  I tell you again and
+again that you are deluding yourself with false hopes.  Come what may,
+I can never be your wife.  It is impossible."
+
+"Since you have confessed that you love me, we will see about that,"
+said Browne quietly but determinedly.  "In the meantime, remember that
+I am your affianced lover.  Nothing can alter that.  But, hark! if I am
+not mistaken, I hear Madame Bernstein."
+
+A moment later the lady in question entered the room.  She glanced from
+one to the other as if to find out whether they had arrived at an
+understanding.  Then Browne advanced and took her hand.
+
+"Madame," he said, "I have the honour to inform you that mademoiselle
+has decided to be my wife."
+
+"No, no," cried Katherine, as if in a last entreaty.  "You must not say
+that.  I cannot let you say it."
+
+Madame Bernstein took in the situation, and adapted herself to it
+immediately.  In her usual manner, she expressed her delight at the
+arrangement they had come to.  There was nothing like love, she
+averred, in the world.
+
+"I always hoped and prayed that it would be so," she went on to say.
+"It has been my wish for years to see you happily married, Katherine.
+Now I can feel that my work in life is done, and that I can go down to
+my grave in peace, knowing that, whatever happens, you will be well
+protected."
+
+Could one have looked into her brain, I am inclined to believe it would
+have been found that, while she gave expression to these beautiful
+ideas, they were far from being a true record of her feelings.  Such
+sentiments, however, were the proper ones to use at that particular
+moment, and, having given utterance to them, she felt that she had done
+all that could reasonably be expected of her.
+
+"With your permission, madame," said Browne, to whom the idea had only
+that moment occurred, "Katherine and I will spend the whole of
+to-morrow in the country together.  I should like to take her to
+Fontainebleau.  As you are aware, there are a number of pictures there,
+which, according to your own argument, it is only fit and proper I
+should study in order to perfect myself on the subject of modern French
+art."
+
+After this Parthian shot, Madame, although she knew that such a
+proposal was far from being in accordance with the notions of propriety
+entertained by the parents and guardians of the country in which they
+were at present domiciled, had no objection to raise.  On the contrary,
+she had her own reasons for not desiring to thwart Browne at the
+commencement of his engagement, and just when he was likely to prove
+most useful to her.  Accordingly she expressed great delight at the
+arrangement, and hoped that they would spend a happy day together.
+Having said this, she wiped away an imaginary tear and heaved a sigh,
+which, taken in conjunction, were doubtless intended to convey to the
+young people the impression that she was dwelling on the recollection
+of similar excursions in which she and the late lamented Bernstein had
+indulged at a similar period.
+
+"To-night we must all dine together to celebrate the event," said
+Browne enthusiastically, taking no notice whatsoever of the good lady's
+expression of woe.  "Where shall it be?"
+
+Katherine was about to protest, but she caught Madame's eye in time,
+and desisted.
+
+"I am sure we shall be charmed," returned Madame.  "If you will make
+the arrangements, we will meet you wherever you please."
+
+"Shall we say the Maison Doree, then, at eight?  Or would you prefer
+the Cafe Anglais, or Au Lion d'Or?"
+
+"The Maison Doree by all means," said Madame, "and at eight.  We will
+make a point of being there in good time."
+
+Seeing that it was impossible for him to stay any longer, Browne bade
+Madame good-bye, and went across the room to where Katherine was
+standing by the window.
+
+"Good-bye," he said, and as he did so he took her hand.
+
+Looking into her eyes, which were filled with as much love as even he
+could desire, he put the following question to her, so softly that
+Madame, standing at the other end of the room, could not hear: "Are you
+happy, Katherine?"
+
+"Very happy," she answered in a similar tone.  "But I cannot help
+feeling that I am doing very wrong."
+
+"You are doing nothing of the sort," the young man answered
+dogmatically.  "You are doing just the very best and wisest thing a
+woman could do.  You must never say such a thing again.  Now, _au
+revoir_, until we meet at eight.  I shall count the minutes till then."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+How Browne got back to his hotel is a mystery to this day.  He had an
+insane desire to tell every one he met of his good fortune.  He wanted
+to do something to make other people as happy as himself, and, for the
+reason that he could find no one else at the moment, had to be content
+with overtipping his cabman, and emptying all his spare change into the
+hands of a beggar in the Place Vendome.  The afternoon was gray and
+cold; but never had the world seemed so fair to him, or so full of
+sunshine.  He told himself over and over again that he was the luckiest
+man on earth.  He had already built himself several castles in the air,
+from the battlements of which the banner of Love was waving gaily.
+What a difference he would make in Katherine's life!  She had been poor
+hitherto; now his wealth, the proper use of which he had never before
+realised, should be devoted to giving her everything that a woman could
+dream of or desire.  In his satisfaction with himself and the world in
+general, he even forgot his usual dislike for Madame Bernstein.  Was it
+not due to her action, he asked himself, that the present happy state
+of affairs had been brought about?  In return he would show her that he
+was grateful.  As for the morrow, and the excursion to Fontainebleau,
+he would send his man at once to arrange for a special train, in order
+that they might run no risk of being disturbed or inconvenienced by
+other tourists.  On second thoughts, however, he changed his mind.  He
+would not do anything so absurd.  He might be a _parvenu_, in a certain
+sense, but he did not want to prove himself one to her.  No; they would
+go down quietly, sensibly, and unostentatiously like other people.
+They would enjoy the outing all the more if they did not attract
+unnecessary attention.  Then another idea struck him, and he acted upon
+it immediately.  Putting on his hat once more, he left the hotel, and
+proceeded in the direction of a certain jeweller's shop.  Having
+entered it, he approached the counter, and asked for a plain gold ring
+of heavy pattern.  He had at first been tempted to buy her one set with
+diamonds and a bracelet to correspond--two articles that should be so
+perfect that even millionaires' wives should envy.  That time, however,
+would come later on.  At present all that was wanted was something
+good, plain, and in perfect taste.  He felt sure she would understand
+his action, and think the better of him for it.
+
+Anticipating a large order from the wealthy young Englishman, whom he
+recognised immediately, the shopkeeper was a little disappointed.  But
+he tried not to show it.  With his precious purchase in his pocket, the
+happy young man returned to his hotel to dress for the evening's
+entertainment.  Needless to say, he was the first to arrive at the
+rendezvous, but it was not very long before Madame Bernstein and
+Katherine put in an appearance.  Browne met them at the door and
+conducted them upstairs to the room he had reserved.  If the dinner he
+had given them in London had proved a success, this one was destined to
+prove much more so.  Madame and Browne were in the highest spirits,
+while Katharine, though a little shy and reserved, had improved
+considerably since the afternoon.  Before they separated, arrangements
+were completed for the morning's excursion.  Browne, it was settled,
+was to call for Katherine in time to catch the early train, and, in
+return for the trust reposed in him, he pledged himself to return her
+safely to her guardian before nine in the evening.  Before he retired
+to rest that night he opened the window of his bedroom and studied the
+heavens with an anxious face.  A few clouds were to be seen away to the
+north-west, but elsewhere the stars were shining brightly.  Taken
+altogether, there seemed to be every reasonable chance of their having
+a fine day for the excursion.
+
+But, alas! how futile are human hopes, for when he woke next morning a
+grievous disappointment was in store for him.  Clouds covered the sky,
+and a thick drizzle was falling.  A more miserable and dispiriting
+prelude to the day could scarcely be imagined.  His disappointment was
+intense; and yet, in a life that seemed as dead to him now as the
+Neolithic Period, he remembered that he had gone cub-hunting in
+England, had fished in Norway, and shot over his deer-forest in the
+Highlands in equally bad weather, and without a grumble or a protest.
+On the present occasion, however, everything was different; it seemed
+to him as if he had a personal grievance to settle with Dame Nature;
+and in this spirit he dressed, ate his breakfast, and finally set off
+in a cab for the Rue Jacquarie.  Whether Katherine would go out or not
+he could not say, but he half-expected she would decline.  Having
+passed the _concierge_, he made his way upstairs to Madame Bernstein's
+sitting-room.  Neither of the ladies was there, but, after he had
+waited for a few minutes, Katherine put in an appearance, dressed in a
+tight-fitting costume of some dark material which displayed her slender
+figure to perfection.
+
+"What a terrible day!" she said, as she glanced out of the window.  "Do
+you think we can go?"
+
+"I will leave it for you to decide," he answered.  "If you consider it
+too wet we can easily put it off for another day."
+
+Something in his face must have told her how disappointed he would be
+if she refused.  She accordingly took pity on him.
+
+"Let us go," she said.  "I have no doubt it will clear up later on.
+Must we start at once?"
+
+"If we wish to catch the train we should leave here in about ten
+minutes at latest," he answered.
+
+She thereupon left the room, to return presently with a cup of steaming
+chocolate.
+
+"I made this for you myself," she said.  "It will keep you warm.  While
+you are drinking it, if you will excuse me, I will go and get ready."
+
+When she returned they made their way to the cab, and in it set off for
+the railway station.  Rain was still falling as the train made its way
+along the beautiful valley of the Yeres, and it had not ceased when
+they had reached Melun.  After that Dame Nature changed her mind, and,
+before they reached their destination, the clouds were drawing off, and
+long streaks of blue sky were to be plainly observed all round the
+horizon.  They left the station in a flood of sunshine; and by the time
+they had crossed the gravelled courtyard and approached the main
+entrance to the palace, the sun was as warm and pleasant as on a spring
+day.
+
+It would be difficult to over-estimate the pleasure Browne derived from
+that simple excursion.  He had visited Fontainebleau many times before,
+but never had he thought it so beautiful or half so interesting as he
+did on the present occasion.  When she had overcome the first novelty
+of her position, Katherine adapted herself to it with marvellous
+celerity.  Side by side they wandered through those rooms of many
+memories, in the wake of the custodian, whom they could not persuade to
+allow them to pass through alone, even under the stimulus of a large
+gratuity.  Passing through the apartments of Napoleon, of Marie
+Antoinette, of Francis the First, they speculated and mused over the
+cradle of the infant king of Rome, and the equally historic table upon
+which Napoleon signed his abdication.
+
+The wonders of the palace exhausted, they proceeded into the gardens,
+visited and fed the famous carp, tested the merits of the labyrinth,
+and marvelled at the vineries.  Finally they returned to the village in
+search of luncheon.  The afternoon was devoted to exploring the forest,
+and when dusk had descended they dined at the Hotel de France et
+d'Angleterre, and afterwards returned to Paris.  It was during the
+homeward journey, that Browne found occasion to carry out a little
+scheme, of which he had been thinking all day.  Taking from his pocket
+the ring he had purchased on the previous evening, he secured
+Katherine's hand and slipped it on her slender finger.
+
+"The symbol of my love, darling," he said softly.  "As this little
+circlet of gold surrounds your finger, so my love will encompass you on
+every side throughout your life.  Wear it in remembrance of my words."
+
+Her heart being too full to answer him, she could only press his hand,
+and leave it to him to understand.
+
+Faithful to his promise, he delivered Katherine into the keeping of her
+guardian before nine o'clock.  Both declared that they had had a
+delightful day, and Madame Bernstein expressed her joy at hearing it.
+It seemed to Browne, however, that there was an air of suppressed
+excitement about her on this particular evening which he could not
+understand.  When he bade them good-bye he returned to his hotel,
+feeling that he had come to the end of the happiest day of all his life.
+
+Next morning he was standing in the hall preparatory to going out, when
+his servant approached him and handed him a note.  One glance at the
+address was sufficient to tell him from whom it came.  He had only seen
+the handwriting once before, but every letter had been engraved upon
+his heart.  He tore it open, delighted at receiving it, yet wondering
+at her reason for communicating with him.
+
+"Dear love," it began, "when you asked me the other day to be your
+wife, I tried so hard to make you see that what you wished was quite
+impossible.  Yesterday we were so happy together; and now I have had
+some news which makes me see, even more clearly than I did then, that I
+have no right to let you link your life with mine.  Hard as it is for
+me to have to say it, I have no choice left but to do so.  You must
+forget me; and, if you can, forgive me.  But remember always this
+promise that I give you: if I cannot marry you, no other man shall ever
+call me wife.--KATHERINE PETROVITCH."
+
+Browne stood for some moments, like a man dazed, in the hall among the
+crowd of happy tourists, holding the letter in his hand, and staring
+straight before him.  His whole being seemed numbed and dead.  He could
+not understand it; he could not even realise that she was attempting to
+put herself out of his life for ever.
+
+"There must be some mistake," he whispered to himself; and then added:
+"She admits that she loves me, and yet she wants to give me up.  I will
+not allow myself to think that it can be true.  I must go to her at
+once, and see her, and hear it from her own lips before I will believe."
+
+He thereupon went out into the street, called a cab, and set off for
+the Rue Jacquarie.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+When Browne reached the Rue Jacquarie, after his receipt of the letter
+which had caused him so much pain and consternation, it was to learn
+that Katherine was not at home, and to find Madame Bernstein in her
+sitting-room, sniffing vigorously at a bottle of smelling-salts, and on
+the verge of hysterics.  Seeing Browne, she sprang to her feet with a
+cry that was half one of relief, and half of fear.
+
+"Oh, Monsieur Browne," said she, "Heaven be praised that you have come!
+I have had such terrible trouble this morning, and have passed through
+such a scene with Katherine that my nerves are quite unstrung."
+
+"Where is Katherine?" Browne inquired almost angrily, and quite
+ignoring the description of her woes; "and what is the meaning of the
+letter she wrote me this morning?"
+
+"You must not be angry with her," said Madame, approaching and laying
+her hand gently upon his arm, while she looked up into his face, with
+what was intended to be a piteous expression.  "The poor child is only
+doing what she deems to be right.  You would not have her act
+otherwise, I know."
+
+"You understand my feelings, I think," Browne replied bluntly.  "At the
+same time, I know how over-conscientious she is apt to be in such
+matters.  Cannot I see her?  Where is she?"
+
+"She has gone out," said Madame, with a sigh.  "She and I, I am sorry
+to say, had a little disagreement this morning over her treatment of
+you.  I know it was very wrong of me, and that you will hate me for it;
+but I could not help it.  I could not let her spoil her own life and
+yours without uttering a protest.  As a result, she did what she always
+does--that is to say, she put on her hat and cape, and went for a walk."
+
+"But have you no notion where I could find her?" asked Browne, who was
+beginning to feel that everything and everybody were conspiring against
+him.  "Has she any usual haunts, where I should run a moderate chance
+of coming across her?"
+
+"On that point I am afraid I can say nothing," answered Madame.  "She
+seldom takes me into her confidence.  Yet, stay; I _do_ remember having
+heard her once say that, when she was put out by anything, the only
+thing that could soothe her, and set her right again, was a visit to
+the picture galleries at the Louvre."
+
+"You are sure you know of no other place?"
+
+"None whatever," replied the lady.  "The pictures at the Louvre are the
+only things in Paris in which she seems to take any interest.  She is
+insane on the subject."
+
+"In that case I'll try the Louvre at once," said Browne, picking up his
+hat.
+
+"But let me first explain to you the reason of all that has happened,"
+said Madame, stretching out her hand as if to detain him.
+
+"Thank you," Browne returned, with greater coldness than he had ever
+yet spoken to her; "but, if you do not mind, I would rather hear that
+from her own lips."
+
+With that he bade Madame good-bye, and made his way down to the street
+once more.  From the Rue Jacquarie to the Louvre is not more than a ten
+minutes' drive at most--that is to say, if you proceed by the Avenue de
+l'Opera,--and yet to Browne it seemed as if he were hours in the cab.
+On entering the museum he made his way direct to the picture galleries.
+The building had not been long open, and for this reason only a few
+people were to be seen in the corridors, a circumstance for which
+Browne was devoutly thankful.  It was not until he reached Room IV.
+that he knew he was not to have his journey in vain.  Standing before
+Titian's "Entombment of Christ," her hands clasped before her, was
+Katherine.  Her whole being seemed absorbed in enjoyment of the
+picture, and it was not until he was close to her that she turned and
+saw him.  When she did, he noticed that her face was very white and
+haggard, and that she looked as if she had not slept for many nights.
+
+"Oh, why have you followed me?" she asked piteously.
+
+"I have come to acknowledge in person the letter you sent me this
+morning," he answered.  "Surely, Katherine, you did not think I should
+do as you asked me, and go away without even bidding you good-bye?"
+
+"I hoped you would," she answered, and her lips trembled as she uttered
+the words.
+
+"Then you do not know me," he replied, "nor do you know yourself.  No,
+darling; you are my affianced wife, and I refuse to go.  What is more,
+I will not give you up, come what may.  Surely you do not think that
+mine is such a fair-weather love that it must be destroyed by the first
+adverse wind?  Try it and see."
+
+"But I cannot and must not," she answered; and then she added, with
+such a weight of sorrow in her voice, that it was as much as he could
+do to prevent himself from taking her in his arms and comforting her,
+"Oh, you can have no idea how unhappy I am!"
+
+"The more reason that I should be with you to comfort you, darling," he
+declared.  "What am I here for, if not to help you?  You do not seem to
+have realised my proper position in the world.  If you are not very
+careful, I shall pick you up and carry you off to the nearest parson,
+and marry you, willy-nilly; and after that you'll be obliged to put the
+management of your affairs in my hands, whether you want to or not."
+
+She looked at him a little reproachfully.
+
+"Please don't joke about it," she said.  "I assure you it is by no
+means a laughing matter to me."
+
+"Nor is it to me," answered Browne.  "I should have liked you to have
+seen my face when I read your letter.  I firmly believe I was the most
+miserable man in Europe."
+
+She offered no reply to this speech, and perhaps that was why a little
+old gentleman, the same old man in the threadbare black cloak and
+old-fashioned hat who haunts the galleries, and who entered at that
+moment, imagined that they were quarrelling.
+
+"Come," said the young man at last, "let us find a place where we can
+sit down and talk unobserved.  Then we'll thrash the matter out
+properly."
+
+"But it will be no use," replied Katherine.  "Believe me, I have
+thought it out most carefully, and have quite made up my mind what I
+must do.  Please do not ask me to break the resolutions I have made."
+
+"I will not ask you to do anything but love me, dear," returned Browne.
+"The unfortunate part of it is, you see, I also have made resolutions
+that you, on your side, must not ask me to break.  In that case it
+seems that we have come to a deadlock, and the only way out of it is
+for us to start afresh, to discuss the matter thoroughly, and so arrive
+at an understanding.  Come along; I know an excellent corner, where we
+can talk without fear of being disturbed.  Let us find it."
+
+Seeing that to protest would be useless, and deriving a feeling of
+safety from his masterfulness, she allowed him to lead her along the
+galleries until they reached the corner to which he had referred.  No
+one was in sight, not even the little old man in the cloak, who was
+probably gloating, according to custom, over the "Venus del Pardo" in
+Room VI.
+
+"Now let us sit down," said Browne, pointing to the seat, "and you must
+tell me everything.  Remember, I have a right to know; and reflect also
+that, if there is any person in this wide world who can help you, it is
+I, your husband in the sight of God, if not by the law of man."
+
+He took her hand, and found that it was trembling.  He pressed it
+within his own as if to give her courage.
+
+"Tell me everything, darling," he said--"everything from the very
+beginning to the end.  Then I shall know how to help you.  I can see
+that you have been worrying yourself about it more than is good for
+your health.  Let me share the responsibility with you."
+
+She had to admit to herself that, after all, it was good to have a man
+to lean upon, to feel that such a pillar of strength was behind her.
+For this reason she unconsciously drew a little closer to him, as
+though she would seek shelter in his arms and defy the world from that
+place of security.
+
+"Now let me have your story," said Browne.  "Hide nothing from me; for
+only when I know all, shall I be in a position to say how I am to help
+you."
+
+He felt a shudder sweep over her as he said this, and a considerable
+interval elapsed before she replied.  When she did her voice was harsh
+and strained, as if she were nerving herself to make an admission,
+which she would rather not have allowed to pass her lips.
+
+"You cannot imagine," she said, "how it pains me to have to tell you my
+pitiful tale.  And yet I feel that I should be doing you a far greater
+wrong if I were to keep silence.  It is not for myself that I feel
+this, but for you.  Whatever may be my fate, whatever may come later, I
+want you always to remember that."
+
+"I will remember," her lover replied softly.  "But you must not think
+of me at all, dear.  I am content to serve you.  Now tell me
+everything."
+
+Once more she was silent for a few moments, as though she were
+collecting her thoughts; then she commenced her tale.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+"To begin with, I must tell you that my name is not Petrovitch at all:
+it is Polowski; Petrovitch was my mother's maiden name.  Why I adopted
+it, instead of bearing my father's, you will understand directly.  I
+was born in Warsaw, where my parents at the time had a temporary home.
+Though she died when I was only seven years old, I can distinctly
+remember my mother as a tall, beautiful Hungarian woman, who used to
+sing me the sweetest songs I have ever heard in my life every evening
+when I went to bed.  Oh, how well I can recall those songs!"  Her eyes
+filled with tears at the recollection.  "Then there came a time when
+she did not put me to bed, and when I was not allowed to see her.
+Night after night I cried for her, I remember, until one evening an old
+woman, in whose charge I had often been left, when my father and mother
+were absent from the city, told me that I should never see her again,
+for she was dead.  I did not know the meaning of death then; but I have
+learnt since that there are things which are worse, infinitely worse,
+than merely ceasing to live.  My recollections of that period are not
+very distinct; but I can recall the fact that my poor mother lay in a
+room at the back of the house, and that old Maritza wept for her
+continually.  There was much mystery also; and once an old gray-haired
+man said to some one in my presence, '_Do you think he will be fool
+enough to come when they are watching for him at every turn?_'  To
+which the other replied, '_I am sure he will come, for he loved her._'
+Then came the funeral, a dark and dreary day, which, when I look back
+upon it all now, seems like the beginning of a new life to me.  I was
+only a little child, and when they brought me home from the cemetery I
+fell asleep almost before my head touched the pillow.  In the middle of
+the night I was awakened by a loud cry, a trampling on the stairs, and
+a moment later the noise of men fighting in the corridor outside my
+room.  Terrified almost out of my senses, I crouched in my little bed
+and listened.  Then an order was given by some one, followed by the
+sound of more trampling on the stairs, and after that all was silence.
+Though, of course, I did not know it then, my father had been arrested
+by the police as a dangerous Nihilist, and, a month later, was on his
+way to Siberia.  It was not until I was old enough to understand, that
+I heard that he had been concerned in an attempt upon the life of the
+Czar.  From what was told me then, and from what I have since learnt,
+there seems to have been little or no doubt but that he was connected
+with a dangerous band of Nihilists, and that he was not only mixed up
+in the affair for which he was condemned to penal servitude for life,
+but that he was one of the originators of the plot itself.  And yet the
+only recollection I have of him is of a kind and loving father who,
+when he was at home, used to tell me fairy stories, and who declared
+his wife to be the sweetest woman in the world."
+
+"Poor little girl," said Browne, pressing the hand he held, "you had
+indeed an unhappy childhood; but you have not yet told me how you came
+to be placed under the guardianship of Madame Bernstein."
+
+"She was an old friend of my father's," Katherine replied; "and when my
+mother died, and he was sent to Siberia, she adopted me.  I owe her a
+debt of gratitude that I can never repay; for, though she is perhaps a
+little peculiar in some things, she has been a very good and kind
+friend to me."
+
+"And have you always been--well, shall we say--dependent on her?" asked
+Browne, with a little diffidence, for it was a delicate matter for a
+young man to touch upon with a proud and high-spirited girl.
+
+"Oh no," Katherine replied.  "You see, soon after my mother's death it
+was discovered by some one--I cannot remember who--that one of her
+brothers was dead, and that by his will I, as his sole heiress,
+inherited his money.  From your point of view it would be nothing, but
+to me it meant a great deal.  It was carefully invested, and it brings
+me in, in English money, just three hundred pounds a year.  Of course
+we cannot do much with such a sum; but, as we have no expensive tastes,
+Madame Bernstein and I find that with it, and the sum I make by my
+painting, we are just able to make both ends meet."
+
+On hearing this Browne pricked up his ears.  This was putting a new
+complexion on the affair.
+
+"Do you mean to say that Madame Bernstein has no income of her own, and
+that all these years she has been living upon you?"
+
+"Yes.  And why not?  You cannot realise what a wonderful manager she
+is.  I should not be able to do half as much with it if I had the sole
+control of my money."
+
+"This is a matter which will have to be attended to in the near
+future," said Browne to himself.  Then, aloud, he added, "Never mind,
+little woman; when you are my wife Madame shall retire in luxury.  She
+shall not find us ungrateful, believe me.  But continue your story.
+Or, I fancy, you had better let me finish it for you.  You have told me
+that you have lived with Madame Bernstein, or rather, to be correct,
+that she has lived with you, for many years.  You have travelled from
+place to place about Europe; for some reason or another you have had no
+fixed home; then you began to paint, and during the whole time you have
+denied yourself all sorts of things in order that Madame should live in
+the lap of luxury.  Oh, don't dispute it, for I know what has happened
+as well as if I had been there to see.  In the course of your
+peregrinations you went to Norway.  There we met.  Six months later you
+came to London, during which time I had been wondering whether I should
+ever see you again.  Fate arranged that we should meet.  I found you
+even more adorable than before, followed you to Paris, proposed and was
+accepted, and, like all pretty stories, ours must, and shall end with
+the music of wedding bells."
+
+"Impossible," she answered.  "From what I have already shown you, you
+must see that it could not be.  Had my life been differently situated I
+should have been proud--you do not know how proud--to be your wife;
+but, as it is, it is quite out of the question.  Some day you will see
+that yourself, and will thank me for having prevented you from spoiling
+your life by a foolish marriage."
+
+Browne saw that she was in deadly earnest.  He was about to argue the
+question with her, but the look upon her face stopped him.  For the
+moment he was frightened in spite of himself, and could only stammer
+out, "I shall never see it."
+
+"You _must_ see it," she answered.  "There is a task I have set for
+myself, which I must finish, come what may."
+
+"Then, whatever it may be, I will share it with you," said Browne.
+"You must doubt my love, Katherine, if you refuse to let me help you."
+
+"I do not doubt your love," she answered, "but it is quite out of the
+question that I could avail myself of your assistance in this matter."
+
+"I will not believe it," he continued.  "You are only saying it because
+you do not wish to inculpate me.  But I _will_ be inculpated, come what
+may.  Tell me what it is you have to do, and I will help you to carry
+it through to the best of my ability; helping you where help is needed,
+and counselling you where you stand in need of advice.  In other words,
+I place myself and all I have in the world at your disposal, darling,
+to do with as you will."
+
+"You are too noble," she answered; "too good and true.  What other man
+would do as much?"
+
+"Any man," he answered, "who loves a woman as I love you."
+
+"There can be but few who love so well," she replied softly, for her
+heart was touched more than she could say; "and yet, good as you are, I
+cannot accept your help.  You do not know what I am about to attempt."
+
+"I do not care what it is," he answered; "it makes no sort of
+difference to my promise."
+
+"But it would afterwards," she said.  "Why, do you not remember that I
+am the daughter of a convict; that my father was sent to Siberia to
+live in chains to the end of his days?  He remained there for many
+years.  Afterwards he was despatched to the island of Saghalien, where
+he now is.  News has reached us within the last few days that he is
+ill, and that unless he leaves the island he will not live another
+year."
+
+"How did you hear that?" Browne inquired.
+
+"Through Madame Bernstein," Katherine replied.  "Ever since my father
+was first arrested she has managed somehow or other to obtain news of
+him."
+
+"And what is it you intend to do?"
+
+"To help him to escape," the girl replied.
+
+"But it would be impossible," said Browne, horrified at her
+declaration.  "You must not dream of such a thing."
+
+"But I do more than dream of it," she replied.  "Remember, he is my
+father, my own flesh and blood, who is ill and suffering.  You say you
+love me?"
+
+"I think you know by this time that I do," said Browne.
+
+"Then what would you do if I were seized and carried away to a terrible
+island, where my life would be one long torture?  Would you not do your
+best to rescue me?"
+
+"Of course I would," said Browne indignantly.  "You need not ask that."
+
+"Very well, then, you can see now how I feel.  I do not say that he was
+right in his beliefs or in what he did; on the contrary, I think that
+he was distinctly wrong.  The fact, however, remains that he is my
+father; and, however great his faults may have been, he has at least
+been punished for them.  Can you picture what his existence must have
+been these many years?  But of course you cannot.  You do not know
+anything of Russian prisons.  They have been described to me, however,
+by one who has seen them, and the account has filled me with such
+terror as I have never known in my life before."
+
+"But it would be sheer madness for you to attempt to rescue him," said
+Browne.  "You could not possibly succeed.  Your effort would be
+foredoomed to failure."
+
+"It is very probable," she answered; "but would you have me for that
+reason draw back?  It is my duty to make the attempt, even if I fail.
+You would have done the same for your own father, I know, had he been
+in the same position.  Why should I not therefore do it for mine?"
+
+"Because--why, because it is too preposterous," said Browne, at loss
+for a better reason.  "I never heard of such a thing.  You have not the
+least idea of the magnitude of the danger of what you are attempting."
+
+"Perhaps not," she said.  "But if all those who make an attempt could
+foresee the result, I fancy only a very small percentage would continue
+to strive.  No; if you love me, you will not try to make a coward of
+me, just at the time when I am trying to do what I consider right."
+
+Browne took counsel with himself.  The position was the most
+extraordinary he had ever faced.  In his life he had met with many
+peculiar people, but never had he been brought in contact with a young
+girl who was willing to give up love, wealth, comfort, every prospect
+of happiness, even life itself, in order to attempt what was neither
+more nor less than a hopeless and impossible undertaking.  And yet,
+short as his acquaintance with Katharine had been, he felt that he knew
+her well enough to be convinced that she would not abandon her purpose
+without a struggle.  "Loyalty before all" was his motto where she was
+concerned.  He loved her, and if it was her desire to assist a by no
+means respectable father to escape from the prison in which he was very
+rightly confined, he must help her to the best of his abilities,
+without considering the cost to himself.  It would be a terrible
+business; but, at any rate, he would then be able to assure himself
+that she did not come to any harm.
+
+"And you are determined to carry out this foolish scheme?" he asked.
+"Is there nothing I can say or do that will be at all likely to
+dissuade you from your purpose?"
+
+"Nothing at all," she answered slowly, looking him steadily in the
+face.  "My mind is quite made up."
+
+"Very good, then," he continued; "in that case I will not oppose you
+further.  Tell me how you propose to set about it."
+
+She shook her head.  "I do not know yet," she answered.  "But you may
+be sure I will do it somehow.  There must be a way, if I can only find
+it.  At any rate, I am not afraid to look for it."
+
+Browne glanced at the pale yet determined face before him, and noted
+the strength of the mouth and chin.  There was sufficient strength of
+mind there to carry the matter through, provided the needful
+opportunities were supplied.  But would they be forthcoming?  One thing
+was quite certain, she could not possibly manage with the limited means
+at her disposal.  There at least she would be compelled to apply to him.
+
+"Katherine," he said at last, "I have told you repeatedly that I love
+you, and now I am going to try to prove it to you.  You say you are
+desirous of rescuing your father.  Very good; then I am going to help
+you to do so.  It will at least demonstrate the sincerity of my love
+for you, and will show you that all the assertions I have made are not
+merely so much idle chatter, but what I really feel."
+
+"You would help me?" she gasped, staggered for the moment at the
+magnitude of his proposal.  "Surely you do not know what you are
+saying?"
+
+"I mean what I say," he answered.  "If you are bent on rescuing your
+father I will help you.  But I only offer my services on one condition."
+
+"And what is that?"
+
+"That as soon as this business is finished you become my wife."
+
+"But I cannot let you do it," she answered.  "Why should I draw you
+into it?"
+
+"I do it because I love you, and because you love me," he answered.
+"Surely that is sufficient reason."
+
+"But----"
+
+"We'll have no more _buts_, if you please," said Browne.  "If it is a
+bargain, say so.  This is going to be a genuine business contract, of
+which the terms are, that I am to do my best to assist your father to
+escape, and in return you are to be my wife as soon as the work is
+completed."
+
+She looked at him almost tearfully.  Though she felt it was her duty as
+a daughter to help her father, she nevertheless could not reconcile it
+to her conscience to draw the man she loved into danger.  By this time
+they had risen from the seat, and were standing facing each other.
+
+"Is it to be a bargain, Katherine?"
+
+She did not answer, but, drawing his face down to hers, she kissed him
+on the lips.
+
+"I understand," he said; "then we'll count it settled.  I'll commence
+work to-day, and let you know what arrangements I am able to make.  You
+trust me, Katherine, do you not?"
+
+"With my whole heart and soul," she answered.  "Who has ever been so
+good to me as you have been?"
+
+"That has nothing at all to do with it," he said.  "Now I'll take you
+down to the street, put you in a cab, and send you home to Madame to
+tell, or not to tell her, as you think best, the arrangement we have
+come to."
+
+"She will thank you as I have done," said Katherine.
+
+"I hope not," said Browne, and, as he said it, he laughed.
+
+She saw his playful meaning, and followed his example.  Then Browne
+conducted her to the street, and, having placed her in a cab, sent her
+home, promising to call later on in the day to report progress.  When
+she was safely on her way he glanced at his watch, and, finding it was
+not yet twelve o'clock, turned into the Amphitryon Club.  He found Maas
+in the hall putting on his fur coat preparatory to leaving.
+
+"My dear Browne," he said, "where on earth have you hidden yourself
+since your arrival in Paris?  We have seen nothing of you here."
+
+"I have been too busy," Browne replied, with an air of great
+responsibility.  "If you only knew all that I have gone through this
+morning you would be very much surprised."
+
+"My dear fellow," said Maas, "I believe I should be nothing of the
+kind.  Vellencourt was married yesterday, and since I heard that news I
+am past being surprised at anything.  I leave for London to-night.
+When do you return?"
+
+"I scarcely know," Browne replied.  "It may be to-day, and it may not
+be for a week.  I am sick of Europe, and am half-thinking of arranging
+a yachting trip to the Farther East."
+
+"The deuce you are!" said Maas.  "What on earth has put that notion
+into your head?"
+
+"What puts notions into anybody's head?" Browne inquired.  "I have
+often wanted to have a look at the Japanese Sea and the islands to the
+north of it.  How do you know that I don't aspire to the honour of
+reading a paper on the subject before the Geographical Society--eh?"
+
+"Geographical fiddlesticks!" replied the other; and, when he had shaken
+Browne by the hand, he bade him "good-bye," and went down the steps,
+saying to himself as he did so, "Madame Bernstein, her adopted
+daughter, and the islands to the north of Japan.  It seems to me, my
+dear Browne, that when you start upon this wonderful cruise your old
+friend Maas will have to accompany you."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+It may very safely be taken for granted, I think, that the happiness or
+unhappiness, success or non-success, of one's life is brought about not
+so much by deliberate education or design, if I may so express it, as
+by some small event, the proper importance of which is far from being
+recognisable at the time.  For instance, had Browne not undertaken that
+yachting cruise to Norway when he did, it is scarcely probable he would
+ever have met Katherine Petrovitch.  In that case he would very
+possibly have married the daughter of some impecunious peer, have
+bolstered up a falling house with his wealth, have gone into
+Parliament, received a title in due course, and would eventually have
+descended to the family vault, in most respects a mediocre man.  But,
+as Fate willed, he _did_ go to Norway--met Katherine, fell in love with
+her, and now----  But there, with such a long story before me, it will
+scarcely do for me to risk an anti-climax by anticipating.  Let it
+suffice that, after he had said "good-bye" to Maas, he lunched at the
+club, deriving a certain amount of pleasure meanwhile from the
+knowledge that he was engaged in a business which, should it become
+known, would undoubtedly plunge him into a considerable amount of hot
+water!  And when you come to think of it, how strange is the pleasure
+the human mind finds in the possession of a secret!  In our childhood
+it is a joy second only to the delight of a new toy.  Anarchism,
+Nihilism, Fenianism, and indeed the fundamental principle of every
+order of secret society, is the same thing, only on a larger and more
+dangerous scale, carried out by perverted imaginations and in the wrong
+direction.  The fact, however, remains, that Browne, as I have said,
+derived a considerable amount of satisfaction from the feeling that he
+was, in a certain sense, a conspirator.  Plainly as he had expressed
+himself to Katherine, however, it is extremely doubtful whether he
+himself realised how difficult and dangerous the task he had taken upon
+himself was likely to prove.  The Russian Government, at the best of
+times, is like dynamite, a thing to be handled carefully; and one
+minute's consideration was sufficient to show him that the work he had
+pledged himself to undertake was not one that, in the event of things
+going wrong, would entitle him to the sympathy of his own Government.
+He thought of the Duke of Matlock, and wondered what he would say if it
+should ever become known that he, John Grantham Browne, had assisted in
+the escape of a Russian Nihilist from the island of Saghalien.  He
+could very well imagine the pious horror of the Duchess when the
+various rumours, which would be certain to go the round of the clubs,
+should reach her ears.  And this suggested a still more unpleasant
+reflection.  What if he should fail in his attempt to rescue the man,
+and should find himself in the clutches of the Russian Bear?  What
+would his fate be then?  His own country could scarcely demand his
+release, seeing that he would, in all probability, be caught
+red-handed.  He put the thought away from him, however, as having
+nothing to do with the case.  It was Katherine's father who stood in
+need of assistance, and it was Katherine's happiness which was at
+stake.  That was enough for him.  With the remembrance of her
+gratitude, and of the look he had seen in her face, when he had
+promised to help her, still fresh in his mind, such a thing as counting
+the cost was not to be thought of.  Having finished his lunch, he
+returned to his hotel, to find a note upon his sitting-room table.  It
+was from Katherine.  He opened it, with a feeling that was half
+eagerness and half fear in his heart, and read as follows:
+
+"DEAR LOVE,--How can I make you see how good I think you are, and how
+little I deserve such treatment at your hands!  There is no one else in
+the world who would do what you have done, and I shall thank God always
+for sending you to my assistance.  Believe me, I know how much you are
+risking, and how much you are giving up, and are willing to forfeit,
+for my sake.  Oh, if I could only repay you as you deserve!  But, come
+what may, you will always have my love, and my life-long gratitude.
+To-night an old friend will be with us, who in happier days knew my
+father.  Will you not come and let me introduce you to him?"
+
+The letter was signed, "Your loving Katherine," and to Browne this
+seemed to be the pith and essence of its contents.  How different it
+was from the note he had received that morning!  They were as different
+as light and darkness, as black and white, as any simile that could be
+employed.  In one she had declared that it was impossible for her ever
+to become his wife, and in the other she signed herself, "Your loving
+Katherine."  Of course he would go that evening, not because the old
+man had been acquainted with her father, for he would have gone just as
+willingly if he had had a bowing acquaintance with her grandmother.
+All he wanted was the opportunity of seeing Katherine, of being in the
+same house and room with her, of watching the woman he loved, and who
+had promised to be his wife.
+
+Accordingly, that evening after dinner, he hailed a cab and drove to
+the Rue Jacquarie.  As he passed along the crowded thoroughfares, he
+could not help contrasting the different occasions on which he had
+visited that street.  The first time had been on the night of his
+arrival in Paris, when he had gone there in order to locate the house;
+the next was that on which he had repaired there in response to the
+note from Madame Bernstein; then, again, on the morning of that happy
+day they had spent together at Fontainebleau; while the last was after
+that miserable letter he had received from Katherine, in which she bade
+him give up the idea that she could ever become his wife.
+
+On this occasion it was indeed a happy young man who jumped out of the
+vehicle and nodded to the _concierge_ as he passed her and ran up the
+stairs.  When he knocked at the door of Madame's sitting-room, a voice
+from within told him to enter.  He did so, to find Katherine, Madame,
+and an old gentleman, whom he had never seen before, seated there.
+Katherine hastened forward to greet him.  If he had not already been
+rewarded for all the anxiety and pain he had experienced during the
+last few days, and for the promise he had given that morning, the look
+upon her face now would have fully compensated him.
+
+"I thought you would come," she said; and then, dropping her voice a
+little, she added, "I have been watching the hands of the clock, and
+waiting for you."
+
+But, even if Katherine were so kind in her welcome to him, she was not
+destined to have the whole ceremony in her hands, for by this time
+Madame Bernstein had risen from her chair and was approaching him.
+Browne glanced at her, and his instinct told him what was coming.
+Knowing the lady so well, he felt convinced she would not permit such
+an opportunity to pass without making the most of it.
+
+"Ah, Monsieur Browne," she began, her voice trembling with emotion and
+the ready tear rising in her eye, "you cannot understand how we feel
+towards you.  Katherine has told me of your act of self-sacrifice.  It
+is noble of you; it is grand!  But Heaven will reward you for your
+goodness to an orphan child."
+
+"My dear Madame Bernstein," said Browne, who by this time was covered
+with confusion, "you really must not thank me like this.  I do not
+deserve it.  I am not doing much after all; and besides, it is for
+Katherine's sake, and that makes the difference.  If we succeed, as I
+hope and trust we shall, it will be an adventure that we shall remember
+all our lives long."  He stopped suddenly, remembering that there was a
+third person present who might not be in the secret.  Being an
+ingenuous youth, the thought of his indiscretion caused him to blush
+furiously.  Katherine, however, was quick to undeceive him.
+
+"You need have no fear," she said; "we are all friends here.  Let me
+introduce you to Herr Otto Sauber, who, as I told you in my letter, is
+an old friend of my father's."
+
+The old man, sitting at the farther end of the room, rose and hobbled
+forward to take Browne's hand.  He was a strange-looking little fellow.
+His face was small and round, his skin was wrinkled into a thousand
+furrows, while his hair was snow-white, and fell upon his shoulders in
+wavy curls.  His age could scarcely have been less than seventy.
+Trouble had plainly marked him for her own; and if his threadbare
+garments could be taken as any criterion, he was on the verge of actual
+poverty.  Whatever his nationality may have been, he spoke French,
+which was certainly not his mother-tongue, with considerable fluency.
+
+"My dear young friend," he said, as he took Browne's hand, "allow me,
+as an old man and a patriot, to thank you for what you are about to do.
+I sum up my feelings when I say that it is an action I do not think you
+will ever regret."  Then, placing his hand on the girl's shoulder, he
+continued: "I am, as I understand Katherine has told you, an old friend
+of her father's.  I remember him first as a strong, high-spirited lad,
+who had not a base thought in his nature.  I remember him later as a
+man of more mature years, whose whole being was saddened by the
+afflictions and wrongs his fellow-countrymen were suffering; and still
+later on I wished him God-speed upon his weary march, with his brother
+exiles, to Siberia.  In God's good time, and through your agency, I
+look forward to welcoming him among us once more.  Madame Bernstein
+tells me you love the little Katherine here.  If so, I can only say
+that I think you are going the right way to prove it.  I pray that you
+may know long life and happiness together."
+
+The old gentleman was genuinely affected.  Large tears trickled down
+his weather-beaten cheeks, and his voice became thick and husky.
+Browne's tender heart was touched by this unexpected display of
+emotion, and he felt a lump rising in his throat, that for a few
+seconds threatened to choke him.  And yet, what was there to account
+for it?  Only a young man, a pretty girl, a stout middle-aged lady in a
+puce gown, and a seedy old foreigner, who, in days long gone by, had
+known the young girl's father.  After this little episode they quieted
+down somewhat, and Madame Bernstein proposed that they should discuss
+the question they had so much at heart.  They did so accordingly, with
+the exception of the old gentleman, who sat almost silent.  It was not
+until he heard her expound the subject, that Browne became aware of the
+extent and thoroughness of Madame's knowledge concerning Russia and her
+criminal administration.  She was familiar with every detail, even to
+the names and family histories of the various governors and officers;
+she knew who might be considered venal, and whom it would be dangerous
+to attempt to bribe; who were lenient with their charges, and who lost
+no opportunity of tyrannizing over the unfortunates whom Fate had
+placed in their power.  Listening to her one might very well have
+supposed that she had herself travelled every verst of that weary road.
+Plan after plan she propounded, until Browne felt his brain reel under
+the strain of it.  A little before midnight he rose to leave, and Herr
+Sauber followed his example.
+
+"If Monsieur Browne is walking in the direction of the Rue de l'Opera,
+I should be glad of his company," he said.  "That is to say, if he has
+no objection to being hindered by a poor old cripple, who can scarcely
+draw one foot after the other."
+
+Browne expressed the pleasure such a walk would afford him; and, when
+they had bidden the ladies good-night, they set off together.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+Once in the street the old man slipped his arm through that of his
+companion, and hobbled along beside him.  "My dear young friend," he
+said, when they had been walking for some few minutes, "we are out of
+the house now, and able to talk sensibly together without fear of
+making fools of ourselves or of being overheard.  First and foremost,
+tell me this: have you any notion of what you are doing?"
+
+[Illustration: "'Have you any notion of what you are doing?'"]
+
+"Of course I am not very well up in it," Browne replied modestly; "but
+I think I know pretty well."
+
+"Then, let me tell you this, as one who is probably more conversant
+with the subject than any man living: you know absolutely nothing at
+all!"
+
+After this facer Browne did not know quite what to say.  Herr Sauber
+stopped and looked at him.
+
+"Has it struck you yet," he said, "that you, a young Englishman,
+without the least experience in such things, are pitting yourself
+against all the organization and cunning of the Great Russian Bear?"
+
+"That point has certainly struck me," Browne replied.
+
+"And do you mean to say that, knowing the strength of the enemy you are
+about to fight, you are not afraid to go on?  Well, I must admit I
+admire your bravery; but I fear it is nearer foolhardiness than pluck.
+However, since you are determined to go on with it, let me give you a
+little bit of advice that may be of service to you.  I understand you
+have not long enjoyed the honour of Madame Bernstein's acquaintance?"
+
+Browne stated that this was so, and wondered what was coming next.  He
+was beginning to grow interested in this queer old man, with the sharp
+eyes, who spoke with such an air of authority.
+
+"Before I go any farther," continued the old gentleman, "permit me to
+remark that I yield to no one in my admiration for the lady's talent.
+She is an exceedingly clever woman, whose grasp of European politics
+is, to say the least of it, remarkable.  At the same time, were I in
+your position, I would be as circumspect as possible in my behaviour
+towards her.  Madame is a charming companion; she is philosophic, and
+can adapt herself to the most unpleasant circumstances with the
+readiness of an old campaigner.  In matters like the present, however,
+I regret to say, her tongue runs riot with her, and for that reason
+alone I consider her little short of dangerous."
+
+This may or may not have been the exact thought Browne had in his own
+mind.  But the woman was Katherine's friend; and, however imprudent she
+might be, that circumstance alone was sufficient, in a certain sense,
+to make him loyal to her.  Herr Sauber probably read what was passing
+in his mind, for he threw a glance up at him in his queer sparrow-like
+way, and, when he had eyed him steadfastly for a few seconds, continued
+what he had to say with even greater emphasis than before.
+
+"I do not want you to mistake my meaning," he said.  "At the same time,
+I have no desire to see the mission you have taken in hand turn out a
+failure.  I have been acquainted with Madame Bernstein for more years
+than either she or I would probably care to remember, and it is far
+from my intention or desire to prejudice your mind against her.  At the
+same time, I have known Katherine's family for a much longer period,
+and I must study them and their interests before all."
+
+"But what is it of which you desire to warn me?" Browne inquired.  "It
+seems to me that Madame Bernstein is as anxious to assist Katherine's
+father to escape as any of us."
+
+"I sincerely believe she is," the old man replied.  "In spite of the
+life she has led these twenty years, she still remains a woman, and
+impetuous.  You must see for yourself that, in a matter like the
+present, you cannot be too careful.  Let one little hint reach the
+Russian Government, and farewell to any chance you may stand of
+effecting the man's escape."
+
+"But what am I to do to prevent her from giving them a hint?" asked
+Browne.  "She knows as much as I do, and I cannot gag her!"
+
+"But you need not tell her of all your plans," he answered.  "Tell
+Katherine what you please; she has the rare gift of being able to hold
+her tongue, and wild horses would not drag the secret from her."
+
+"Then, to sum up what you say, I am to take care that, while Katherine
+and I know everything, Madame Bernstein shall know nothing?"
+
+"I do not say anything of the kind," said Herr Sauber.  "I simply tell
+you what I think, and I leave it to your good sense to act as you think
+best.  You English have a proverb to the effect that the least said is
+the soonest mended.  When the object of your expedition is
+accomplished, and you are back in safety once more, you will, I hope,
+be able to come to me and say, 'Herr Sauber, there was no necessity to
+act upon the advice you gave me'; then I shall be perfectly satisfied."
+
+"I must confess that you have made me a little uneasy," Browne replied.
+"I have no doubt you are right, however.  At any rate, I will be most
+careful of what I say, and how I act, in her presence.  Now, perhaps,
+you can help me still further, since you declare you are better
+acquainted with the subject than most people.  Being so ignorant, I
+should be very grateful for a few hints as to how I should set to
+work."  In spite of the old man's boast, Browne thought he had rather
+got the better of him now.  He was soon to be undeceived, however.
+
+"You intend to carry this through yourself, I suppose?" asked his
+companion.  "If I mistake not, I heard you say this evening that you
+proposed to set sail at once for the Farther East.  Is that so?"
+
+"It is quite true," Browne replied.  "I leave for London to-morrow
+afternoon, and immediately upon my arrival there I shall commence my
+preparations.  You will see for yourself, if the man is so ill, there
+is no time to waste."
+
+"In that case I think I can introduce you to a person who will prove of
+the utmost assistance to you; a man without whom, indeed, it would be
+quite impossible for you to succeed in your undertaking."
+
+"That is really very kind of you," said Browne; "and, pray, who is this
+interesting person, and where shall I find him?"
+
+"His name is Johann Schmidt," said Sauber, "and for some years past he
+has taken up his residence in Hong-kong.  Since we are alone, I may as
+well inform you that he makes a speciality of these little affairs,
+though I am not aware that he has done very much in that particular
+locality in which you are at present most interested.  New Caledonia is
+more in his line.  However, I feel sure that that will make little or
+no difference to him, and I do not think you can do better than pay him
+a visit when you reach Eastern waters."
+
+"But how am I to broach the subject to him?  And how am I to know that
+he will help me?  I cannot very well go to him and say straight out
+that I am anxious to help a Russian convict to escape from Saghalien."
+
+"I will give you a letter to him," replied Herr Sauber, "and after he
+has read it you will find that you will have no difficulty in the
+matter whatsoever.  For a sum to be agreed upon between you, he will
+take the whole matter off your hands, and all you will have to do will
+be to meet the exile at a spot which will be arranged, and convey him
+to a place of safety."
+
+"I am sure I am exceedingly obliged to you," said Browne.  "But will
+you answer me one more question?"
+
+"I will answer a hundred if they will help you," the other replied.
+"But what is this particular one?"
+
+"I want to know why you did not tell us all this, when we were
+discussing the matter at the house just now."
+
+"Because in these matters the safest course is to speak into one ear
+only.  If you will be guided by me you will follow my example.  When no
+one knows what you are going to do, save yourself, it is impossible for
+any one to forestall or betray you."
+
+By this time they had reached the corner of the Rue Auber.  Here the
+old gentleman stopped and held out his hand.
+
+"At this point our paths separate, I think," he said, "and I have the
+honour to wish you good-night."
+
+"But what about that address in Hong-kong?" Browne inquired.  "As I
+leave for England to-morrow, it is just possible that I may not see you
+before I go."
+
+"I will send it to your hotel," Herr Sauber replied.  "I know where you
+are staying.  Good-night, my friend, and may you be as successful in
+the work you are undertaking as you deserve to be."
+
+Browne thanked him for his good wishes, and bade him good-night.
+Having done so, he resumed his walk alone, with plenty to think about.
+Why it should have been so he could not tell, but it seemed to him
+that, since his interview with the old man, from whom he had just
+parted, the whole aspect of the affair to which he had pledged himself
+had changed.  It is true that he had had his own suspicions of Madame
+Bernstein from the beginning, but they had been only the vaguest
+surmises and nothing more.  Now they seemed to have increased, not only
+in number, but in weight; yet, when he came to analyse it all, the
+whole fabric tumbled to pieces like a house of cards.  No charge had
+been definitely brought against her, and all that was insinuated was
+that she might possibly be somewhat indiscreet.  That she was as
+anxious as they were to arrange the escape of Katherine's father from
+the island, upon which he was imprisoned, was a point which admitted of
+no doubt.  Seeing that Katherine was her best friend in the world, it
+could scarcely have been otherwise.  And yet there was a nameless
+something behind it all that made Browne uneasy and continually
+distrustful.  Try how he would, he could not drive it from his mind;
+and when he retired to rest, two hours later, it was only to carry it
+to bed with him, and to lie awake hour after hour endeavouring to fit
+the pieces of the puzzle together.
+
+Immediately after breakfast next morning he made his way to the gardens
+of the Tuileries.  He had arranged on the previous evening to meet
+Katherine there, and on this occasion she was first at the rendezvous.
+As soon as she saw him she hastened along the path to meet him.  Browne
+thought he had never seen her more becomingly dressed; her face had a
+bright colour, and her eyes sparkled like twin diamonds.
+
+"You have good news for me, I can see," she said, when their first
+greetings were over and they were walking back along the path together.
+"What have you done?"
+
+"We have advanced one step," he answered.  "I have discovered the
+address of a man who will possibly be of immense assistance to us."
+
+"That is good news indeed," she said.  "And where does he live?"
+
+"In Hong-kong," Browne replied, and as he said it he noticed a look of
+disappointment upon her face.
+
+"Hong-kong?" she replied.  "That is such a long way off.  I had hoped
+he would prove to be in London."
+
+"I don't think there is any one in London who would be of much use to
+us," said Browne, "while there are a good many there who could hinder
+us.  That reminds me, dear, I have something rather important to say to
+you."
+
+"What is it?" she inquired.
+
+"I want to warn you to be very careful to whom you speak about the work
+we have in hand, and to be particularly careful of one person."
+
+"Who is that?" she inquired; but there was a subtle intonation in her
+voice that told Browne that, while she could not, of course, know with
+any degree of certainty whom he meant, she at least could hazard a very
+good guess.  They had seated themselves by this time on the same seat
+they had occupied a few days before; and a feeling, that was almost one
+of shame, came over him when he reflected that, in a certain measure,
+he owed his present happiness to the woman he was about to decry.
+
+"You must not be offended at what I am going to say to you," he began,
+meanwhile prodding the turf before him with the point of his umbrella.
+"The fact of the matter is, I want to warn you to be very careful how
+much of our plans you reveal to Madame Bernstein.  It is just possible
+you may think I am unjust in saying such a thing.  I only hope I am."
+
+"I really think you are," she said.  "I don't know why you should have
+done so, but from the very first you have entertained a dislike for
+Madame.  And yet, I think you must admit she has been a very good
+friend to both of us."
+
+She seemed so hurt at what he had said that Browne hastened to set
+himself right with her.
+
+"Believe me, I am not doubting her friendship," he said, "only her
+discretion.  I should never forgive myself if I thought I had put any
+unjust thoughts against her in your mind.  But the fact remains that,
+not only for your father's safety, but also for our own, it is most
+essential that no suspicion as to what we are about to do should get
+abroad."
+
+"You surely do not think that Madame Bernstein would talk about the
+matter to strangers?" said Katherine, a little indignantly.  "You have
+not been acquainted with her very long, but I think, at least, you
+ought to know her well enough to feel sure she would not do that."
+
+Browne tried to reassure her on this point, but it was some time before
+she was mollified.  To change the subject, he spoke of Herr Sauber and
+of the interest he was taking in the matter.
+
+"I see it all," she said; "it was he who instilled these suspicions
+into your mind.  It was unkind of him to do so; and not only that, but
+unjust.  Like yourself, he has never been altogether friendly to her."
+
+Browne found himself placed in somewhat of a dilemma.  It was certainly
+true that the old man _had_ added fresh fuel to his suspicions; yet he
+had to remember that his dislike for the lady extended farther back,
+even as far as his first meeting with her at Merok.  Therefore, while
+in justice to himself he had the right to incriminate the old man, he
+had no desire to confess that he had himself been a doubter from the
+first.  Whether she could read what was passing in his mind or not I
+cannot say, but she was silent for a few minutes.  Then, looking up at
+him with troubled eyes, she said, "Forgive me; I would not for all the
+world have you think that I have the least doubt of you.  You have been
+so good to me that I should be worse than ungrateful if I were to do
+that.  Will you make a bargain with me?"
+
+"Before I promise I must know what that bargain is," he said, with a
+smile.  "You have tried to make bargains with me before to which I
+could not agree."
+
+"This is a very simple one," she said.  "I want you to promise me, that
+you will never tell me anything of what you are going to do in this
+matter, that I cannot tell Madame Bernstein.  Cannot you see, dear,
+what I mean when I ask that?  She is my friend, and she has taken care
+of me for so many, many years, that I should be indeed a traitor to
+her, if, while she was so anxious to help me in the work I have
+undertaken, I were to keep from her even the smallest detail of our
+plans.  If she is to be ignorant, let me be ignorant also."  The
+simple, straightforward nature of the girl was apparent in what she
+said.
+
+"And yet you wish to know everything of what I do?" he said.
+
+"It is only natural that I should," she answered.  "I also wish to be
+honest with Madame.  You will give that promise, will you not, Jack?"
+
+Browne considered for a moment.  Embarrassing as the position had been
+a few moments before, it seemed even more so now.  At last he made up
+his mind.
+
+"Yes," he said very slowly; "since you wish it, I will give you that
+promise, and I believe I am doing right.  You love me, Katherine?"
+
+"Ah, you know that," she replied.  "I love and trust you as I could
+never do another man."
+
+"And you believe that I will do everything that a man can do to bring
+about the result you desire?"
+
+"I do believe that," she said.
+
+"Then let it all remain in my hands.  Let me be responsible for the
+whole matter, and you shall see what the result will be.  As I told you
+yesterday, dear, if any man can get your father out of the terrible
+place in which he now is, I will do so."
+
+She tried to answer, but words failed her.  Her heart was too full to
+speak.  She could only press his hand in silence.
+
+"When shall I see you again?" Browne inquired, after the short silence
+which had ensued.  "I leave for London this afternoon."
+
+"For London?" she repeated, with a startled look upon her face.  "I did
+not know that you were going so soon."
+
+"There is no time to lose," he answered.  "All our arrangements must be
+made at once.  I have as much to do next week as I can possibly manage.
+I suppose you and Madame have set your hearts on going to the East?"
+
+"I could not let you go alone," she answered; "and not only that, but
+if you succeed in getting my father away, I must be there to welcome
+him to freedom."
+
+"In that case you and Madame had better hold yourselves in readiness to
+start as soon as I give the word."
+
+"We will be ready whenever you wish us to set off," she replied.  "You
+need have no fear of that."
+
+Half an hour later Browne bade her good-bye, and, in less than three
+hours, he was flying across France as fast as the express could carry
+him.  Reaching Calais, he boarded the boat.  It was growing dusk, and
+for that reason the faces of the passengers were barely
+distinguishable.  Suddenly Browne felt a hand upon his shoulder, and a
+voice greeted him with, "My dear Browne, this is indeed a pleasurable
+surprise.  I never expected to see you here."
+
+_It was Maas._
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV
+
+Why he should have been so surprised at meeting Maas on board the
+steamer that evening Browne has never been able to understand.  The
+fact, however, remains that he was surprised, and unpleasantly so.  The
+truth of the matter was, he wanted to be alone, to think of Katherine
+and of the work he had pledged himself to accomplish.  Even when one is
+head over ears in love, however, the common usages of society may claim
+some moderate share of attention; and, all things considered, civility
+to one's friends is perhaps the first of these.  For this reason Browne
+paced the deck with Maas, watching the lights of Calais growing smaller
+each time they turned their faces towards the stern of the vessel.
+Every turn of the paddle-wheels seemed to be taking Katherine farther
+and farther from him; and yet, was he not travelling to England on her
+errand, was he not wearing a ring she had given him upon his finger,
+and was not the memory of her face continually with him?  Maas noticed
+that he was unusually quiet and preoccupied, and attempted to rally him
+upon the subject.  He was the possessor of a peculiarly ingratiating
+manner; and, much to his own surprise, Browne found himself, before
+they had been very long on board, telling him the news, that was
+destined sorely to trouble the hearts of mothers with marriageable
+daughters before the next few weeks were out.  "I am sure I
+congratulate you most heartily, my dear fellow," said Maas, with a fine
+show of enthusiasm.  "I have had my suspicions that something of the
+kind was in the air for some considerable time past; but I did not know
+that it was quite so near at hand.  I trust we shall soon be permitted
+the honour of making the young lady's acquaintance."
+
+"I am afraid that will not be for some considerable time to come,"
+Browne replied.
+
+"How so?" asked Maas.  "What are you going to do?"
+
+"As I told you the other day, I am thinking of leaving England on a
+rather extended yachting cruise to the Farther East."
+
+"Ah, I remember you did say something about it," Maas continued.  "Your
+_fiancee_ will accompany you, of course?"
+
+Browne scarcely knew what reply to offer to this speech.  He had no
+desire to allow Maas to suspect his secret, and at the same time his
+conscience would not permit him to tell a deliberate untruth.  Suddenly
+he saw a way out of his difficulty.
+
+"We shall meet in Japan, in all probability," he answered; "but she
+will not go out with me."
+
+"What a pity!" said Maas, who had suddenly become very interested in
+what his companion was saying to him.  "There is no place like a yacht,
+I think, at such a time.  I do not, of course, speak from experience; I
+should imagine, however, that the rippling of the water alongside, and
+the quiet of the deck at night, would be eminently conducive to
+love-making."
+
+To this speech Browne offered no reply.  The train of thought it
+conjured up was too pleasant, and at the same time too sacred, to be
+shared with any one else.  He was picturing the yacht making her way
+across a phosphorescent sea, with the brilliant tropical stars shining
+overhead, and Katherine by his side, the only sound to be heard being
+the steady pulsation of the screw and the gentle lapping of the water
+alongside.
+
+At last the lights of Dover were to be distinctly seen ahead.  The
+passage had not been altogether a smooth one, and for this reason the
+decks did not contain as many passengers as usual.  Now, however, the
+latter were beginning to appear again, getting their luggage together
+and preparing for going ashore, with that bustle that usually
+characterises the last ten minutes on board a Channel steamer.  Always
+an amusing and interesting companion, Maas, on this particular
+occasion, exerted himself to the utmost to please.  By the time they
+reached Charing Cross, Browne had to admit to himself that he had never
+had a more enjoyable journey.  The time had slipped by so quickly and
+so pleasantly that he had been permitted no opportunity of feeling
+lonely.
+
+"I hope I shall see you again before you go," said Maas, as they stood
+together in the courtyard of the station on the look-out for Browne's
+hansom, which was awaiting its turn to pull up at the steps.  "When do
+you think you will be starting?"
+
+"That is more than I can tell you," said Browne.  "I have a great many
+arrangements to make before I can think about going.  However, I am
+certain to drop across you somewhere.  In the meantime, can I give you
+a lift?"
+
+"No, thank you," said Maas.  "I shall take a cab and look in at the
+club before I go home.  I could not sleep until I have heard the news
+of the town; who has married who, and who has run away with somebody
+else.  Now, here is your cab; so let me wish you good-night.  Many
+thanks for your society."
+
+Before Browne went to bed that night, he ascended to his magnificent
+picture gallery, the same which had been the pride and glory of his
+father's heart, and, turning up the electric light, examined a picture
+which had lately been hung at the farther end.  It was a Norwegian
+subject, and represented the mountains overlooking the little
+landlocked harbour of Merok.  How much had happened since he had last
+looked upon that scene, and what a vital change that chance meeting had
+brought about in his life!  It seemed scarcely believable, and yet how
+true it all was!  And some day, if all went well, Katherine would stand
+in the self-same hall looking upon the same picture, mistress of the
+beautiful house and all it contained.  Before that consummation could
+be brought about, however, they had a difficult piece of work to do.
+And what would happen supposing he should never return?  What if he
+should fall into the hands of the Russian Government?  That such a fate
+might befall him was far from being unlikely, and it would behove him
+to take all precautions in case it should occur.  In his own mind he
+knew exactly what those precautions would be.  Waking from the
+day-dream into which he had fallen, he glanced once more at the
+picture, and then, with a little sigh for he knew not what, made his
+way to his bedroom and retired to rest.  Next morning he was up
+betimes, and by nine o'clock had telegraphed to Southampton for the
+captain of his yacht.  At ten o'clock he ordered his hansom and drove
+to his lawyers' office in Chancery Lane.  The senior partner had that
+moment arrived, so the clerk informed him.
+
+"If you will be kind enough to step this way, sir," the youth
+continued, "I will conduct you to him."
+
+Browne did as he was requested, and followed him down a passage to a
+room at the farther end.  Browne's visits were red-letter days in the
+calendar of the firm.  When the lad returned to his high stool in the
+office, it was to wonder how he would spend his time if he were the
+possessor of such enormous wealth.  It is questionable whether he would
+have considered Browne so fortunate had he been made acquainted with
+all the circumstances of the case.  He was an irreproachable youth in
+every way, who during the week wore a respectable black coat and
+top-hat, and lived at Blackheath; while on Sundays he rode a tandem
+bicycle with the girl of his heart, and dreamt of the cottage they were
+to share together, directly the firm could be persuaded to make the
+salary, on which it was to be supported, a little more elastic.
+
+"How do you do, my dear Mr. Browne?" inquired the lawyer, rising from
+his chair as Browne entered, and extending his hand.  "I understood you
+were in Paris."
+
+"I returned last night," said Browne.  "I came up early because I want
+to see you on rather important business."
+
+"I am always at your service," replied the lawyer, bringing forward a
+chair for Browne's use.  "I hope you are not very much worried."
+
+"As a matter of fact, Bretherton, I have come to see you, because at
+last I am going to follow your advice, and--well, the long and the
+short of it is, I am going to be married!"
+
+The lawyer almost jumped from his chair in surprise.  "I am delighted
+to hear it," he answered.  "As I have so often said, I feel sure you
+could not do a wiser thing.  I have not the pleasure of knowing Miss
+Verney; nevertheless----"
+
+Browne held up his hand in expostulation.  "My dear fellow," he said,
+with a laugh, "you are on the wrong scent altogether.  What on earth
+makes you think I am going to marry Miss Verney?  I never had any such
+notion."
+
+The lawyer's face was a study in bewilderment.  "But I certainly
+understood," he began, "that----"
+
+"So have a great many other people," said Browne.  "But I can assure
+you it is not the case.  The lady I am going to marry is a Russian."
+
+"Ah, to be sure," continued the lawyer.  "Now I come to think of it, I
+remember that my wife pointed out to me in some ladies' paper, that the
+Princess Volgourouki was one of your yachting party at Cowes last
+summer."
+
+"Not the Princess either," said Browne.  "You seem bent upon getting
+upon the wrong tack.  My _fiancee_ is not a millionairess; her name is
+Petrovitch.  She is an orphan, an artist, and has an income of about
+three hundred pounds a year."
+
+The lawyer was unmistakably shocked and disappointed.  He had hoped to
+be able to go home that night and inform his wife, that he was the
+first to hear of the approaching marriage of his great client with some
+well-known beautiful aristocrat or heiress.  Now to find that he was
+going to espouse a girl, who was not only unknown to the great world,
+but was quite lacking in wealth, was a disappointment almost too great
+to be borne.  It almost seemed as if Browne had offered him a personal
+affront; for, although his client was, in most respects, an easy-going
+young man, still the lawyer was very well aware that there were times
+when he could be as obstinate as any other man.  For this reason he
+held his tongue, and contented himself with bowing and drawing a sheet
+of note paper towards him.  Then, taking up a pen, he inquired in what
+way he could be of service.
+
+"The fact of the matter is, Bretherton," the other began, "I have a
+communication to make to you which I scarcely know how to enter upon.
+The worst of it is that, for very many reasons, I cannot tell you
+anything definite.  You must fill in the blanks according to your own
+taste and fancy; and, according to how much you can understand, you can
+advise me as to the best course for me to pursue."
+
+He paused for a moment, and during the interval the lawyer withdrew his
+glasses from his nose, polished them, and replaced them.  Having done
+so, he placed his finger-tips together, and, looking at Browne over
+them, waited for him to proceed.
+
+"The fact of the matter is," said the latter, "before I marry I have
+pledged myself to the accomplishment of a certain work, the nature of
+which I cannot explain--I have given my word that I will reveal
+nothing.  However, the fact remains that it will take me into some
+rather strange quarters for a time; and for this reason it is just
+possible that I--well, that you may never see me again."
+
+"My dear Mr. Browne," said the lawyer, aghast with surprise, "you
+astonish me more than I can say.  Can it be that you are running such
+risk of your own free-will?  I cannot believe that you are serious."
+
+"But I am," Browne replied; "perfectly serious."
+
+"But have you considered everything?  Think what this may mean, not
+only to the young lady you are about to marry, but to all your friends."
+
+"I have thought of everything," said Browne.
+
+The lawyer was, however, by no means satisfied.  "But, my dear sir," he
+continued, "is there no way in which you can get out of it?"
+
+"Not one," said Browne.  "I have given the matter my earnest attention,
+and have pledged myself to carry it out.  No argument will move me.
+What I want you to do is to make my will to suit the exigencies of the
+case."
+
+"Perhaps it would not be troubling you too much to let me know of what
+they consist," said the lawyer, whose professional ideas were
+altogether shocked by such unusual--he almost thought insane--behaviour.
+
+"Well, to put it in a few words," said Browne, "I want you to arrange
+that, in the event of anything happening to me, all of which I am
+possessed, with the exception of such specific bequests as those of
+which you are aware, shall pass to the lady whom I would have made my
+wife had I not died.  Do you understand?"
+
+"I understand," said the lawyer; "and if you will furnish me with the
+particulars I will have a fresh will drawn up.  But I confess to you I
+do not approve of the step you are taking."
+
+"I am sorry for that," Browne replied.  "But if you were in my place I
+fancy you would act as I am doing."  Having said this, he gave the
+lawyer the particulars he required; and, when he left the office a
+quarter of an hour or so later, he had made Katherine Petrovitch the
+inheritor of the greater part of his enormous wealth.  Whatever should
+happen to him within the next few months she would at least be provided
+for.  From his lawyer's office he drove to his bank to deposit certain
+papers; then to his tailor; and finally back to his own house in Park
+Lane, where he hoped and expected to find the captain of his yacht
+awaiting him.  He was not disappointed.  Captain Mason had just
+arrived, and was in the library at that moment.  The latter was not of
+the usual yachting type.  He was short and stout, possessed an
+unusually red face, which was still further ornamented by a fringe of
+beard below his chin; he had been at sea, man and boy, all his life,
+and had no sympathy with his brother-skippers who had picked up their
+business in the Channel, and whose longest cruise had been to the
+Mediterranean and back.  He had been in old Browne's employ for ten
+years, and in that of his son after him.  What was more, he had earned
+the trust and esteem of all with whom he was brought in contact; and
+when Browne opened the door and found that smiling, cheerful face
+confronting him, he derived a feeling of greater satisfaction than he
+had done from anything for some considerable time past.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI
+
+"Good-morning, Mason," Browne said, as he shook hands.  "I am glad that
+you were able to come up at once, for I want to consult you on most
+important business.  Sit down, and let us get to work.  You were not
+long in getting under way."
+
+"I started directly I received your message, sir," the man replied.
+"Perhaps you would not mind telling me what it is I have to do."
+
+"I'll very soon do that," Browne replied; "and, if I know anything of
+you, you will be glad to hear my needs.  I want to see you with regard
+to a cruise in Eastern waters.  I am tired of the English winter, and,
+as you are aware, I have never yet visited Japan, I've suddenly made up
+my mind to go out there.  How soon do you think you could be ready to
+start?"
+
+"For Japan, sir?" the captain replied.  "Well, that's a goodish step.
+Might I ask, sir, how long you can give me?  Are you in a very great
+hurry?"
+
+"A very great hurry indeed," Browne said.  "I want to get away at the
+shortest possible notice; in fact, the sooner you can get away, the
+better I shall be pleased.  I know you will do all you can."
+
+"You may be very sure of that, sir," said the captain.  "If it is
+really necessary, I fancy I could be ready--well, shall we say?--on
+Monday next.  Would that suit you, sir?"
+
+"It would do admirably," said Browne.  "I may count, then, on being
+able to sail on that day?"
+
+"Certainly, sir," said the captain.  "I will catch the next train back,
+and get to work without loss of time.  Your own steward, I suppose,
+will accompany you?"
+
+"Yes," said Browne, for he was convinced that the man was one in whose
+honesty and courage he could place implicit reliance, which was just
+what would be wanted on such a voyage.
+
+"And how many guests will you be likely to have, sir?" inquired the
+captain.  "I suppose you will fill all the cabins as usual?"
+
+This was a question to which Browne had not yet given any proper
+consideration, though he had practically decided on one person.  The
+voyage from England to Japan, as all the world knows, is a long one,
+and he felt that if he went alone he would stand a very fair chance of
+boring himself to death with his own company.
+
+"I am not able to say yet who will accompany me; but in any case you
+had better be prepared for one or two.  It is more than possible,
+however, that we shall pick up a few others in Japan."
+
+"Very good, sir," said Mason.  "I will see that all the necessary
+arrangements are made.  Now I suppose I had better see about getting
+back to Southampton."
+
+Having consulted his watch, he rose from his chair, and was about to
+bid his employer good-bye, when Brown stopped him.
+
+"One moment more, Mason," he said.  "Before you go I have something to
+say to you, that is of the utmost importance to both of us."  He paused
+for a moment, and from the gravity of his face the captain argued that
+something more serious was about to follow.  "I wanted to ask you
+whether you had any sort of acquaintance with the seas to the northward
+of Japan, say in the vicinity of the island of Yesso and the Gulf of
+Tartary?"
+
+"I cannot say that I have any at all, sir," the other replied.  "But I
+could easily make inquiries from men who have sailed in them, and
+procure some charts from Potter, if you consider it necessary."
+
+"I should do so if I were you," said Browne; "it is always as well to
+be prepared.  In the meantime, Mason, I want you to keep what I have
+said to yourself.  I have the most imperative reasons for making this
+request to you.  A little mistake in this direction may do me an
+incalculable amount of harm."
+
+Though he did not in the least understand what prompted the request,
+the captain willingly gave his promise.  It was easy for Browne,
+however, to see that it had caused him considerable bewilderment.
+
+"And there is one other point," Browne continued.  "I want you to be
+more than ordinarily careful that the crew you take with you are the
+best men procurable.  I am not going to say any more to you, but leave
+you to draw your own conclusions, and to bear in mind that this voyage
+is likely to be one of the most, if not _the_ most, important I have
+ever undertaken.  You have been with me a good many years now, and you
+were with my father before me--it is not necessary for me to say not
+only as captain, but also as a man who is an old and well-tried friend."
+
+"I thank you, sir, for what you have said," said the captain.  "In
+reply, I can only ask you to believe that, happen what may, you will
+not find me wanting."
+
+"I am quite sure of that," said Browne, holding out his hand.
+
+The captain took it, and, when he had shaken it as if he would
+dislocate it at the shoulder, bade his employer good-bye and left the
+room.
+
+"So much for breaking the news to Mason," said Browne to himself, when
+the door had closed behind the skipper.  "Now I must see Jimmy Foote,
+and arrange it with him."
+
+He glanced at his watch, and found that it wanted only a few minutes to
+twelve o'clock.  Ringing the bell, he bade the footman telephone to the
+Monolith Club, and inquire whether Mr. Foote were there; and if he were
+not, whether they could tell him where it would be possible to find
+him.  The man disappeared upon his errand, to return in a few moments
+with the information that Mr. Foote had just arrived at the club in
+question.
+
+"In that case," said Browne, "beg the servants to tell him that I will
+be there in ten minutes, and that I want to see him on most important
+business.  Ask him not to leave until I come down."
+
+The appointment having been duly made, he ordered his cab and set off
+in it for the rendezvous in question.  On reaching the club--the same
+in which he had seen Jimmy on that eventful night, when he had
+discovered that Katherine was in London--Browne found his friend
+engaged in the billiard-room, playing a hundred up with a young
+gentleman, whose only claim to notoriety existed in the fact, that at
+the time he was dissipating his second enormous fortune at the rate of
+more than a thousand a week.
+
+"Glad indeed to see you, old man," said Jimmy, as Browne entered the
+room.  "I thought you were going to remain in Paris for some time
+longer.  When did you get back?"
+
+"Last night," said Browne.  "I came over with Maas."
+
+"With Maas?" cried Jimmy, in surprise.  "Somebody said yesterday that
+he was not due to return for another month or more.  But you telephoned
+that you wanted to see me, did you not?  If it is anything important, I
+am sure Billy here won't mind my throwing up the game.  He hasn't a
+ghost of a chance of winning, so it will be a new experience for him
+not to have to pay up."
+
+Browne, however, protested that he could very well wait until they had
+finished their game.  In the meantime he would smoke a cigar and watch
+them.  This he did, and as soon as the competition was at an end and
+Jimmy had put on his coat, he drew him from the room.
+
+"If you've nothing you want to do for half an hour or so, I wish you
+would walk a little way with me, old chap," he said.  "I have got
+something to say to you that I must settle at once.  This place has as
+long ears as the proverbial pitcher."
+
+"All right," said Jimmy.  "Come along; I'm your man, whatever you want."
+
+They accordingly left the club together, and made their way down Pall
+Mall and across Waterloo Place into the Green Park.  It was not until
+they had reached the comparative privacy of the latter place that
+Browne opened his mind to his friend.
+
+"Look here, Jimmy," he said, "when all is said and done, you and I have
+known each other a good many years.  Isn't that so?"
+
+"Of course it is," said Jimmy, who noticed his friend's serious
+countenance, and was idly wondering what had occasioned it.  "What is
+it you want to say to me?  If I did not know you I should think you
+were hard up, and wanted to borrow five pounds.  You look as grave as a
+judge."
+
+"By Jove! so would you," said Browne, "if you'd got on your mind what I
+have on mine.  It seems to me I've got to find some jolly good friend
+who'll see me through as delicate a bit of business as ever I heard of
+in my life.  That's why I telephoned to you."
+
+"Very complimentary of you, I'm sure," said Jimmy.  "But I think you
+know you can rely on me.  Come, out with it!  What is the matter?  Is
+it a breach of promise case, or divorce, or what is it?"
+
+"Look here, old man, before we go any farther," said Browne, with great
+impressiveness, "I want to ask you not to joke on it.  It may seem
+humorous to other people, but I assure you it's life and death to me."
+
+There was a little silence that might have lasted a minute; then Jimmy
+took his friend's arm.  "I'm sorry," said he; "only give me a decent
+chance and I'm sure to make a fool of myself.  I had no idea it was
+such a serious matter with you.  Now then, what is it?  Tell me
+everything from beginning to end."
+
+"I will," said Browne.  "But I ought to tell you first that I am not
+supposed to say anything about it.  The secret, while it is mine in a
+sense, concerns another person more vitally.  If I were the only one in
+it I shouldn't care a bit; but I have to think of others before myself.
+You may remember that one night--it seems as if it were years ago,
+though in reality it is only a few weeks--you and I were walking down
+Regent Street together.  You told me you had seen a picture in a shop
+window that you wanted to show me."
+
+"I remember the incident perfectly," said Jimmy, but this time without
+a smile.  "It was a very foggy night, and you first kept me waiting
+half an hour outside the shop, and then acted like a lunatic
+afterwards."
+
+"Well," said Browne, without replying to his friend's comments upon his
+behaviour on that occasion, "you may remember that the night following
+you dined with me at Lallemand's, and met two ladies."
+
+"Madame Bernstein and Miss Petrovitch," said Jimmy.  "I remember.  What
+next?"
+
+Browne paused and looked a trifle sheepish before he replied, "Well,
+look here, old man; that girl, Miss Petrovitch, is going to be my
+wife."  He looked nervously at Jimmy as if he expected an explosion.
+
+"I could have told you that long ago," said Jimmy, with imperturbable
+gravity.  "And, by Jove!  I'll go further and say that I don't think
+you could do better.  As far as I could tell, she seemed an awfully
+nice girl, and I should think she would make you just the sort of wife
+you want."
+
+"Thank you," said Browne, more pleased with Jimmy than he had ever been
+before.
+
+"But that only brings me to the beginning of what I have to say," he
+continued.  "Now I want you, before we go any further, to give me your
+word as a friend that, whatever I may say to you, you will not reveal
+to any one else.  You cannot think how important it is, both to her and
+to me."
+
+"I will give you that promise willingly," said Jimmy.  "You can tell me
+whatever you like, without any fear that I shall divulge it."
+
+"Your promise is all I want," said Browne.  Then, speaking very slowly,
+and as earnestly as he knew how, he continued: "The truth of the matter
+is that that girl is by birth a Russian.  Her father had the misfortune
+to get into trouble over an attempt upon the Czar's life."
+
+"A Nihilist, I suppose?" said Jimmy.
+
+Browne nodded.  "Well, the attempt was discovered, and Katherine's
+father was arrested and sent to Siberia, condemned to imprisonment for
+life.  He was there for many years, but later on he was drafted to the
+island of Saghalien, on the eastern coast of Siberia, where he now is."
+
+Jimmy nodded.  "After that?"
+
+"Well, on the morning of the second day after that dinner at
+Lallemand's, Miss Petrovitch and Madame Bernstein left for Paris, on
+some important business, which I now believe to have been connected
+with the man who was exiled.  I followed her, met her, and eventually
+proposed to her.  Like the trump she is, she did her best to make me
+see that for me to love her was out of the question.  Thinking only of
+me, she tried to put me off by telling me how impossible it all was.
+But instead of doing what she hoped, it only served to show me what a
+noble nature the girl possessed."
+
+"She is not rich, I suppose?" asked Jimmy.
+
+"She has not a halfpenny more than three hundred a year assured to
+her," the other replied; "and she shares that with Madame Bernstein."
+
+"And yet she was willing to give up a hundred and twenty thousand a
+year, and the position she would have in English society as your wife?"
+
+"She was," said Browne.
+
+"Then all I can say, is," said Jimmy, with considerable conviction,
+"she must be one in a million.  But I interrupted you; I'm sorry.  Go
+on."
+
+"Well," continued Browne, "to make a long story short, she finished by
+telling me the sad story of her life.  Of course she said that she
+could not possibly marry me, being the daughter of a convict.  Then she
+went on to add that news had lately come to her--how I cannot say--that
+her father is dying.  It seems that he has been in failing health for
+some years; and at last the terrible climate, the roughness of the
+living, and the knowledge that he was hopelessly cut off for the rest
+of his existence from all he held dear in the world, has resulted in a
+complete collapse.  To hope to obtain a pardon from the Russian
+Government would be worse than futile.  All that remains is to get him
+away."
+
+"But, surely, my dear old Browne," said Jimmy, who had listened aghast,
+"it cannot be possible that you dream of assisting in the escape of a
+Russian convict from Saghalien?"
+
+"That is exactly what I _do_ think," replied Browne, with unusual
+earnestness.  "Come what may, if it costs me all I am worth in the
+world, I am going to get the man out of that hell on earth.  Try to
+think, my dear fellow, how you would feel if you were in that girl's
+place.  Her father, the man whom she has been brought up to believe has
+been sacrificed for his country's good, is dying.  She declares it is
+her duty to be with him.  How can I let her do that?"
+
+"I admit it is impossible."
+
+"Well, what remains?  Either she must go to him, or he must come to
+her."
+
+"In plain words, she wants you to risk your good name, all you have in
+the world, your happiness, your very life indeed, in order to get a
+fanatic out of the trouble he has brought upon himself."
+
+"You can put it how you like," said Browne; "but that is practically
+what it means.  But remember she is the woman who is to be my wife.  If
+I lose her, what would life be worth to me?"
+
+This was the crucial part of the interview.  For the first time it
+struck Browne that he was figuring before his friend in rather a
+selfish light.
+
+"I wanted to see you," he began, "in order to find out whether you
+would care to accompany me to the Farther East.  Remember, I don't want
+you to pledge anything.  All that I ask of you is to say straight out
+whether you would care to come or not.  I shall sail in the yacht on
+Monday next for Japan.  We shall touch at Hong-kong _en route_, where I
+am to have an interview with a man who, I believe, has brought off one
+or two of these little affairs before.  He will tell me what I am to
+do, and may possibly do it for me.  After that we proceed to Japan,
+where we are to pick up Madame Bernstein and Miss Petrovitch.  From
+that moment we shall act as circumstances dictate."
+
+"And now I want you to tell me one thing," said Jimmy; "what is your
+reason for wanting me to accompany you?"
+
+"I will tell you," said Browne.  "I want you to come with me, because I
+am anxious to have one man on board, a friend, in whom I can place
+implicit confidence.  Of course Mason will be there; but, as he will
+have charge of the boat, he would be comparatively useless to me.  To
+tell the truth, Jimmy, it will make me easier to know that there is
+some one else on board the boat, who will take care of Miss Petrovitch,
+in the event of anything happening to me."
+
+"And how long do you propose to be away from England?" his friend
+inquired.
+
+"Well, that is a very difficult question to answer," said Browne.  "We
+may be away three months, possibly we may be six.  But you may rest
+assured of one thing; we shall not be absent longer from England than
+is absolutely necessary."
+
+"And when do you want an answer from me," said Jimmy.
+
+"As soon as you can let me have one," Browne replied.  "Surely it
+should not take you long to make up your mind?"
+
+"You don't know my family," he answered.  "They say I can never make up
+my mind at all.  Will it do if I let you know by seven o'clock
+to-night?  I could arrange it by then."
+
+"That would suit me admirably," said Browne.  "You don't think any the
+worse of me, old chap, for asking so much of you, do you?"
+
+"Angry with you?" answered the other.  "Why should I be?  You're
+offering me a jolly good holiday, in excellent company; and what's
+more, you are adding a spice of danger too, which will make it doubly
+enjoyable.  The only question is whether I can get away."
+
+"At any rate, I'll give you until to-night to make up your mind.  I
+shall expect to hear from you before seven o'clock."
+
+"You shall hear from me without fail," said Jimmy; "and, if by any
+chance I can't manage it, you will understand--won't you?--that it is
+not for any want of feeling for yourself."
+
+"I know that, of course," said Browne; and thereupon the two young men
+shook hands.
+
+A few moments later Browne bade him good-bye, and, calling a hansom,
+drove back to his own house.  As soon as he had lunched he wrote to
+Katherine to tell her how things were proceeding.  The afternoon was
+spent in the purchase of various articles which he intended to take
+with him.  For this reason it was not until after six o'clock that he
+returned to his own house.  When he did, the butler brought him a note
+upon a salver.  He opened it, and found, as he expected, that it was
+from Jimmy.
+
+"Dear old man," it ran, "I am coming with you, happen what may.--Always
+your friend, J. FOOTE."
+
+"That is another step upon the ladder," said Browne.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII
+
+In the morning following the receipt of the letter from Foote, as
+described in the previous chapter, Browne was walking from his house in
+Park Lane in the direction of Piccadilly, when he saw Maas coming
+towards him.
+
+"This is a fortunate meeting, my dear Browne," said the latter, after
+they had greeted each other; "for I was on my way to call upon you.  If
+you are walking towards Piccadilly perhaps you will permit me to save
+time by accompanying you."
+
+Browne was not feeling particularly happy that morning, and this may
+have been the reason that he was glad of Maas's company.  He stood in
+need of cheerful society.  But though he wanted it, he was not destined
+to have it.  It was a bleak, dreary morning, and once or twice during
+the walk the other coughed asthmatically.  Browne noticed this, and he
+noticed also that Maas's face was even paler than usual.
+
+"I am afraid you are not very well, old man," he said.
+
+"What makes you say that?" asked Maas.
+
+Browne gave him his reasons, and when he heard them the other laughed a
+little uneasily.  "I am afraid you've hit it, my friend," he said.  "I
+am not well.  I've been to see my doctor this morning, and he has given
+me some rather unpleasant news."
+
+"I am sorry indeed to hear that," said Browne.  "What does he say is
+the matter with you?"
+
+"Why, he says that it is impossible for me to stay in England any
+longer.  He declares that I must go away for a long sea voyage, and at
+once.  To tell the truth, I do not come of a very strong family; and,
+by way of making me feel better satisfied with myself, he tells me
+that, unless I take care of myself, I may follow in their footsteps.
+Of course it's all very well to say, 'Take care of yourself'; but the
+difficulty is to do so.  In a life like ours, what chance have we of
+guarding against catching cold?  We dance in heated rooms, and sit in
+cold balconies between whiles: we travel in draughty railway carriages
+and damp cabs, and invariably eat and drink more than is good for us.
+The wonder to me is that we last as long as we do."
+
+"I've no doubt we are awfully foolish," said Browne.  "But our fathers
+were so before us."
+
+"A small satisfaction, look at it how you will," returned Maas.
+
+"And so you're going to clear out of England, are you?" said Browne
+very slowly, after the pause that had followed his companion's speech.
+"Where are you thinking of going?"
+
+"Now, that was just what I was coming to see you about," replied his
+friend.  "You may remember that in Paris the other day, you spoke of
+undertaking a trip to the Farther East.  I laughed at it at the time,
+for I thought I should never move out of Europe; since then, however,
+or rather since the doctor gave me his unwholesome news this morning, I
+have been thinking over it.  I dined last night with the Rocktowers,
+who, as you know, are just back from Japan, and found that they could
+talk of nothing else.  Japan was this, Japan was that, possessed the
+most beautiful scenery in the world, the most charming people, and the
+most perfect climate.  So fascinated was I by their description that I
+went home and dreamt about it; and I've got a sort of notion now that,
+if I could only get as far as Japan, all would be well with me."
+
+Now, from the very first moment that Maas had spoken of leaving
+England, Browne had had an uneasy suspicion that something of the kind
+was coming.  In his inmost heart he knew very well what his companion
+wanted; but, unfortunately for him, he did not see his way to get out
+of it.  When he had told Maas in Paris that he intended taking a
+yachting cruise to the Farther East, and had laughingly suggested that
+the latter should accompany him, he had felt quite certain in his own
+mind that his invitation would be refused.  To find him now asking to
+be allowed to accept after all was almost too much for his equanimity.
+Pleasant companion as Maas undoubtedly was, he was far from being the
+sort of man Browne would have taken with him on such an excursion, had
+he had the choice.  Besides, he had already arranged that Jimmy should
+go with him.  Therefore, like the ingenuous youth he was, he took the
+first way of getting out of his difficulty, and in consequence found
+himself floundering in a still greater quagmire immediately.
+
+"You have not booked your passage yet?" he inquired, as if the matter
+of the other's going with him had never for a moment crossed his mind.
+
+Maas threw a searching glance at him.  He had a bold stroke to play,
+and he did not quite know how to play it.  Though he had known Browne
+for some considerable time, and was well aware that he was far from
+being an exceptionally clever young man, yet, for a reason which I
+cannot explain, he stood somewhat in awe of him.
+
+"Well, to tell the truth," he said, "that was just what I was coming to
+see you about.  I wanted to find out, whether you would permit me to
+withdraw my refusal of your kind invitation, in favour of an
+acceptance.  I know it is not quite the thing to do; but still our
+friendship is old enough to permit of such a strain being placed upon
+it.  If, however, you have filled your cabins, do not for a moment
+consider me.  It is just possible I may be able to secure a berth on
+one of the outgoing mail-boats.  Get away, however, I must, and
+immediately."
+
+Browne scarcely knew what to say in reply.  He knew that every person
+he added to the party meant an additional danger to all concerned; and
+he felt that, in common justice to Maas, he could not take him without
+giving him some hint of what he was about to do.  Maas noticed his
+hesitation; and, thinking it betokened acquiescence to his plan, was
+quick to take advantage of it.
+
+"My dear fellow," he said, "if I am causing you the least
+inconvenience, I beg of you not to give it a second thought.  I should
+not have spoken to you at all on the subject had you not said what you
+did to me in Paris."
+
+After this speech Browne felt that he had no opening left, save to
+declare that nothing would give him greater pleasure than to have the
+other's society upon the voyage.
+
+"And you are quite sure that I shall not be in the way?" Maas inquired.
+
+"In the way?" Browne replied.  "Not at all; I have only Jimmy Foote
+going with me.  We shall be a snug little party."
+
+"It's awfully good of you," said Maas; "and I'm sure I don't know how
+to thank you.  When do you propose to sail?"
+
+"On Monday next from Southampton," answered Browne.  "I will see that
+you have a proper notice, and I will also let you know by what train we
+shall go down.  Your heavier baggage had better go on ahead."
+
+"You are kindness itself," said Maas.  "By the way, since we have come
+to this arrangement, why should we not have a little dinner to-night at
+my rooms as a send off?  I'll find Foote and get him to come, and we'll
+drink a toast to the Land of the Rising Sun."
+
+"Many thanks," said Browne, "but I'm very much afraid it's quite out of
+the question.  I leave for Paris this afternoon, and shall not be back
+until Saturday at earliest."
+
+"What a pity!" said Maas.  "Never mind; if we can't celebrate the
+occasion on this side of the world, we will do so on the other.  You
+are turning off here?  Well, good-bye, and many, many thanks to you.
+You cannot imagine how grateful I feel to you, and what a weight you
+have taken off my mind."
+
+"I am glad to hear it," said Browne; and then, shaking him by the hand,
+he crossed the road and made his way down St. James's Street.
+"Confound it all!" he said to himself, as he walked along, "this is
+just the sort of scrape my absurd mania for issuing invitations gets me
+into.  I like Maas well enough as an acquaintance, but I don't know
+that he is altogether the sort of fellow I should have chosen to
+accompany me on an expedition like this.  However, what's done cannot
+be undone; and it is just possible, as his health is giving way, that
+he will decide to leave us in Japan; then we shall be all right.  If he
+doesn't, and elects to go on with us--well, I suppose we must make the
+best of it."
+
+As he came to this philosophical conclusion, he turned the corner from
+St. James's Street into Pall Mall, and ran into the arms of the very
+man for whom he was in search.  Foote was evidently in as great a hurry
+as himself, and, such was the violence of the shock, that it was a
+wonderful thing that they did not both fall to the ground.
+
+"Hang it, man, why don't you look where you're going?" Foote cried
+angrily, as he put his hand to his head to hold on his hat.  As he did
+so he recognised Browne.
+
+"Hullo, old chap, it's you, is it?" he cried.  "By Jove! do you know
+you nearly knocked me down?"
+
+"It's your own fault," Browne answered snappishly.  "What do you mean
+by charging round the corner like that?  You might have known what
+would happen."
+
+They stood and looked at one another for a moment, and then Foote burst
+out laughing.  "My dear old fellow," he said, "what on earth's wrong
+with you?  You don't seem to be yourself this morning."
+
+"I'm not," said Browne.  "Nothing seems to go right with me, do what I
+will.  I tell you, Jimmy, I'm the biggest ass that walks the earth."
+
+Jimmy whistled softly to himself.  "This is plainly a case which
+demands the most careful treatment," he said aloud.  "From what I can
+see of it, it will be necessary for me to prescribe for him.  My
+treatment will be a good luncheon and a pint of the Widow to wash it
+down.  Come along."  So saying, he slipped his arm through that of his
+companion, and led him back in the direction of the Monolith Club.
+"Now, Master Browne," he said, as they walked along, "you will just
+tell me everything,--hiding nothing, remember, and setting down naught
+in malice.  For the time being you must look upon me as your
+father-confessor."
+
+"In point of fact, Jimmy," Browne began, "I have just seen our friend
+Maas."
+
+"Well, what of that?" replied the other.  "How has that upset you?
+From what I know of him, Maas is usually amusing, except when he gets
+on the topic of his ailments."
+
+"That's exactly it," said Browne.  "He got on the subject of his
+ailments with me.  The upshot of it all was that he reminded me of an
+invitation I had given him in Paris, half in jest, mind you, to visit
+the East with me."
+
+"The deuce!" said Jimmy.  "Do you mean to say that he has decided to
+accompany us, now?"
+
+"That's just it," said Browne.  "That's why I'm so annoyed; and yet I
+don't know exactly why I should be, for, all things considered, he is
+not a bad sort of a fellow."
+
+"Nevertheless, I wish he were not coming with us," said Jimmy, with
+unwonted emphasis.  "Did you tell him anything of what you are going to
+do?"
+
+"Of course not," said Browne.  "I did not even hint at it.  As far as
+he knows, I am simply visiting Japan in the ordinary way, for pleasure."
+
+"Well, if I were you," said Jimmy, "I should let him remain in that
+belief.  I should not say anything about the real reason at all, and
+even then not until we are on the high seas.  Of course I don't mean to
+imply, for an instant, that he would be likely to say anything, or to
+give you away in any possible sort of fashion; but still it would be
+safer, I should think, to keep silence on the subject.  You know what
+we are going to do, I know it, Miss Petrovitch knows it, and Madame
+Bernstein also.  Who else is there you have told?"
+
+"No one," said Browne.  "But I dropped a hint to Mason that the errand,
+that was taking us out, was a peculiar one.  I thought he ought to know
+as much as that for more reasons than one."
+
+"Quite right," said Jimmy; "and what's more, you can trust Mason.
+Nevertheless, say nothing to Maas."
+
+"You may depend upon it I will not do so," said Browne.
+
+"Now here's the club," said Jimmy, as they reached the building in
+question.  "Let us go in and have some luncheon.  After that what are
+you going to do?"
+
+"I am off to Paris this afternoon," the other replied.  "Madame
+Bernstein and Miss Petrovitch leave for Japan in one of the French
+boats the day after to-morrow, and I want to see them before they go."
+
+After luncheon with Foote, Browne returned to his house, wrote a letter
+containing the most minute instructions to Captain Mason, and later on
+caught the afternoon express for Paris.  The clocks of the French
+capital were striking eleven as he reached his hotel that night.  He
+was worn out, and retired almost immediately to bed, though it would
+have required but little persuasion to have taken him off to the Rue
+Jacquarie.  As it was, however, he had to content himself with the
+reflection, that he was to see her the very first thing in the morning.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII
+
+Nine o'clock on the following day, punctual almost to the minute, found
+Browne exchanging greetings with the _concierge_ at the foot of the
+stairs, who, by this time, had come to know his face intimately.  The
+latter informed him that Mademoiselle Petrovitch was at home, but that
+Madame Bernstein had gone out some few minutes before.  Browne
+congratulated himself upon the latter fact, and ran upstairs three
+steps at a time.  Within four minutes from entering the building
+Katherine was in his arms.
+
+"Are you pleased to see me again, darling?" he inquired, after the
+first excitement of their meeting had passed away.
+
+"More pleased than I can tell you," she answered; and as she spoke
+Browne could see the love-light in her eyes.  "Ever since your telegram
+arrived yesterday, I have been counting the minutes until I should see
+you.  It seems like years since you went away, and such long years too!"
+
+What Browne said in reply to this pretty speech, it does not behove me
+to set down here.  Whatever it was, however, it seemed to give great
+satisfaction to the person to whom it was addressed.  At length they
+sat down together upon the sofa, and Browne told her of the
+arrangements he had made.  "I did not write to you about them, dear,"
+he said, "for the reason that, in a case like this, the less that is
+put on paper the better for all parties concerned.  Letters may go
+astray, and there is no knowing what may happen to them.  Therefore I
+thought I would keep all my news until I could tell it to you face to
+face.  Are you ready for your long journey?"
+
+"Yes, we are quite ready," said Katherine.  "We are only waiting for
+you.  Madame has been very busy for the last few days, and so have I."
+She mentioned Madame's name with some little trepidation, for she
+feared lest the old subject, which had caused them both so much pain on
+the last occasion that they had met, might be revived.  Browne,
+however, was careful, as she was, not to broach it.
+
+"And when will your yacht leave England?" she inquired, after he had
+detailed his arrangements to her.
+
+"On Monday next at latest," he answered.  "We shall not be very far
+behind you."
+
+"Nevertheless it will be a long, long time before I shall see you
+again," she continued in a sad tone.  "Oh, Jack, Jack, I cannot tell
+you how wicked I feel in allowing you to do so much for me.  Even now,
+at this late hour, I feel I have no right to accept such a sacrifice at
+your hands."
+
+"Stop," he replied, holding up his finger in warning.  "I thought we
+had agreed that nothing more should be said about it."
+
+At this juncture there was the sound of a footstep in the passage
+outside, and a few seconds later Madame Bernstein entered the room.  On
+seeing Browne she hastened forward, and greeted him with all the
+effusiveness of which she was mistress.  "Ah, Monsieur Browne," she
+said, "now that I see you my courage returns.  As Katherine has
+doubtless told you, everything is prepared, and we are ready to start
+for Marseilles as soon as you give the order.  Katherine is looking
+forward to the voyage; but as for me----  Ah!  I do hate the sea more
+than anything in the world.  That nasty little strip of salt water
+which divides England from France is a continual nightmare to me, and I
+never cross it without hoping it may be the last time."
+
+Browne tried to comfort her by telling her of the size of the vessel in
+which they were to travel, and assured her that, even if she should be
+ill, by the time they were out of the Mediterranean she would have
+recovered.  Seeing that no other consolation was forthcoming, Madame
+was compelled to be content with this poor comfort.
+
+Though Browne had already breakfasted in the solid, substantial English
+fashion, he was only too glad to persuade Madame Bernstein and his
+sweetheart to partake of _dejeuner_ at one of the famous cafes on the
+Boulevards.  After the meal Madame returned to the Rue Jacquarie in
+order to finish a little packing, which she had left to the last
+moment; while Browne, who had been looking forward to this opportunity,
+assumed possession of Katharine, and carried her to one of the large
+shops in the Rue de la Paix, where he purchased for her the best
+dressing-bag ever obtained for love or money; to which he added a set
+of sables that would have turned even Russian Royalty green with envy.
+Never had his money seemed so useful to Browne.  These commissions
+executed, they returned to the Rue Jacquarie, where they found Madame
+Bernstein ready for the journey.  The express was due to leave Paris
+for Marseilles at 2.15 p.m.  Twenty minutes before that hour a cab
+drove up to the door, and in it Browne placed Madame Bernstein and
+Katherine, following them himself.  Wonderful is the power of a gift!
+Browne carried the bag, he had given Katherine that morning, down to
+the cab with his own hands, and without being asked to do so, placed it
+on the seat beside her.  He noticed that her right hand went out to
+take it, and held it lovingly until they reached the station, where she
+surrendered it to him again.
+
+When they made their appearance on the platform an official hurried
+forward to meet them, and conducted them forthwith to the special
+saloon carriage Browne had bespoken for their use that morning.  As she
+stepped into it Katherine gave a little grateful glance at her lover to
+show that she appreciated his generosity.  Poor as she had always been,
+she found it hard to realize what his wealth meant.  And yet there were
+many little signs to give her evidence of the fact--the obsequious
+railway officials; his own majestic English servant, who brought them a
+sheaf of papers without being instructed to do so; and last, but by no
+means least, the very railway carriage itself, which was of the most
+luxurious description.  On Madame Bernstein entering the compartment
+she placed herself in a corner, arranged her travelling-rug, her
+smelling-salts, her papers, and her fan to her satisfaction; and by the
+time she had settled down the journey had commenced.  The train was an
+express, and did not stop until it reached Laroche at 4.40.  Here
+afternoon tea was procured for the ladies; while on reaching Dijon, two
+hours and a half later, it was discovered that an unusually luxurious
+dinner had been ordered by telegraph, and was served in the second
+compartment of the carriage.  Having done justice to it, they
+afterwards settled themselves down for the night.  It is a very
+significant fact that when Browne looks back upon that journey now, the
+one most important fact, that strikes his memory, is that Madame
+Bernstein fell asleep a little after eight o'clock, and remained so
+until they had passed Pontanevaux.  During the time she slept, Browne
+was able to have a little private conversation with Katherine; and
+whatever trouble he had taken to ensure the journey being a successful
+one, he was amply compensated for it.  At ten o'clock the polite
+conductor begged permission to inform mesdames and monsieur that their
+sleeping apartments were prepared for them.  Browne accordingly bade
+the ladies good-night.
+
+As the young man lay in his sleeping compartment that night, and the
+train made its way across France towards its most important sea-port,
+Browne's dreams were of many things.  At one moment he was back in the
+Opera House at Covent Garden, listening to _Lohengrin_, and watching
+Katherine's face as each successive singer appeared upon the stage.
+Then, as if by magic, the scene changed, and he was on the windy
+mountain-side at Merok, and Katherine was looking up at him from her
+place of deadly peril a few feet below.  He reached down and tried to
+save her, but it appeared to be a question of length of arm, and his
+was a foot too short.  "Pray allow me to help you," said Maas; and
+being only too grateful for any assistance, Browne permitted him to do
+so.  They accordingly caught her by the hands and began to pull.  Then
+suddenly, without any warning, Maas struck him a terrible blow upon the
+head; both holds were instantly loosed, and Katherine was in the act of
+falling over the precipice when Browne awoke.  Great beads of
+perspiration stood upon his forehead, and, under the influence of this
+fright, he trembled as he did not remember ever to have done in his
+life before.  For upwards of an hour he lay awake, listening to the
+rhythm of the wheels and the thousand and one noises that a train makes
+at night.  Then once more he fell asleep, and, as before, dreamt of
+Katherine.  Equally strange was it that on this occasion also Maas was
+destined to prove his adversary.  They were in Japan now, and the scene
+was a garden in which the Wistaria bloomed luxuriously.  Katherine was
+standing on a rustic bridge, looking down into the water below, and
+Maas was beside her.  Suddenly the bridge gave way, and the girl was
+precipitated into the water.  Though she was drowning, he noticed that
+Maas did nothing to help her, but stood upon what remained of the
+bridge and taunted her with the knowledge that, if she were drowned,
+her mission to the East would be useless.  After this no further sleep
+was possible.  At break of day he accordingly rose and dressed himself.
+They were passing through the little town of Saint-Chamas at the time.
+It was a lovely morning; not a cloud in the sky, and all the air and
+country redolent of life and beauty.  It was a day upon which a man
+might be thankful for the right to live and love.  Yet Browne was sad
+at heart.  Was he not about to part from the woman he loved for nearly
+two whole months?  Brave though he was in most things, it must be
+confessed he feared that separation, as a confirmed coward fears a
+blow.  But still the train flew remorselessly on, bringing them every
+moment nearer and nearer their destination.
+
+When they reached it they drove direct to an hotel.  Here they
+breakfasted, and afterwards made their way to the steamer.  Browne's
+heart was sinking lower and lower, for never before had Katherine
+seemed so sweet and so desirable.  Once on board the vessel they called
+a steward to their assistance, and the two ladies were shown to their
+cabins.  As they afterwards found out, they were the best that Browne
+could secure, were situated amidships, and were really intended each to
+accommodate four passengers.  While they were examining them Browne
+hunted out the chief steward, and the stewards who would be likely to
+wait upon his friends.  These he rewarded in such a way that, if the
+men only acted up to their protestations, the remainder of the
+passengers would have very good cause to complain.  Having finished
+this work of bribery and corruption, he went in search of the ladies,
+only to be informed by the stewardess that they had left their cabins
+and had gone on deck.  He accordingly made his way up the
+companion-ladder, and found them standing beside the smoking-room
+entrance.
+
+"I hope you found your cabins comfortable," he said.  "I have just seen
+the chief steward, and he has promised that everything possible shall
+be done to make you enjoy your voyage."
+
+"How good you are!" said Katherine in a low voice, and with a little
+squeeze of his hand; while Madame protested that, if it were possible
+for anything to reconcile her to the sea, it would be Monsieur Browne's
+kindness.  Then the warning whistle sounded for non-passengers to leave
+the ship.  Madame Bernstein took the hint, and, having bade him
+good-bye, made her way along the deck towards the companion-ladder,
+leaving the lovers together.  Katherine's eyes had filled with tears
+and she had grown visibly paler.  Now that the time had come for
+parting with the man she loved, she had discovered how much he was to
+her.
+
+"Katherine," said Browne, in a voice that was hoarse with suppressed
+emotion, "do you know now how much I love you?"
+
+"You love me more than I deserve," she said.  "I shall never be able to
+repay you for all you have done for me."
+
+"I want no repayment but your love," he answered.
+
+"Si vous n'etes pas un voyageur, m'sieu, ayez l'obligeance de
+debarquer," said a gruff voice in his ear.
+
+Seeing that there was nothing left but to say good-bye, Browne kissed
+Katherine, and, unable to bear any more, made for the gangway.  Five
+minutes later the great ship was under way, and Katherine had embarked
+upon her voyage to the East.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX
+
+As soon as the mail-boat, which was carrying Katherine and Madame
+Bernstein to the East, was out of sight, Browne turned to his man, who
+was waiting beside him, and said: "Now, Davis, a cab, and quickly too.
+We must not miss that train for London whatever happens."
+
+As it was, they were only just in time.  He had scarcely taken his seat
+before the train began to move out of the station.  Placing himself in
+a corner of the carriage, he endeavoured to interest himself in a book;
+but it was of no use.  Though his material body was seated in the
+carriage being whirled away across the green plains of Southern France,
+his actual self was on board the great mail-boat, which was cutting its
+way through the blue waters, carrying Katherine mile by mile farther
+out of his reach.  Dreary indeed did Europe seem to him now.  It was a
+little before twelve o'clock when the train left Marseilles; it was
+nearly four next afternoon when he sighted the waters of the Channel at
+Calais.  Much to his astonishment and delight, Jimmy Foote met him at
+Dover, and travelled back to town with him.  During his absence Browne
+had entrusted their arrangements to his care; and in consequence Jimmy
+carried about with him an air of business, which at other times was
+quite unusual to him.
+
+"I have been down to Southampton," he reported, "and have seen Mason.
+He was hard at work getting the stores aboard, and asked me to tell you
+he will be able to sail without fail early on Monday morning.  When do
+you think we had better go down?"
+
+"On Sunday," said Browne.  "We may as well get on board as soon as we
+can."
+
+Though he spoke in this casual way, he knew that in his heart he was
+waiting the hour of departure with an impatience, that bordered almost
+on desperation.  He longed to see the yacht's head pointed down
+Channel, and to know that at last she was really in pursuit of the
+other boat, which had been granted such a lengthy start.  On reaching
+London they drove together to Browne's house.  It was Saturday evening,
+and there were still a hundred and one things to be settled.  Upon his
+study table Browne discovered upwards of fifty invitations from all
+sorts and conditions of people.  He smiled cynically as he opened them,
+and, when the last one had been examined, turned to Jimmy.
+
+"Thank Heaven, I can decline these with a clear conscience," he said.
+"By the time the dates come round we shall be on the high seas, far
+beyond the reach of dinners, dances, and kettledrums.  I wonder how
+many of these folk," he continued, picking up one from the heap and
+flicking it across the table to his friend, "would have me in their
+houses again if they knew what I am about to do?"
+
+"Every one of them, my boy," the other replied; "from the Duchess of
+Matlock downwards.  You might help a thousand Russian convicts to
+escape from Saghalien, and they will pardon you; but you are doing one
+other thing for which you must never hope to be forgiven."
+
+"And what may that be?" Browne inquired.
+
+"Why, you are marrying Miss Petrovitch," answered Jimmy.  "If she were
+a famous beauty, a great heiress, or even the daughter of a peer, all
+would be well; but you must remember that no one knows her; that,
+however much you may love her, and however worthy she may be, she is
+nevertheless not chronicled in the _Court Guide_.  To marry out of your
+own circle is a sin seldom forgiven, particularly when a man is a
+millionaire, and has been the desire of every match-making mother for
+as long as you have."
+
+"They had better treat my wife as I wish them to, or beware of me,"
+said Browne angrily.  "If they treat her badly they'll find I've got
+claws."
+
+"But, my dear fellow, you are running your head against the wall," said
+Jimmy.  "I never said they _would_ treat her badly.  On the contrary,
+they will treat her wonderfully well; for, remember, she is your wife.
+They will accept all her invitations for dances in London, will stay
+with her in the country; they will yacht, hunt, fish, and shoot with
+you; but the mothers, who, after all is said and done, are the leaders
+of society, will never forget or forgive you.  My dear fellow," he
+continued, with the air of a man who knew his world thoroughly, which,
+to do him justice, he certainly did, "you surely do not imagine for an
+instant that Miss Verney has forgotten that----"
+
+"We'll leave Miss Verney out of the question, Jimmy, if you don't
+mind," replied Browne, with rather a different intonation.
+
+"I thought that would make him wince," murmured Jimmy to himself; and
+then added aloud, "Never mind, old man; we won't pursue the subject any
+further.  It's not a nice one, and we've plenty else to think about,
+have we not?  Let me tell you, I am looking forward to this little
+business more than I have ever done to anything.  The only regret I
+have about it is that there does not appear to be any probability of
+our having some fighting.  I must confess I should like to have a brush
+with the enemy, if possible."
+
+"In that case we should be lost men," Browne replied.  "No; whatever we
+do, we must avoid coming into actual conflict with the Authorities.  By
+the way, what about Maas?"
+
+"I saw him this morning," Foote replied.  "I told him what arrangements
+we had made, and he will meet us whenever and wherever we wish.  He
+seemed quite elated over the prospect of the voyage, and told me he
+thought it awfully good of you to take him.  After all, he's not a bad
+sort of fellow.  There is only one thing I don't like about him, and
+that is his predilection for wishing people to think he is in a
+delicate state of health."
+
+"And you don't think he is?" said Browne.
+
+"Of course I don't," Jimmy replied.  "Why, only this morning I was with
+him more than an hour, and he didn't cough once; and yet he was
+continually pointing out to me that it was so necessary for his
+health--for his lungs, in fact---that he should go out of England at
+once.  It is my idea that he is hypochondriacal."
+
+"Whatever he is, I wish to goodness he had chosen any other time for
+wanting to accompany us.  I have a sort of notion that his presence on
+board will bring us bad luck."
+
+"Nonsense," said his matter-of-fact friend.  "Why should it?  Maas
+could do us no harm, even supposing he wanted to.  And he's certain not
+to have any desire that way."
+
+"Well," answered Browne, "that is what I feel, and yet I can't make out
+why I should do so."  As he said this he pressed the ring Katharine had
+given him, and remembered that that was his talisman, and that she had
+told him that, while he wore it, he could come to no harm.  With that
+on his finger, and his love for her in his heart, it would be wonderful
+indeed if he could not fulfil the task he had set himself to do.
+
+It is strange how ignorant we are of the doings, and indeed of the very
+lives, of our fellow-men.  I do not mean the actions which, in the
+broad light of day, lie in the ordinary routine of life, but those more
+important circumstances which are not seen, but make up, and help to
+weave the skein of each man's destiny.  For instance, had a certain
+well-known official in the office of the Secretary of State for Foreign
+Affairs, who stood upon the platform of Waterloo station, waiting for
+the train that was to carry him to the residence of a friend at Woking,
+dreamt for an instant that the three gentlemen he nodded so affably to,
+and who were standing at the door of a saloon carriage in the same
+train, were leaving England next day, in order to cause considerable
+trouble to a Power that, at the moment had shown signs of being
+friendly, what would his feelings have been?  He did not know it,
+however; so he seated himself in his comfortable smoking-carriage, lit
+a cigar, and read his Sunday paper, quite unconscious of the
+circumstances.
+
+It was nearly eight o'clock before they readied Southampton.  When they
+did they made their way to the harbour, where a steam-launch from the
+yacht was awaiting them.  The _Lotus Blossom_ herself lay off the Royal
+Pier; and when they reached her, Captain Mason received them at the
+gangway.
+
+"Well, Mason," said Browne, "is everything ready for the start
+to-morrow?"
+
+"Everything is ready, sir," Mason replied.  "You have only to say when
+you desire to get off, and we'll up anchor."
+
+Browne thought that he would like to get under way at once; but it
+could not be.  He looked along the snow-white decks and upon the
+polished brasswork, and thought of the day that he had left the boat
+when she was anchored in the harbour of Merok, to accompany his guests
+on their walk to the falls, and of the wonderful things that had
+happened since then.  Before many weeks had passed over their heads he
+hoped that Katherine herself would be standing on these self-same
+decks.  He pictured the delight he would feel in showing her over his
+trim and beautiful vessel, and thought of the long conversations they
+would have on deck at night, and of the happiness they would feel when
+they were speeding towards safety once more, with the rescued man on
+board.  What they were to do with her father, when they had got him,
+was one thing he wanted to leave to Katherine to decide.  He was
+awakened from these dreams by Foote, who inquired whether he intended
+to allow his guests to remain on deck all night, or whether he was
+going to take them below.
+
+"I beg your pardon," said Browne.  "It's awfully rude of me to keep you
+standing here like this.  Come along."
+
+They accordingly made their way down the companion-ladder to the saloon
+below.  Everything had been prepared for their reception, and the
+stewards were already laying dinner as they entered.  Having finished
+that important meal, and drunk the toast of a pleasant voyage, they
+ascended to the deck once more, when Foote and Maas made their way to
+the smoking-room, while Browne went up to the bridge to have a talk
+with the captain.  When he descended again, he announced to his guests
+that the yacht would be got under way as soon as it was light in the
+morning, and that the first coaling-place would be Gibraltar.
+
+"Bravo!" said Jimmy, rapping the table with his pipe.  "Thank goodness,
+by midday we shall be well out in the Channel."
+
+At the same moment Maas's cigar slipped from between his fingers and
+dropped on the floor.  He bent down to pick it up, but at first could
+not find it.  By the time he had done so the conversation had changed,
+and Browne had drawn his watch from his pocket.  A cry of astonishment
+escaped him: "Have you any idea what the time is?"
+
+They confessed that they had not.
+
+"Well, it's nearly twelve o'clock," he said.  "If you won't either of
+you take anything else, I think the best thing we can do is to get to
+bed as soon as possible."
+
+So tired was Browne that night that he slept without waking until well
+on in the following morning.  Indeed, it was past nine o'clock when
+Davis, his man-servant, entered and woke him; he sat up, and rubbed his
+eyes, as if he could very well have gone on sleeping for another hour
+or two.
+
+"By Jove! we're under way," he said, as if he were surprised to find
+the yacht moving.  "Where are we, Davis?"
+
+"Off Swanage, sir," the man replied.  "Captain Mason couldn't get away
+quite as early as he hoped to do; but he's making up for lost time now,
+sir."
+
+"What sort of a day is it?" Browne inquired.
+
+"Beautiful, sir; it couldn't be no better if you'd ordered it special,"
+said Davis, who was a bit of a wag in his way, and was privileged as
+such.  "There's just a nice bit of swell running, but no more.  Not
+enough to shake the curls of a schoolmistress, in a manner of speaking."
+
+This Browne discovered to be the case, when he ascended to the deck.
+The yacht was bathed in sunshine, and she sat as softly as a duck upon
+a large green swell, that was as easy as the motion of a rocking-horse.
+Far away to starboard the pinewood cliffs of Bournemouth could be
+descried; while a point on the starboard-bow was Poole Harbour and
+Swanage headland, with Old Harry peering up out of the sunlit waves.
+Browne ascended to the bridge, to find Foote and Captain Mason there.
+The latter touched his cap, while Foote came forward and held out his
+hand.
+
+"Good-morning," said Jimmy.  "What do you think of this, my boy?  Isn't
+it better than London?  Doesn't it make you feel it's worth something
+to be alive?  I wouldn't change places this morning with any man in
+England."
+
+"And you may be very sure I would not," said Browne; then, turning to
+the skipper, he inquired what the yacht was doing.
+
+"Thirteen knots good, sir," the latter replied.  "We shall do better,
+however, when we've put Portland Bill behind us."
+
+As he spoke the breakfast-bell sounded, and simultaneously with it Maas
+appeared on deck.  Browne and Foote descended from the bridge to greet
+him, and found him in excellent spirits.
+
+"I feel better already," he said, as they went down the
+companion-ladder and took their places at the table.  "How beautiful
+the air is on deck!  Alchemists may say what they please, but this is
+the Elixir of Life.  What a pity it is we cannot bottle it, and
+introduce it into the crowded ballrooms and dining-rooms during the
+London season!"
+
+"That's rather an original notion," retorted Jimmy.  "Fancy, after a
+waltz with a heavy partner, taking her off to a room set apart for the
+purpose, seating her in a chair, and, instead of asking her the usual
+insipid question, whether she would have an ice, or coffee, or claret
+cup, inquiring what brand of air she preferred--whether she would have
+a gallon of Bournemouth, which is relaxing, or Margate, which is
+bracing, or Folkestone--shall we say?--which is midway between the two.
+It could be laid on in town and country houses, and, combined with the
+phonograph, which would repeat the nigger minstrel melodies of the
+sands, and the biograph, which would show the surrounding scenery,
+would be a tremendous attraction.  Having purchased one of these
+machines, paterfamilias need not trouble his head about taking his
+family away for the annual trip to the seaside.  Rents would not affect
+him; he would be free from landladies' overcharges.  All he would have
+to do would be to take his wife and bairns into a room, turn on the
+various machines, and science would do the rest."
+
+"Perhaps, when you have done talking nonsense," said Browne, "you will
+be kind enough to hand me the _pate de foie gras_.  I remember so many
+of your wonderful schemes, Jimmy, that I begin to think I know them all
+by heart."
+
+"In that case you must admit that the majority of them were based upon
+very sound principles," replied Jimmy.  "I remember there was one that
+might have made a fortune for anybody.  It was to be a matrimonial
+registry for the upper ten, where intending Benedicts could apply for
+particulars respecting their future wives.  For instance, the Duke of
+A----, being very desirous of marrying, and being also notoriously
+impecunious, would call at the office and ask for a choice of American
+heiresses possessing between five and ten millions.  Photographs having
+been submitted to him, and a guarantee as to the money given to him,
+meetings between the parties could be arranged by the company, and a
+small commission charged when the marriage was duly solemnized.  Then
+there was another scheme for educating the sons of millionaires in the
+brands of cigars they should give their friends.  For a small
+commission, Viscount B----, who has smoked himself into the bankruptcy
+court, would call at their residences three times a week, when he would
+not only show them how to discriminate between a Trichinopoli and a
+Burma Pwe, which is difficult to the uninitiated, but also between La
+Intimidad Excelsos of '94 and Henry Clay Soberanos, which is much more
+so."
+
+"I remember yet another scheme," said Maas quietly, as he helped
+himself to some caviare from a dish before him.  "You told me once of a
+scheme you were perfecting for forming a company to help long-sentenced
+burglars of proved ability to escape from penal servitude, in order
+that they should work for the society on the co-operative principle.
+If my memory serves me, it was to be a most remunerative speculation.
+The only flaw in it that I could see was the difficulty in arranging
+the convict's escape, and the danger, that would accrue to those
+helping him, in case they were discovered."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX
+
+Had a bombshell fallen through the skylight of the saloon and settled
+itself in the centre of the table, it could scarcely have caused
+greater consternation than did Maas's simple remark.  Browne felt that
+his face was visibly paling, and that guilt must be written on every
+inch of it.  As for Jimmy, his mouth opened and shut like that of an
+expiring fish.  He could scarcely believe he had heard aright.  He had
+certainly once in an idle moment joked in the fashion Maas had
+attributed to him; but what had induced the latter to remember and to
+bring it up now, of all times, when their nerves were so tightly
+stretched?  Maas's face, however, was all innocence.  He seemed not to
+have noticed the amazement he had caused, but ate his caviare with the
+air of a man who had said something worthy, the point of which had
+fallen a trifle flat.  It was not until the meal was over, and they had
+ascended to the deck once more, that Browne found an opportunity of
+having a few words with Jimmy.
+
+"What on earth did he mean by that?" he asked.  "Do you think he can
+have heard anything?  Or do you think he only suspects?"
+
+"Neither," said Jimmy.  "I'll tell you what I think it was; it was a
+perfectly simple remark, which by sheer ill-luck just happened to touch
+us in the wrong place.  It was, as the shooters say, an unintentional
+bull's-eye.  But, by Jove!  I must confess that it made me feel pretty
+bad at the moment."
+
+"Then you think we need not attach any importance to it?"
+
+"I'm quite sure we need not," his friend replied.  "Look at it in this
+way: if the man had known anything he most certainly would not have
+said anything about it.  If we had suspected him of knowing our secret,
+and had put ourselves out in order to bring him to the point, and he
+had kept silence, then we might have thought otherwise; as it is, I am
+positive we need not be afraid."
+
+As if to reassure them, Maas said nothing further on the subject.  He
+was full of good-humour, absorbed the sunshine like a Neapolitan, and
+seemed to enjoy every hour he lived.  He also did his best to make the
+others do likewise.  He talked upon every conceivable subject, and did
+not feel in the least annoyed when the others appeared occupied.  They
+passed Plymouth soon after twelve next day, and said good-bye to Old
+England shortly afterwards.  How little those on board guessed what was
+to happen before they could see her shores again?  Five days later they
+were at Gibraltar, anchored in the harbour beneath the shadow of the
+batteries.  Though he grudged every minute, and though he had seen the
+Rock a dozen times before, Browne accompanied them ashore, explored the
+Galleries, and lunched at the Officers' Mess.
+
+"What rum beggars we are, to be sure!" said young Bramthwaite, of the
+43rd Midlandshire, to Browne, as they lit their cigars afterwards.
+"Here are you, posting off for the East, and as anxious as you can be
+to turn your back on Old England; while I, poor beggar, am quartered
+here, and am longing to get home with all my might and main.  Do you
+think, if I had your chance, I would go abroad?  Not I."
+
+"Circumstances alter cases," returned Browne.  "If you were in my place
+you would want to be out of England.  You should just have seen London
+as we left.  Fogs, sleet, snow, drizzle, day after day, while here you
+are wrapped in continual sunshine.  I don't see that you have much to
+grumble at."
+
+"Don't you?" said his friend.  "Well, I do.  Let us take my own case
+again.  I am just up from a baddish attack of Rock-fever.  I feel as
+weak as a cat--not fit for anything.  And what good does it do me?  I
+don't even have the luck to be properly ill, so that I could compel
+them to invalid me.  And, to make matters worse, my brother writes that
+they are having the most ripping hunting in the shires; from his
+letters I gather that the pheasants have never been better; and, with
+it all, here I am, like the Johnny in the heathen mythology, chained to
+this rock, and unable to get away."
+
+Browne consoled him to the best of his ability, and shortly afterwards
+collected his party and returned to the yacht.  The work of coaling was
+completed, and Captain Mason, who resembled a badly blacked Christy
+Minstrel, was ready to start as soon as his owner desired.  Browne,
+nothing loath, gave the order, and accordingly they steamed out of the
+harbour, past the Rock, and were in blue seas once more.  They would
+not touch anywhere again until they reached Port Said.
+
+That night on deck Browne was lamenting the fact that the yacht did not
+travel faster than she did.
+
+"My dear fellow," said Maas, "what a hurry you are in, to be sure!
+Why, this is simply delightful.  What more could you wish for?  You
+have a beautiful vessel, your cook is a genius, and your wines are
+perfect.  If I had your money, do you know what I would do?  I would
+sail up and down the Mediterranean at this time of the year for months
+on end."
+
+"I don't think you would," replied Browne.  "In the meantime, what I
+want is to get to Japan."
+
+"I presume your _fiancee_ is to meet you there?" said Maas.  "I can
+quite understand your haste now."
+
+There was a silence for a few moments, and then Maas added, as if the
+idea had just struck him: "By the way, you have never told me her name."
+
+"Her name is Petrovitch," answered Browne softly, as if the name were
+too precious to be breathed aloud.  "I do not think you have ever met
+her."
+
+"Now I come to think of it, I believe I have," Maas responded.  "At
+least, I am not acquainted with her personally, but I have met some one
+who knows her fairly well."
+
+"Indeed!" said Browne, in some astonishment.  "And who might that some
+one be?"
+
+"You need not be jealous, my dear fellow," Maas continued.  "My friend
+was a lady, a Miss Corniquet, a French artist.  Miss Petrovitch, I
+believe, exhibited in the Salon last year, and they met shortly
+afterwards.  I remember that she informed me that the young lady in
+question showed remarkable talent.  I am sure, Browne, I congratulate
+you heartily."
+
+"Many thanks," remarked the other; and so the matter dropped for the
+time being.
+
+Port Said and the work of coaling being things of the past, they
+proceeded through the Suez Canal and down the Red Sea; coaled once more
+at Aden, and later on at Colombo.  By the time they reached Singapore,
+Browne's impatience could scarcely be controlled.  With every day an
+increased nervousness came over him.  At last they were only a few
+hours' steam from Hong-kong.  It was there that Browne was to interview
+the famous Johann Schmidt, of whom Herr Sauber had spoken to him in
+Paris.  What the result of that interview would be he could only
+conjecture.  He wanted to get it over in order that he might have his
+plans cut and dried by the time they reached Japan, where Katharine and
+Madame Bernstein must now be.  If all went well, he would soon join
+them there.
+
+At ten o'clock on a lovely morning they entered the Ly-ee-moon Pass,
+steamed past Green Island, and at length they came in sight of the
+crowded harbour of Victoria.  Once at anchor, the steam-launch was
+slung overboard and brought alongside, Browne and his friends took
+their places in her, and she forthwith made her way to the shore.  None
+of the men had seen the wonderful city, they were now visiting, before,
+so that all its marvels, its wealth, and its extraordinary mixture of
+races were new to them.  Though they had encountered him in his
+American hybrid condition, it was the first time they had been brought
+into actual contact with their marvellous Yellow Brother, who in
+Hong-kong may be seen in all the glory of his dirt and sumptuousness.
+Reaching the Praya, they disembarked, and ascended the steps.
+Accosting an English inspector of police whom they met, they inquired
+in what direction they should proceed in order to reach the Club.  He
+pointed out the way, and they accordingly set off in search of it.
+Turning into the Queen's Road, they made their way along it until they
+reached the place in question.  Browne had a letter of introduction to
+one of the members, given to him in London, and he was anxious to
+present it to him in order to learn something, if possible, of Johann
+Schmidt before going in search of him.  Leaving his two friends
+outside, he entered the Club and inquired for the gentleman in
+question.  The servant who received him informed him that the member
+was not at the time in the building.
+
+"Can you tell me his address?" said Browne.  "It's just possible I may
+find him at his office."
+
+The man furnished him with what he wanted, and showed him how he could
+reach it.  Rejoining his companions, Browne proceeded down the street,
+passed the Law Courts, and went in the direction of the Barracks.  At
+last he reached the block of buildings of which he was in search.  The
+name of the man he wanted was to be seen on a brass plate upon the
+door.  He entered, and accosting a white-clad Englishman in an enormous
+solar topee, whom he found there, inquired if he could tell whether his
+friend was at home.
+
+"I believe he is," the man replied.  "At any rate, if you will wait a
+moment I'll soon find out."  Leaving them, he departed down the
+passage, to return presently with the information that the person they
+wanted to see was in his office.
+
+Foote and Maas remained in the street, while Browne entered a cool and
+airy room at the farther end of the passage.  Here, seated at an
+office-table, was another white-clad Englishman.  He had a cigar in his
+mouth, and possessed a handsome face and a close-cropped beard.
+
+"Mr. ----?" said Browne, after he had thanked his conductor for his
+courtesy.
+
+"That is my name," the gentleman replied.  "What can I have the
+pleasure of doing for you?"
+
+"I have a letter of introduction to you," said Browne, producing the
+document in question from his pocket, and handing it across the table.
+"I believe we are common friends of George Pellister?"
+
+"George Pellister!" cried the man.  "I should rather think so; when I
+was home three years ago he was awfully kind to me.  So you are a
+friend of his?  Pray forgive my not having come out to greet you.  Come
+and sit down.  How long have you been in the island?"
+
+"Only an hour and a half," Browne replied.
+
+"An hour and a half!" the other repeated.  "I had no idea there was an
+English mail-boat in.  The P. & O. only left yesterday."
+
+"I didn't come in a mail-boat," said Browne.  "I've got my own tub.  We
+left London on the 7th of last month."
+
+The man behind the table opened his eyes in surprise.  Gentlemen who
+travelled as far as Hong-kong in their own steam-yachts, were few and
+far between, and had to be treated with proper respect.  He accordingly
+found an opportunity of opening the letter of introduction.  Had Browne
+been watching his face, he would have seen the expression of
+astonishment that spread over it, as he realized that his visitor was
+no less a person than the fabulously wealthy John Grantham Browne, of
+whose doings in the social and sporting world he had so often read.
+
+"I am very glad indeed that you have called on me," he said, after he
+had somewhat recovered from his astonishment.  "While you are here you
+must let me do the honours of Hong-kong, such as they are.  Of course I
+can put you up at the Club, if that's any use to you, and show you all
+there is to be seen, though I fear it will bore you fearfully after
+London.  How long are you staying?"
+
+"Well," answered Browne, "I'm afraid I shall not be able to remain very
+long on the outward voyage.  I should not have called here at all, but
+that I had some rather important business to transact.  I'm on my way
+to Japan."
+
+"Indeed!" exclaimed the other.  "Well, I shall be only too happy if you
+will let me help you in any way I can."
+
+"It's not a very big matter," replied Browne.  "All I want to know is
+the address of a certain person living in Hong-kong whose name is
+Schmidt--Johann Schmidt."
+
+"Johann Schmidt?" asked the other.  "I am not quite certain that I know
+this particular one; there are so many of that name here, and I dare
+say a large proportion of them are Johanns.  However, I will send some
+one to find out; and if you will take tiffin with me at the Club, my
+clerks shall make inquiries while we are doing so."
+
+Browne thereupon explained that he had two friends travelling with him,
+with the result that the other replied that he would only be too happy
+if they would join the party.  They accordingly adjourned, and, picking
+up Maas and Foote in the street, proceeded to the Club.  Tiffin was
+almost at an end, when a servant entered and placed a card beside their
+host's plate.  He glanced at it, and, turning to Browne, he pushed it
+towards him.
+
+"If I'm not mistaken, that is the man you want," he remarked.  "I think
+it only fair to tell you that I know the fellow, and he is rather an
+extraordinary character.  Between ourselves, he does not bear any too
+good a reputation."
+
+"Oh, that doesn't matter to me in the least," responded Browne.  "My
+business with him is purely of a commercial nature."
+
+After that no more was said on the subject, and, when they rose from
+the table, Browne proposed that he should go in search of the man in
+question.  "I am anxious, if possible, to leave Hong-kong at daybreak
+to-morrow morning," he said; and then added, by way of explanation, "I
+am due in Japan, and have no time to spare."
+
+"I am sorry to hear that," returned the other.  "I had hoped you would
+have stayed longer.  However, while you are away, your friends had
+better remain with me.  I will do my best to amuse them."
+
+Browne thereupon rose to take leave.  His host accompanied him to the
+street, and, having put him in a _ricksha_, told the coolie where he
+was to take him.
+
+"I am exceedingly obliged to you for your kindness," said Browne, as he
+shook hands.  "Will you not let me return it by asking you to dine with
+us on board my boat to-night?  She is the _Lotus Blossom_.  I don't
+suppose you will have much difficulty in finding her."
+
+"I shall be delighted," replied the other.  "At what time do you dine?"
+
+"At half-past seven," answered Browne.
+
+"_Au revoir_, then, until half-past seven."
+
+They waved hands to each other, and Browne laid himself back in the
+_ricksha_, mumbling as he did so, "Now for our friend Johann Schmidt."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI
+
+Leaving the Club, the _ricksha_ coolie proceeded in the opposite
+direction to that which Browne had followed, when in search of the
+gentleman to whom he had presented the letter of introduction.  At
+first, and while he remained in the Queen's Road, there was but little
+difference to be observed; the thoroughfare was a fine one, broad and
+commodious.  After one or two turnings, however, matters changed
+somewhat, and he found himself in a labyrinth of narrow, tortuous
+streets, the shops on either side of which were small and mean, the
+names over the doors being for the most part in the Celestial
+characters.  The confusion that existed in the streets was
+indescribable.  Here the Mongolian was to be seen in all his glory.
+But, in addition to the Chinamen, almost every nationality known to the
+Asiatic world was represented; while through it all, towering head and
+shoulders above the crowd, stalked the stately Sikhs on patrol duty.
+At last, after a drive that had occupied perhaps a quarter of an hour,
+the coolie drew up, before what was probably the largest shop Browne
+had yet seen in the neighbourhood.  It was built in the Chinese
+fashion, and, in order that West and East may meet on an equal footing,
+had two names over the door, one in Chinese writing, the other plainly
+printed in English characters: "Johann Schmidt."  Browne alighted, and,
+having told his coolie to wait, entered the shop.  He was greeted on
+the threshold by a stout Chinaman, who was plainly in charge.
+
+"What for you piecee look see?" inquired the latter.
+
+Browne, not being adept at pidgin-English, replied to the effect that
+he desired to see and speak with Herr Schmidt.  Whether the man
+comprehended or not he could not tell; at any rate he left him alone in
+the shop, while he disappeared behind a curtain at the farther end.
+When he returned, a few seconds later, he was accompanied by a portly
+individual, whose nationality the veriest tyro could not mistake.  As
+if to make it doubly sure, he carried in his hand an enormous pipe
+fashioned after the pattern of the Fatherland.  His face was large and
+almost spherical; his hair was close-cropped, as was his beard; he was
+attired in white trousers, a flannel shirt, which would have been none
+the worse for a wash, and a black alpaca coat.  The Teutonic stolidity
+was certainly well developed in him.  On seeing Browne he stopped and
+sucked contentedly at his pipe, but said nothing.  The younger man was
+the first to speak.
+
+"You are Herr Schmidt, I believe?" said Browne, in English.  The other
+nodded his head, but still did not venture upon speech.  "I bring a
+letter of introduction to you," said Browne, dropping his voice a
+little, as though he were afraid of being overheard.  "It is from a
+certain Herr Otto Sauber, whom I met in Paris about two months ago.  He
+told me that you would do all you could for me in a certain matter."
+
+"Herr Sauber?" inquired the German.  "I cannot dink that I am mit him
+acquainted."
+
+Browne's disappointment was plainly discernible on his face.  He had
+fully expected that, immediately he presented the letter Sauber had
+given him, this mysterious Johann Schmidt would understand and arrange
+everything.  This, however, did not appear to be the case.  The man
+before him sucked stolidly at his pipe, and watched him with eyes that
+had no expression in them.  The position was embarrassing, to say the
+least of it.  Was it possible that his mission was going to prove
+futile after all, and that, for the good he was to get out of it, he
+might just as well not have wasted his time by calling at Hong-kong at
+all?  For upwards of thirty most uncomfortable seconds the two men
+stood watching each other.  Then Browne spoke.
+
+"You are quite sure, I suppose," he asked, "that you do not know the
+gentleman in question?  I certainly understood from him that you had
+been acquainted with each other for many years."
+
+The German shook his head.  Then he said slowly, "Perhaps, mein frien,
+if you would mit me come, I will talk mit you ubon the madder.  So many
+men do say dot they know Johann Schmidt.  But Johann do not know dem.
+If you to mine office would come, we will talk mit each other dere."
+
+Browne accordingly followed him behind the curtain to which I have
+alluded.  There he found, to his surprise, a most comfortable and, I
+might almost add, luxurious apartment.  The walls were hung with
+pictures of considerable merit, interspersed with innumerable curios,
+collected from almost every country in the Farther East.  In any other
+place the room might have ranked as a fairly noteworthy apartment; but
+here, surrounded by so much that was sordid--nay, almost barbaric--it
+was little short of unique.  Pointing to a long bamboo chair which
+fitted a corner beneath an enormous Cantonese dragon, used for burning
+pastilles, the German bade Browne seat himself.  Before the latter did
+so, however, he handed the German the letter with which Herr Sauber had
+furnished him.  The other took it, cut the flap of the envelope with a
+jade paper-knife, and, drawing forth the contents, placed an enormous
+pair of spectacles upon his nose, and read them thoroughly.  Upwards of
+five minutes had elapsed between the time Browne had given him the
+letter until he spoke again.  These long delays were having a bad
+effect upon the young man's temper; they strained his nerves to
+breaking-pitch.  He felt that this phlegmatic individual would not
+hurry himself, even if another's existence depended upon it.  To all
+intents and purposes he had united in his person the apathy of the
+Asiatic with the stolidity of the Teuton.
+
+"Now dat I look ubon it, I do remember Herr Sauber," the other replied.
+"It was once dat we very good friends were, but it is many years dat I
+heard of him."  The old fellow wagged his head solemnly until his
+glasses shook upon his nose.  The recollection of the incident,
+whatever it was, seemed to afford him considerable satisfaction, though
+why it should have done so was by no means apparent to Browne.
+
+"But with regard to what he says in the letter?" the young man at last
+exclaimed in desperation.  "Will you be able to help me, do you think?"
+
+"Ah!  I know noddings about dat," answered Schmidt.  "I do not
+understand what dis business is.  If it is Chinese silk, or curios, or
+gondiments of any kind, den I know what you want.  Dere is no one on
+dis island can subbly you so goot as Johann Schmidt."
+
+Browne did not know what to say.  For his own sake he knew that it
+would not be safe to broach such a delicate subject to a man, like the
+one seated before him, whose only idea in life seemed to be to cross
+one fat leg over the other and to fill and smoke his pipe until the
+room was one large tobacco-cloud, unless he was quite certain of that
+person's identity with the individual, to whom he had been directed to
+apply.
+
+"To put the matter in a nutshell," said Browne, lowering his voice a
+little in order that it should not carry farther than the man seated
+before him, "I understood from Herr Sauber that if any one happened to
+have a friend, who had the misfortune to be compelled to stay rather
+longer in a certain place, than was quite conducive to his health or
+peace of mind, by applying to you an arrangement might possibly be
+made, whereby his release might be effected."
+
+Herr Schmidt for the first time took the pipe out of his mouth and
+looked at him.  "Bardon, mein frien, but I do not understand what is
+meant by dat speech," he replied.  "If de place, where dat frien of
+yours is living, is not to his health suited, why does not he elsewhere
+go?"
+
+Though Browne felt morally certain that the man understood what he
+meant, he did not feel justified in speaking more plainly at the
+moment.  He had to feel his way before he definitely committed himself.
+However, a little reflection was sufficient to show him, that it would
+be impossible to make any progress at all unless he spoke out, and that
+even in the event of his doing so, he would not be placing himself in
+any way in the other's power.  He accordingly resolved upon a line of
+action.
+
+"The truth of the matter is, Herr Schmidt," he began, leaning a little
+forward, and speaking with all the emphasis of which he was master, "I
+happen to have a friend who is at the present time confined on a
+certain island.  He is in delicate health, and his friends are anxious
+to get him away.  Now, I have been informed that, if suitable terms can
+be arranged, it would be possible for you to effect this escape.  Is
+this so?"
+
+"Mine goot frien," returned the German, "let me tell you dat you speak
+too plain.  The words dat you talk mit me would make trouble mit my
+friens de police.  Besides, dere is no esgaping from der jail ubon dis
+island."
+
+"I did not say anything about the jail upon this island," retorted
+Browne; "the place I mean is a very long way from here."
+
+"Well then, Noumea, perhaps?"
+
+"No, not Noumea," answered Browne.  "If I am to enter into more
+explanations, I might say that my friend is a Russian, and that he is
+also a political prisoner."  He stopped and watched Herr Schmidt's face
+anxiously.  The latter was sitting bolt upright in his chair, with a
+fat hand resting on either knee; his spectacles were pushed on to the
+top of his head, and his long pipe was still in his mouth.  Not a sign
+escaped him to show that he understood.
+
+"I dink dat mein old comrade, Herr Sauber, must have been drunken mit
+too much schnapps when he talk mit you.  What should Johann Schmidt
+have to do mit Russian bolitical brisoners?  His piziness is mit de
+curios of China, mit silk, rice, ginger, but not mit de tings you do
+speak to him about."
+
+"Then I am to understand that you can do nothing to help me?" said
+Browne, rising from his chair as if to take leave.
+
+"For mineself it is not possible," returned the other, with great
+deliberation.  "But since you are a frien of mein old comrade Sauber,
+den I tink over tings and gause inquiries to be made.  Dis a very
+strange work is, and dere are many men in it.  I do not tell you dat it
+gannot be done, but it will be difficult.  Perhaps dere may be a man to
+be found who will gommunicate mit your friend."
+
+The meaning of this speech was perfectly clear to him.  In plain
+English, it, of course, meant that, while Herr Schmidt was not going to
+commit himself, he would find some one else who would.
+
+"I should be under a life-long obligation if you would do so," answered
+Browne.  "And what is more, I may as well say now I am not afraid to
+pay handsomely for the service rendered."
+
+This time there was a twinkle to be seen in the German's eye.  "I know
+noddings at all about what you speak; you will remember dot," continued
+he.  "But I will do de best I can.  If you write me now on a paper de
+name of your frien, and de place where he is--what shall we say?--now
+staying, I will let you know what de price would be, and when der work
+can be done.  It will be--how you call it?--a ready-money transaction."
+
+"I desire it to be so," replied Browne a little shortly.
+
+There was silence between them for a few moments.  Then Schmidt
+inquired where Browne's yacht was anchored.  Browne informed him; and
+as he did so, it struck him that this was a rather curious remark upon
+his companion's part, if, as he had led him to believe at the beginning
+of the interview, he knew nothing whatever about his coming to
+Hong-kong.  However, he did not comment upon it.
+
+"Dat is goot, den," said Schmidt.  "If I find a man who will run de
+risk, den I will gommunicate mit you before den o'clock to-night."
+
+Browne thanked him; and, feeling that they had reached the end of the
+interview, bade him good-bye and passed through the shop out into the
+street once more.  His coolie was still seated on the shafts of his
+_ricksha_; and, when Browne had mounted, they returned at a smart trot,
+by the way they had come, to the Club.  Here he found his friends
+awaiting him.  They had done the sights of the city, and were now eager
+to get back to the yacht once more.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII
+
+"Did you find your friend Schmidt?" inquired their host of Browne as he
+seated himself in a chair and lit a cigar.
+
+"Yes," the latter answered, "I found him, and a curious character he
+is.  He has some wonderful curios in his shop, and I could have spent a
+day there overhauling them."
+
+"I should be very careful, if I were you, what sort of dealings you
+have with him," said the other, with what struck Browne as a peculiar
+meaning.  "He does not bear any too good a reputation in these parts.
+I have heard some funny stories about him at one time and another."
+
+"Oh, you need not be afraid on my account," replied Browne.  "As I told
+you in your office, my dealings with him are of a purely commercial
+character, and I don't think he has robbed me of very much so far.
+Now, what would you say if we were to make our way to the yacht?"
+
+They accordingly adjourned to the boat.  Perhaps, as the result of his
+interview that afternoon, Browne was in the highest of spirits.  He did
+the honours of his table royally, and the new-comer, ever since that
+day, has been wont to declare that it was the jolliest dinner of which
+he has ever partaken in his life.  How little he guessed the tragedy
+that was overhanging it all!  Of the quartette, Maas was the only one
+in any way silent.  For some reason or another _he_ seemed strangely
+preoccupied.  It was not until some months later that Browne heard from
+Jimmy Foote that that afternoon, during their perambulations of the
+city, he had excused himself, and having discovered the direction of
+the telegraph station, had left them for upwards of three-quarters of
+an hour.
+
+"I am not quite myself to-night," he remarked, in reply to a remark
+from Browne.  "But I have no doubt I shall be all right again
+to-morrow."
+
+Dinner being at an end, they adjourned to the deck, where they settled
+down to coffee and cigars.  The myriad lights of the city ashore
+flashed out, and were reflected like countless diamonds in the still
+waters of the bay.  Browne was irresistibly reminded of another
+harbour-scene.  At another momentous epoch of his life, he had sat on
+this self-same deck, and looked across the water at the lights ashore.
+And what a different man he had been then to the man he was now!  So
+much had happened that it seemed scarcely possible it could be the same.
+
+Their friend of the afternoon proved a most interesting companion.  He
+had spent the greater portion of his life in the Farthest East, and was
+full of anecdotes of strange men he had met, and still stranger things
+he had seen.  They reclined in their deck-chairs and smoked until close
+upon ten o'clock.  Then the new-comer thought it was time for him to
+see about getting ashore.  He accordingly rose from his chair, and was
+commencing the usual preparatory speeches, when a hail from alongside
+reached their ears.  A quartermaster went to the bulwark and inquired
+who was calling, and what he wanted.  A voice answered him in educated
+English:--
+
+"Can you tell me if this is the _Lotus Blossom_?" it said.
+
+"Yes," answered the quartermaster.  "What do you want?"
+
+"I want to see Mr. Browne, if he is aboard," the other answered.
+
+"He is aboard," returned the quartermaster.  "But I don't know whether
+he can see you.  I will inquire."
+
+"Who is he?" asked Browne.  "Tell him to give you his name."
+
+The quartermaster hailed the sampan again.  "He says his name is
+MacAndrew, sir," he replied after a short pause, "and if you will see
+him, he says he will not detain you many minutes."
+
+"Let him come aboard, then," said Browne.  "Just tell him to look
+sharp."  Then, turning to his guests, he continued, "I wonder who the
+fellow is, and what he wants with me at this hour of the night."  In
+his own heart he thought he knew pretty well.
+
+"By the way," remarked his guest, "I should advise you to keep your
+eyes open while you are in this port.  You can have no idea what queer
+sort of people you will have to do with; but when I tell you that it is
+the favourite meeting-place for half the villains of the East, you will
+have some very good notion."
+
+"Thanks for the warning," returned Browne.  "I'll bear it in mind."
+
+He had scarcely finished speaking, before the figure of a man appeared
+at the top of the gangway and came towards them.  He was tall and
+slimly built, was dressed entirely in white, and wore a helmet of the
+same colour upon his head.  From an indescribable something about
+him--it may possibly have been his graceful carriage or the drawl in
+his voice when he spoke--he might very well have passed for a gentleman.
+
+"Mr. Browne?" he began, lifting his hat, and, as he did so, looking
+from one to another of the group.
+
+"My name is Browne," said the young man, stepping forward.  "What can I
+do for you?"
+
+"I should be glad if you would favour me with a few minutes' private
+conversation," answered the other.  "My business is important, but it
+will not detain you very long."
+
+"I can easily do that," replied Browne, and as he said it his guest of
+the evening came forward to bid him good-bye.
+
+"Must you really go?" Browne inquired.
+
+"I am afraid I must," the other responded; "the boat has been alongside
+for some considerable time, and to-morrow the homeward mail goes out,
+and I have my letters to finish.  I must thank you for a very jolly
+evening.  My only regret is that you are not staying longer in
+Hong-kong.  However, I hope we shall see you on the return voyage, when
+you must let us entertain you, in a somewhat better fashion, than we
+have been able to do to-day."
+
+"I shall be delighted," said Browne as he shook hands; but in his own
+heart he was reflecting that, when he did return that way, there would,
+in all probability, be some one with him, who would exercise such
+control over his time and amusements, that bachelor pleasures would be
+out of the question.  The man having taken his departure, Browne begged
+his friends to excuse him for a few moments, and then passed down the
+deck towards the tall individual, whom he could see waiting for him at
+the saloon entrance.  "Now, sir," he began, "if you wish to see me, I
+am at your disposal."
+
+"In that case, let us walk a little farther aft," replied the tall man.
+"Let us find a place where we shall run no risks of being disturbed."
+
+"This way, then," said Browne, and led him along the deck towards the
+taffrail.  He climbed up on to the rail, while his companion seated
+himself on the stern grating.  The light from the after-skylight fell
+upon his face, and Browne saw that it was a countenance cast in a
+singularly handsome mould.  The features were sharp and clear cut, the
+forehead broad, and the mouth and chin showing signs of considerable
+determination.  Taken altogether, it was the face of a man who, having
+embarked upon a certain enterprise, would carry it through, or perish
+in the attempt.  Having lit a cigarette and thrown the match overboard,
+he began to speak.
+
+"It has been brought to my knowledge," he began, "that you are anxious
+to carry out a certain delicate piece of business connected with an
+island, a short distance to the north of Japan.  Is that so?"
+
+"Before you go any farther," continued Browne, "perhaps it would be as
+well for you to say whether or not you come from Johann Schmidt."
+
+"Johann Schmidt!" replied the other, with some little astonishment.
+"Who the devil is he?  I don't know that I ever heard of him."
+
+It was Browne's turn this time to feel surprised.  "I asked because I
+understood that he was going to send some one to me this evening."
+
+"That is very possible," MacAndrew answered; "but let me make it clear
+to you that I know nothing whatsoever of him; in matters like this, Mr.
+Browne, you will find it best to know nothing of anybody."
+
+After this plain speech, Browne thought he had grasped the situation.
+"We will presume, then, that you know nothing of our friend Johann," he
+said.  "Perhaps you have a plan worked out, and can tell me exactly
+what I ought to do to effect the object I have in view."
+
+"It is for that reason that I am here," resumed MacAndrew, with
+business-like celerity, as he flicked the ash from his cigarette.
+"I've got the plan fixed up, and I think I can tell you exactly how the
+matter in question is going to be arranged.  To begin with, I may as
+well inform you that it is going to be an expensive business."
+
+"Expense is no difficulty to me," replied Browne.  "I am, of course,
+quite prepared to pay a large sum, provided it is in reason, and I am
+assured in my own mind, that the work will be carried out in a proper
+manner.  How much do you think it will cost me?"
+
+"Five thousand pounds in good, solid English gold," answered MacAndrew;
+"and what is more, the money must be paid down before I put my hand to
+the job."
+
+[Illustration: "Five thousand pounds in good, solid English gold."]
+
+"But, pardon my alluding to it, what sort of a check am I going to have
+upon you?" Browne next inquired.  "How am I to know that you won't take
+the money and clear out?"
+
+"You've got to risk that," said MacAndrew calmly.  "I see no other way
+out of it.  You must trust me absolutely; if you don't think you can,
+say so, and I'll have nothing whatever to do with it.  I won't make you
+any promises, because that's not my way; but I fancy when the business
+is finished you'll be satisfied."
+
+"I hope so," returned Browne, with a smile.  "But can you give me no
+sort of guarantee at all?"
+
+"I don't see that I can," muttered MacAndrew.  "In cases like this a
+guarantee is a thing which would be a very unmarketable commodity.  In
+other words, we don't keep them in stock."
+
+"It's to be a case of my putting my money in the slot, then, and you do
+the rest?"
+
+"As the Yankees say," said the other, "I reckon that is so.  No, Mr.
+Browne, I'm very much afraid you must rest content with my bare word.
+If you think I'm straight enough to pull you through, try me; if not,
+as I said just now, have nothing more to do with me.  I cannot speak
+fairer than that, I think, and I shall now leave it to you to decide."
+
+"Well, I must see your plan," continued Browne.  "When I have done that
+it is just possible that I may see my way to undertaking the business."
+
+"The plan, then, by all means," replied the other, and, as he did so,
+he thrust his hand into his pocket and drew out an envelope, which he
+handed to Browne.  "Here it is.  I have roughly sketched it all out for
+you.  You had better read it when you are alone in your cabin, and
+after you have got it by heart be sure to burn it carefully.  I wrote
+it down in case I should not be able to see you, and also fearing, even
+if I did have speech with you, I might not be able to say what I wanted
+to, without being overheard.  I will come off at daybreak to-morrow
+morning for your answer.  In the meantime you can think it over.  Will
+that suit you?"
+
+"Admirably," said Browne.  "I will let you know my decision then
+without fail."
+
+"In that case, good-night."
+
+"Good-night.  I shall expect you in the morning."
+
+"In the morning."
+
+A quarter of an hour later Browne was alone in his own cabin.  Having
+locked his door, he took the letter, the other had given him, from his
+pocket and opened it.  A half-sheet of note-paper, upon which scarcely
+five hundred words were written, was all he found.  But these words, he
+knew, meant all the world to him.  He read and re-read them, and, as
+soon as he had got them by heart, lit a match and set fire to the
+paper, which was reduced to ashes.  Then he returned to the deck, where
+Maas and Foote were still seated, and settled himself down for a chat.
+They had not been there many minutes before Maas found, that he had
+smoked the last cigar of a particular brand he affected, and rose to go
+to his cabin in search of another.  He had not been very long absent
+before Browne remembered that he had left the envelope of MacAndrew's
+letter on his dressing-table.  Accordingly he set off in search of it,
+intending to destroy it as he had done its contents.  Having reached
+the companion, he was descending to the saloon below, when a sound
+resembling the careful, though hurried, closing of a door attracted his
+attention.  A moment later he stepped into the saloon, to find Maas
+there, who, for once in his life, appeared to be flurried and put out
+by something.
+
+"I have lost my cigar-case, my dear Browne," he said, as if in
+explanation.  "Is it not annoying?"
+
+Browne felt sure that this was not the truth.  However, he did not say
+so, but when he had condoled with him, entered his own cabin, where a
+surprise was in store for him.  The envelope he had come down to burn,
+and which he distinctly remembered having placed upon the table less
+than half an hour before, was missing.  Some one had taken it!
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII
+
+Taking one thing with another, Browne's night after the incident
+described at the end of the previous chapter was far from being a good
+one.  He could not, try how he would, solve the mystery as to what had
+become of that envelope.  He had hunted the cabin through and through,
+and searched his pockets times without number, but always with the same
+lack of success.  As he lay turning the matter over and over in his
+mind, he remembered that he had heard the soft shutting of a door as he
+descended the companion-ladder, and also that Maas had betrayed
+considerable embarrassment when he entered the saloon.  It was absurd,
+however, to suppose that he could have had any hand in its
+disappearance.  But the fact remained that the envelope was gone.  He
+rang for his valet, and questioned him; but the man declared that, not
+only did he know nothing at all about it, but that he had not entered
+the cabin between dinner-time and when he had prepared his master for
+the night.  It was a singular thing altogether.  At last, being unable
+to remain where he was any longer, he rose and dressed himself and went
+up to the deck.  Day was just breaking.  A cloudless sky was overhead,
+and in the gray light the Peak looked unusually picturesque; the water
+alongside was as smooth as a sheet of glass; the only signs of life
+were a few gulls wheeling with discordant cries around a patch of
+seaweed floating astern.
+
+Browne had been pacing the deck for upwards of a quarter of an hour,
+when he noticed a _sampan_ pull off from the shore towards the yacht.
+From where he stood he could plainly distinguish the tall figure of
+MacAndrew.  He accordingly went to the gangway to receive him.
+Presently one of the women pulling brought her up at the foot of the
+accommodation-ladder, when the passenger ran up the steps, and
+gracefully saluted Browne.
+
+"Good-morning," he said.  "In spite of the earliness of the hour, I
+think I am up to time."
+
+"Yes, you are very punctual," answered Browne.  "Now, shall we get to
+business?"
+
+They accordingly walked together in the direction of the smoking-room.
+
+"You mastered the contents of my note, I suppose?" asked MacAndrew, by
+way of breaking the ice.
+
+"Perfectly," replied Browne; "and I was careful to burn it afterwards."
+
+"Well, now that you have perused it, what do you think of it?" inquired
+the other.  "Do you consider the scheme feasible?"
+
+"Very feasible indeed," Browne replied.  "With a decent amount of luck,
+I think it should stand a very good chance of succeeding.
+
+"I'm very glad to hear that," returned MacAndrew.  "I thought you would
+like it.  Now, when the other preliminaries are settled, I can get to
+work, head down."
+
+"By the other preliminaries I suppose you mean the money?" queried
+Browne.
+
+MacAndrew looked and laughed.
+
+"Yes; the money," he admitted.  "I'm sorry to have to be so mercenary;
+but I'm afraid it can't be helped.  We must grease the machinery with
+gold, otherwise we shan't be able to set it in motion."
+
+"Very well," rejoined Browne; "that difficulty is easily overcome.  I
+have it all ready for you.  If you will accompany me to my cabin we may
+procure it."
+
+They accordingly made their way to the cabin.  Once there, Browne
+opened his safe, and dragged out a plain wooden box, which he placed
+upon the floor.  MacAndrew observed that there was another of similar
+size behind it.  Browne noticed the expression upon his face, and
+smiled.
+
+"You're wondering what made me bring so much," he remarked.  How well
+he remembered going to his bank to procure it!  He seemed to see the
+dignified, portly manager seated on his leather chair, and could recall
+that worthy gentleman's surprise at the curious request Browne made to
+him.
+
+"But how do you propose to get it ashore?" said the latter to
+MacAndrew.  "It's a heavy box; and what about the Customs authorities?"
+
+"Oh, they won't trouble me," answered MacAndrew coolly.  "I shall find
+a way of getting it in without putting them to the inconvenience of
+opening it."
+
+"Do you want to count it?  There may not be five thousand pounds there."
+
+"I shall have to risk that," MacAndrew replied.  "I haven't the time to
+waste in counting it.  I expect it's all right."  So saying, he took up
+the box, and followed Browne to the deck above.
+
+"You quite understand what you've got to do, I suppose?" he asked when
+they once more stood at the gangway.
+
+"Perfectly," said Browne.  "You need not be afraid lest I shall forget.
+When do you think you will leave?"
+
+"This morning, if possible," MacAndrew replied.  "There is no time to
+be lost.  I've got a boat in my eye, and as soon as they can have her
+ready I shall embark.  By the way, if I were in your place I should be
+extremely careful as to what I said or did in Japan.  Excite only one
+little bit of suspicion, and you will never be able to rectify the
+error."
+
+"You need have no fear on that score," rejoined Browne.  "I will take
+every possible precaution to prevent any one suspecting."
+
+"I'm glad to hear it," MacAndrew returned.  "Now, good-bye until we
+meet on the 13th."
+
+"Good-bye," said Browne; "and good luck go with you!"
+
+They shook hands, and then MacAndrew, picking up his precious box, went
+down the ladder, and, when he had taken his place in the well, the
+_sampan_ pushed off for the shore.
+
+"A nice sort of position I shall be in if he should prove to be a
+swindler," reflected the young man, as he watched the retreating boat.
+"But it's too late to think of that now.  I have gone into the
+business, and must carry it through, whatever happens."
+
+When Jimmy Foote put in an appearance on deck that morning he found
+that the city of Victoria had disappeared, and that the yacht was
+making her way through the Ly-ee-Moon Pass out into the open sea once
+more.
+
+It was daybreak on the morning of the Thursday following when they
+obtained their first glimpse of Japan.  Like a pin's head upon the
+horizon was a tiny gray dot, which gradually grew larger and larger
+until the sacred mountain of Fujiyama, clear-cut against the sky-line,
+rose from the waves, as if to welcome them to the Land of the
+Chrysanthemum.  Making their way up Yeddo Bay, they at length cast
+anchor in the harbour of Yokohama.  Beautiful as it must appear to any
+one, to Browne it seemed like the loveliest and happiest corner of
+Fairyland.  He could scarcely believe, after the long time they had
+been separated, that, in less than half an hour, he would really be
+holding Katherine in his arms once more.  During breakfast he could
+with difficulty contain his impatience, and he felt as if the excellent
+appetites which Foote and Maas brought to their meal were personal
+insults to himself.  At length they rose, and he was at liberty to go.
+At the same moment the captain announced that the steam-launch was
+alongside.
+
+"Good luck to you, old fellow," said Jimmy, as Browne put on his hat
+and prepared to be off.  "Though love-making is not much in my line, I
+must say I envy you your happiness.  I only wish I were going to see a
+sweetheart too."
+
+"Madame Bernstein is a widow," remarked Browne, and, ducking his head
+to avoid the stump of a cigar which Jimmy threw at him, he ran down the
+accommodation-ladder, jumped into the launch, and was soon steaming
+ashore.
+
+Reaching the Bund, he inquired in which direction the Club Hotel was
+situated, and, having been informed, made his way in that direction.
+He had reached the steps, and was about to ascend them to enter the
+verandah, when he saw, coming down the passage before him, no less a
+person than Katherine herself.  For weeks past he had been looking
+forward to this interview, wondering where, how, and under what
+circumstances it would take place.  Again and again he had framed his
+first speech to her, and had wondered what she would say to him in
+return.  Now that he was confronted with her, however, he found his
+presence of mind deserting him, and he stood before her, not knowing
+what to say.  On her side she was not so shy.  Directly she realized
+who it was, she ran forward with outstretched hands to greet him.
+
+"Jack, Jack," she cried, her voice trembling with delight, "I had no
+idea that you had arrived.  How long have you been in Japan?"
+
+"We dropped our anchor scarcely an hour ago," he answered.  "I came
+ashore the instant the launch was ready for me."
+
+"How glad I am to see you!" she exclaimed.  "It seems years since we
+said good-bye to each other that miserable day at Marseilles."
+
+"Years!" he cried.  "It seems like an eternity to me."  Then, looking
+up at her, as she stood on the steps above him, he continued:
+"Katherine, you are more beautiful than ever."
+
+A rosy blush spread over her face.  "It is because of my delight at
+seeing you," she whispered.  This pretty speech was followed by a
+little pause, during which he came up the steps and led her along the
+verandah towards two empty chairs at the farther end.  They seated
+themselves, and, after their more immediate affairs had received
+attention, he inquired after Madame Bernstein.
+
+"And now tell me what you have arranged to do?" she said, when she had
+satisfied him that the lady in question was enjoying the best of
+health.  "I received your cablegram from Hong-kong, saying that
+everything was progressing satisfactorily.  You do not know how
+anxiously I have been waiting to see you."
+
+"And only to hear that?" he asked, with a smile.
+
+"Of course not," she answered.  "Still, I think you can easily
+understand my impatience."
+
+"Of course I understand it, dear," he replied; "and it is only right
+you should know all I have arranged."
+
+He thereupon narrated to her his interview with MacAndrew, speaking in
+a low voice, and taking care that no one should overhear him.  When he
+had finished he sat silent for a few moments; then, leaning a little
+nearer her, he continued, "I want to remind you, dear, to be
+particularly careful to say nothing at all on the subject to any one,
+not even to Madame Bernstein.  I was warned myself not to say anything;
+but in your case, of course, it is different."
+
+"You can trust me," she returned; "I shall say nothing.  And so you
+really think it is likely we shall be able to save him?"
+
+"I feel sure it is," said Browne; "though, of course, I, like you, am
+somewhat in the dark.  Every one who is in the business is so chary of
+being discovered, that they take particular care not to divulge
+anything, however small, that may give a hint or clue as to their
+complicity."
+
+For some time they continued to discuss the question; then Katherine,
+thinking that it behoved her to acquaint Madame Bernstein with the fact
+of her lover's arrival, departed into the house.  A few moments later
+she returned, accompanied by the lady in question, who greeted Brown
+with her usual enthusiasm.
+
+"Ah, monsieur," she cried, "you do not know how _triste_ this poor
+child has been without you.  She has counted every day, almost every
+minute, until she should see you."
+
+On hearing this Browne found an opportunity of stroking his
+sweetheart's hand.  Madame Bernstein's remark was just the one of all
+others that would be calculated to cause him the greatest pleasure.
+
+"And now, monsieur, that you are here, what is it you desire we should
+do?" inquired Madame, when they had exhausted the topics to which I
+have just referred.
+
+"We must be content to remain here for at least another fortnight,"
+said Browne.  "The arrangements I have made cannot possibly be
+completed until the end of that time."
+
+"Another fortnight?" exclaimed Madame, in some astonishment, and with
+considerable dismay.  "Do you mean that we are to remain idle all that
+time?"
+
+"I mean that we must enjoy ourselves here for a fortnight," Browne
+replied.  Then, looking out into the street at the queer characters he
+saw there--the picturesque dresses, the _jinrickshas_, and the thousand
+and one signs of Japanese life--he added: "Surely that should not be
+such a very difficult matter?"
+
+"It would not be difficult," said Madame, as if she were debating the
+matter with herself, "if one had all one's time at one's disposal, and
+were only travelling for pleasure; but under the present circumstances
+how different it is!"  She was about to say something further, but she
+checked herself; and, making the excuse that she had left something in
+her room, retired to the house.
+
+"Do not be impatient with her, dear," said Katherine softly, when they
+were alone together.  "Remember that her anxiety is all upon my
+account."
+
+Browne admitted this, and when he had done so the matter was allowed to
+drop.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV
+
+That afternoon they boarded the yacht, and Katherine renewed her
+acquaintance with Jimmy Foote.  Maas was also introduced to her, and
+paid her the usual compliments upon her engagement.  Later she explored
+the yacht from stem to stern, expressing her delight at the
+completeness of every detail.  The pleasure she derived from it,
+however, was as nothing compared with that of her lover, who never for
+one instant left her side.
+
+"Some day," he said, as they stood together upon the bridge, looking at
+the harbour and watching the variety of shipping around them, "this
+vessel will be your own property.  You will have to invite whoever you
+like to stay on board her with you.  Do you think you will ever let me
+come?"  He looked into her face, expecting to find a smile there; but,
+to his astonishment, he discovered that her eyes were filled with
+tears.  "Why, my darling," he cried, "what does this mean?  What is the
+reason of these tears?"
+
+She brushed them hastily away, and tried to appear unconcerned.  "I was
+thinking of all your goodness to me," she replied.  "Oh, Jack!  I don't
+know how I can ever repay it."
+
+"I don't want you to repay it," he retorted.  "You have done enough
+already.  Have you not honoured me, dear, above all living men?  Are
+you not going to be my wife?"
+
+"That is no return," she answered, shaking her head.  "If you give a
+starving man food, do you think it kind of him to eat it?  I had
+nothing, and you are giving me all.  Does the fact that I take it help
+me to repay it?"
+
+What he said in reply to this does not come within the scope of a
+chronicler's duty to record.  Let it suffice that, when he went below
+with her, he might very well have been described as the happiest man in
+Japan.  The history of the following fortnight could be easily written
+in two words, "love and pleasure."  From morning till night they were
+together, seeing everything, exploring the temples, the country
+tea-houses, spending small fortunes with the curio dealers, and
+learning to love each other more and more every day.  In fact, there
+was only one cloud in their sky, and that was the question of what was
+to be done with Maas.  Up to that time, that gentleman had shown no
+sort of inclination to separate himself from the party.  Browne could
+not very well ask him to leave, and yet he had the best of reasons for
+not wanting him to go on with them.  What was to be done?  He worried
+himself almost into a fever to know what he should do.  Then, almost at
+the last minute, Maas settled the question for them, not in an
+altogether unexpected fashion.  Finding his host alone in the verandah
+of the hotel one evening, he asked outright, without pretence of
+beating about the bush, whether he might, as an old friend, continue to
+burden them with his society.  Browne found himself placed in a most
+awkward position.  Though he did not want him, he had known Maas for so
+many years, and they had always been on such a footing of intimacy
+together, that he felt he could do nothing but consent.  He accordingly
+did so, though with scarcely the same amount of grace, that usually
+characterized his hospitality.  Jimmy Foote, however, expressed himself
+more freely.
+
+"Look here, Jack, old man," said the latter to Browne, when he was
+informed what had taken place, "you know as well as I do that Maas and
+I were never the greatest of friends.  I tell you this because I don't
+want you to think I am saying, behind his back, what I would not say to
+his face.  At the same time, I _do_ think that you ought to have told
+him straight out that he couldn't come."
+
+"How on earth could I do that?" asked Browne.  "Besides being
+exceedingly rude, it would have given the whole show away.  What
+possible sort of excuse could I have made for not wanting him on board?"
+
+"I don't know what sort of excuse you could have made," replied Jimmy;
+"all I know is that you ought to have made it.  You have other people
+besides yourself to consider in the matter."
+
+The deed was done, however, and could not be undone.  For this reason,
+when the yacht said good-bye to the lovely harbour of Yokohama, and
+Treaty Point was astern, Maas stood upon the deck watching it fade away
+and drop below the sea-line.
+
+"And now that we are on our way again, my dear Browne," said Maas when
+the others had gone below, "what is our destination?"
+
+"Of our ultimate destination I am not yet quite certain," answered
+Browne, who was anxious to gain time to think before he committed
+himself.  "But at first we are going north to have a look at the Sea of
+Okhotsk.  My _fiancee's_ father has been residing on an island there
+for many years, and it is our intention to pick him up and to bring him
+home, in order that he may be present at our wedding."
+
+"In other words," put in Maas, "you are conniving at the escape of a
+Russian convict from Saghalien.  Is that so?"
+
+Browne uttered a cry that was partly one of astonishment, and partly
+one of terror.  He could scarcely believe he had heard aright.  This
+was the second time, since they had been on board the yacht, that Maas
+had played him this sort of trick, and he did not want to be taken in
+again.  Was the other really aware of what they were going to do, or
+was this, as on the previous occasion, a shot fired at random?
+
+"My dear fellow," he began, as unconcernedly as his excitement would
+permit, "what on earth do you mean?  Help a Russian convict to escape?
+Surely you must have taken leave of your senses."
+
+"Look here," said Maas with unusual emphasis, "what is the use of your
+attempting to keep a secret?  Nature never intended you for a
+conspirator.  You may not have guessed it, but I have seen for some
+considerable time past, long before we left Europe in fact, that there
+was trouble in the wind.  Otherwise, why do you think I should have
+accompanied you to the East, so many thousand weary miles from Paris
+and civilization?"
+
+"Because your health was bad," Browne replied.  "At least, that is what
+you said yourself.  Was that not so?"
+
+"My health is as good as your own," the other answered.  "No, Browne, I
+invented that excuse because I wanted to come with you; because I had
+some sort of notion of what you were about to do."
+
+"But, even supposing it should be so, how could you have known it?"
+
+"I will tell you.  Do you remember the night at the Amphitryon Club
+when you told me that you were thinking of taking a trip to the Farther
+East?"
+
+Browne admitted that he did remember it.
+
+"Well, I happened to know who the lady was to whom you were paying such
+marked attention.  I happened to mention her name one day to an old
+friend, who immediately replied, 'I know the young lady in question;
+she is the daughter of the famous Polowski, the Nihilist, who was sent
+to Siberia, and who is now confined upon the island of Saghalien.'
+Then you spoke of your yachting voyage to the Farther East, and I put
+two and two together, and resolved that, happen what might, I would see
+you through the business.  You see how candid I am with you."
+
+"And do you mean to say that you knew all the time what I was going to
+do?"
+
+"All the time," said Maas.  "Did not I give you a hint at breakfast on
+the morning following our joining the yacht at Southampton?  I am your
+friend, Browne; and, as your friend, I want to be allowed to stand by
+you in your hour of danger.  For it is dangerous work you are engaged
+upon, as I suppose you know."
+
+"And do you really mean that you are going to help me to get this man
+out of his place of captivity?" inquired Browne, putting on one side
+the other's reference to their friendship.
+
+"If you are going to do it, I'm certainly going to stand by you," Maas
+replied.  "That's why I am here."
+
+"And all the time I was wishing you at Hanover, because I thought, that
+if you knew, you would disapprove."
+
+"It only goes to show how little we know our true friends," continued
+Maas.  "If you feel that you can trust me now, do not let us have any
+more half-measures.  Let me be with you hand and glove, or put me
+ashore somewhere, and get me out of the way.  I don't want to push
+myself in where I am not wanted."
+
+Browne was genuinely touched.  "My dear old fellow," he answered,
+putting his hand on Maas's shoulder, "I must confess I feel as if I had
+treated you very badly.  If you are really disposed to help me, I shall
+be only too glad of your assistance.  It's a big job, and a hideously
+risky one.  I don't know what on earth I shall do if we fail."
+
+Then, in the innocence of his heart, Browne told him as much of their
+arrangements as he had revealed to Jimmy Foote.  Maas expressed his
+sympathy, and forthwith propounded several schemes for getting the
+unhappy man to a place of safety, when they had got him on board the
+yacht.  He went so far as to offer to land on the island, and to make
+his way into the interior in the hope of being able to render some
+assistance should it be necessary.
+
+"Well, you know your own business best," said Jimmy Foote to Browne,
+when the latter had informed him of the discovery he had made.  "But I
+can't say that I altogether like the arrangement.  If he had guessed
+our secret, why didn't he let us know that he knew it?  It seems to me
+that there is a little bit of underhand work somewhere."
+
+"I think you are misjudging him," returned Browne; "upon my word I do.
+Of one thing there can be no sort of doubt, and that is, that whatever
+he may have known, he is most anxious to help."
+
+"Is he?" exclaimed Jimmy, in a tone that showed that he was still more
+than a little sceptical concerning Maas's good intentions.  "I don't
+set up to be much of a prophet; but I am willing to go so far as to
+offer to lay a hundred pounds to a halfpenny, that we shall find he has
+been hoodwinking us somewhere before we've done."
+
+Jimmy spoke with such unusual gravity that Browne looked at him in
+surprise.  "Oh, you may look," answered Jimmy; "but you won't stare
+away what I think.  Browne, old man," he continued, "you and I were at
+school together; we have been pals for a very long time; and I'm not
+going to see you, just when you're booked to settle down happily with
+your wife, and become a respectable member of society, upset and spoil
+everything by a foolish action."
+
+"Thank you, Jimmy," said Browne.  "I know you mean well by me; but, at
+the same time, you must not let your liking for me make you unjust to
+other people.  Maas has proved himself my friend, and I should be mean
+indeed if I ventured to doubt him."
+
+"All right," replied Jimmy; "go your way.  I'll say no more."
+
+That evening Browne realized his long-felt wish.  He and Katherine
+promenaded the deck together, as the yacht sped on its way, across the
+seas, towards their goal, and talked for hours together of their hopes
+and aspirations.  When at last she and Madame Bernstein bade the
+gentlemen good-night, the latter adjourned to the smoking-room to
+discuss their plan of action.  Maas had been evidently thinking the
+matter over, for he was prepared with one or two new suggestions, which
+struck the company as being eminently satisfactory.  So sincere was he,
+and so anxious to be of service, that when at last they bade each other
+good-night, and he had retired below, Jimmy turned to Browne, who was
+standing beside the bulwark, and said:--
+
+"Jack, old boy, I believe, after all, that I've done that man an
+injustice.  I _do_ think now that he is really anxious to do what he
+can."
+
+"I'm glad indeed to hear you say so," Browne rejoined; "for I'm sure he
+is most anxious to be of use.  Forgive me if I was a bit sharp to you
+this afternoon.  I cannot tell you how grateful I feel to you for all
+your kindness."
+
+"Fiddlesticks!" muttered Jimmy.  "There's no talk of kindness between
+us."
+
+Fourteen days after leaving Yokohama, and a little before sunset, those
+on board the yacht caught their first glimpse of the Russian island, of
+which they had come in search.  At first it was scarcely discernible;
+then, little by little, it grew larger, until its steep and abrupt
+rocks could be distinctly seen, with a far-away line of distant
+mountain-peaks, stretching to the northward.
+
+Katharine, Madame Bernstein, and the three young men were upon the
+bridge at the time.  Browne, who held his sweetheart's hand, could feel
+her trembling.  Madame Bernstein appeared by far the most excited of
+the group.  Advanced though the time of year was, the air was bitterly
+cold.  But, for once in a way, the Yezo Strait, usually so foggy, was
+now devoid even of a vestige of vapour.  The season was a late one, and
+for some hours they had been passing packs of drift ice; but as they
+closed up on the land it could be seen lying in thick stacks along the
+shore.
+
+"That is Cape Siretoko," said Browne.  "It is the most southerly point
+of Saghalien."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV
+
+Three weeks had elapsed since that memorable afternoon, when the party
+on board the yacht, had obtained their first glimpse of the island of
+Saghalien.  In pursuance of the plan MacAndrew had revealed to him in
+Hong-kong, Browne had left his companions upon the vessel, and for
+upwards of forty-eight hours had domiciled himself in a small log-hut
+on the northern side of the Bay of Kroptskoi, awaiting news of the man
+whom they had come so far, and undertaken so much, to rescue.  It was
+the night of full moon, and the scene which Browne had before him, as
+he stood, wrapped up in his furs, outside the door of the hut, was as
+miserable as a man could well desire to become acquainted with.  The
+settlement, as I have said, was located at the northern end of a small
+bay, and had once consisted of upwards of six huts, built upon a slight
+eminence, having at its foot a river still ice-bound.  At the back rose
+a still more precipitous hill, densely clothed with _taiga_, or forest.
+So impenetrable, indeed, was it, that even the wolf and bear found a
+difficulty in making their way through it.  To the right, and almost
+unobservable from the huts, was a track that once connected with the
+coal-mines of Dui, but was now overgrown and scarcely to be
+distinguished from the virgin forest on either side.
+
+On this particular evening, Browne was the reverse of easy in his mind.
+He had left the yacht buoyed up by the knowledge that in so doing he
+was best serving the woman he loved.  It had been arranged with
+MacAndrew that they should meet at this hut, not later than the
+thirteenth day of that particular month.  This, however, was the
+evening of the fifteenth, and still neither MacAndrew, nor the man they
+were endeavouring to rescue, had put in an appearance.  Apart from
+every consideration of danger, it was far from being the sort of place
+a man would choose in which to spend his leisure.  The hut was draughty
+and bitterly cold; the scenery was entirely uninviting; he had no one
+to speak to; he had to do everything--even his cooking--for himself;
+while, away out in the bay, the ice chinked and rattled together
+continually, as if to remind him of his miserable position.  It was
+nearly nine o'clock, and he could very well guess what they were doing
+on board the yacht.  His guests would be in the drawing-room.
+Katharine would be playing one of those soft German folk-songs, of
+which she was so fond, and most probably thinking of himself; Madame
+Bernstein would be knitting in an easy-chair beside the stove; while
+the gentlemen would be listening to the music, and wondering how long
+it would be, before they would be at liberty to retire to the
+smoking-room and their cigars.  He could picture the soft electric
+light falling on a certain plain gold ring on Katherine's finger, and
+upon the stones of a bracelet upon her slender wrist.  Taken
+altogether, he did not remember to have felt so home-sick in his life
+before.  As if to add to his sensation of melancholy, while he was
+pursuing this miserable train of thought, a wolf commenced to howl
+dismally in the forest behind him.  This was the climax.  Unable to
+bear any more, he retired into the hut, bolted the door, and, wrapping
+himself up in his blanket, laid himself down upon his bed and was soon
+asleep.  When he looked out upon the world next morning he found
+himself confronted with a dense fog, which obscured everything--the
+forest behind him, the ice-girdled shore in front, and, indeed, all his
+world.  It is, of course, possible that, in this world of ours, there
+may be places with more unpleasant climates than Saghalien, but it
+would be difficult to find them.  On the west coast the foggy and rainy
+days average two hundred and fifty-three out of every three hundred and
+sixty-five, and even then the inhabitants are afraid to complain, lest
+it might be worse with them.  As Browne reflected upon these things, he
+understood something of what the life of Katherine's father in this
+dreadful place must be.  Seeing that it was hopeless to venture out,
+and believing that it was impossible the men he expected could put in
+an appearance on such a day, Browne retired into his hut, and, having
+closed the door carefully, stirred up the fire, and, seating himself
+before it, lit a cigar.  He had another day's weary waiting before him.
+Fortunately, when his boat had brought him ashore from the yacht, it
+had also brought him an ample supply of provisions and such other
+things, as would help to make life bearable in such a place.  On the
+rough table in the centre of the hut were arranged a collection of
+books of travel and adventure, and, since he did not pretend to be a
+blue-stocking, a good half-dozen novels, yellow-back and otherwise.
+One of the latter, a story by Miss Braddon, he remembered purchasing at
+the Dover bookstall the day he had returned from Paris with Maas.  As
+he recalled the circumstances he could see again the eager, bustling
+crowd upon the platform, the porters in their dingy uniforms, the
+bright lamps around the bookstalls, and the cheery clerk who had handed
+the novel to him, with a remark about the weather.  How different was
+his position now!  He opened the book and tried to interest himself in
+it; the effort, however, was in vain.  Do what he would, he could not
+rivet his attention upon the story.  The perilous adventures of the
+hero in the forests of Upper Canada only served to remind him of his
+own unenviable position.  Little by little the sentences ran into each
+other; at length his cigar dropped from his fingers, his head fell
+forward, and he was fast asleep.  How long he slept it would be
+impossible to tell, but when he rose again and went to the door the fog
+had drawn off, darkness had fallen, and the brilliant northern stars
+were shining in the firmament above.  Once more his hopes had proved
+futile.  Another day had passed, and still he had received no news of
+the fugitives.  How long was this to go on?  Feeling hungry, he shut
+the door and set about preparing his evening meal.  Taking a large
+piece of drift-wood from the heap in the corner, he placed it upon the
+fire, and soon the flame went roaring merrily up the chimney.  He had
+made his tea, and was in the act of opening one of his cans of
+preserved meat, when a sound reached him from outside, and caused him
+to stop suddenly and glance round, as if in expectation of hearing
+something further.  It certainly sounded like the step of some one who
+was carefully approaching the hut.  Who could it be?  The nearest
+civilization was the township of Dui, which was upwards of a hundred
+versts away.  He had been warned, also, that the forest was in many
+places tenanted by outlaws, whose presence would be far from desirable
+at any time.  Before he went to the door to draw the bolts he was
+careful to feel in the pocket of his coat for his revolver.  He
+examined it and satisfied himself that it was fully loaded and ready
+for use.  Then, turning up the lamp, he approached the door, and called
+out in English, "Who is there?"
+
+"The powers be thanked, it's you!" said a voice, which he plainly
+recognised as that of MacAndrew.  "Open the door and let us in, for
+we're more dead than alive."
+
+"Thank God you're come at last," exclaimed Browne, as he did as the
+other requested.  A curious picture was revealed by the light which
+issued from the open door.
+
+Standing before the hut was a tall man with a long gray beard, clad in
+a heavy cloak of the same colour, who held in his arms what looked more
+like a bundle of furs than a human being.
+
+"Who are you?" cried Browne in astonishment, for this tall, gaunt
+individual of seventy was certainly not MacAndrew; "and what have you
+got there?"
+
+"I'll tell you everything in good time," replied the other in English.
+"In the meantime just catch hold of this chap's feet, and help me to
+carry him into the hut.  I am not quite certain that he isn't done for."
+
+Without asking any further questions, though he was dying to do so,
+Browne complied with the other's request, and between them the two men
+carried the bundle into the hut and placed it in a chair before the
+fire.
+
+"Brandy!" said MacAndrew laconically; and Browne immediately produced a
+flask from a bag and unscrewed the lid.  He poured a quantity of the
+spirit into a cup, and then placed it to the sick man's lips, while
+MacAndrew chafed his hands and removed his heavy boots.
+
+"I have been expecting you for the last two days," Browne began, as
+soon as they had time to speak to each other.
+
+"It couldn't be managed," returned MacAndrew.  "As it was I got away
+sooner than I expected.  The pursuit was so hot that we were compelled
+to take to the woods, where, as ill-luck had it, we lost ourselves, and
+have been wandering about for the last four days.  It was quite by
+chance that we reached here at all.  I believe another day would have
+seen the end of this fellow.  He knocked up completely this morning."
+
+As he spoke the individual in the chair opened his eyes and gazed about
+him in a dazed fashion.  Browne looked at him more carefully than he
+had yet done, and found a short man with a small bullet head, half of
+which was shaven, the remainder being covered with a ferocious crop of
+red hair.  Though he would probably not have confessed so much, he was
+conscious of a feeling of intense disappointment, for, from what he had
+heard from Katherine and Madame Bernstein, he had expected to see a
+tall, aristocratic individual, who had suffered for a cause he believed
+to be just, and whom sorrow had marked for her own.  This man was
+altogether different.
+
+"Monsieur Petrovitch," said Browne in a tone, that might very well have
+suggested that he was anxious to assure himself as to the other's
+identity; "or rather, I should say, Monsieur----"
+
+"Petrovitch will do very well for the present," the other replied in a
+querulous voice, as if he were tired, and did not want to be bothered
+by such minor details.  "You are Monsieur Browne, I presume--my
+Katherine's affianced husband?"
+
+"Yes, that is my name," the young man answered.  "I cannot tell you how
+thankful your daughter will be to have you back with her once more."
+
+To this the man offered no reply, but sat staring into the fire with
+half-closed eyes.  His behaviour struck Browne unpleasantly.  Could the
+man have lost his former affection for his daughter?  If not, why was
+it he refrained from making further inquiries about the girl, who had
+risked so much to save him?  MacAndrew, however, stepped into the
+breach.
+
+"You will have to be a bit easy with him at first, Mr. Browne," he
+said.  "They are always like this when they first get free.  You must
+remember that, for a good many years, he has never been asked to act or
+think for himself.  I have seen many like this before.  Once get him on
+board your yacht, away from every thought and association of his old
+life, and you will find that he will soon pick up again."
+
+"And Madame Bernstein?" asked the man in the chair, as if he were
+continuing a train of thoughts suggested by their previous conversation.
+
+"She is very well," said Browne, "and is also anxiously awaiting your
+coming.  She has taken the greatest possible interest in your escape."
+
+"Ah!" said the man, and then fell to musing again.
+
+By this time Browne had placed before him a large bowl of smoking
+beef-extract, which had been prepared by a merchant in England, who had
+little dreamt the use it would be put to in the Farthest East.  As soon
+as the old man had satisfied his hunger, Browne led him to his own
+sleeping-place, and placed him upon it, covering him with the fur rugs.
+Then he returned to the table, and, seating himself at it, questioned
+MacAndrew, while the other stowed away an enormous meal, as if to make
+up for the privations he had lately endured.  From him Browne learnt
+all the incidents of their journey.  Disguised as a Russian fur
+merchant, MacAndrew had made his way to the town of Dui, where he had
+made inquiries, and located the man he wanted.  At first it was
+difficult to get communication with him; but once that was done the
+rest was comparatively easy.  They reached the forest and made for the
+coast, with the result that has already been narrated.
+
+"Between ourselves," said MacAndrew, "our friend yonder is scarcely the
+sort of man to travel with.  He hasn't the heart of a louse, and is as
+suspicious as a rat."
+
+Browne said nothing; he was thinking of Katherine, and what her
+feelings would be, when he should present this man to her as the father
+she had so long revered.  He began to think that it would have been
+better, not only for the man himself, but for all parties concerned, if
+they had left him to meet his fate on the island.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI
+
+"Now, what about the yacht?" inquired MacAndrew.  "We mustn't be caught
+here.  It is impossible to say how soon the troops may be after us.
+There is a guard-house in Aniwa Bay; and they are certain to know
+before long, that a man has escaped from Dui and is heading this way."
+
+"The yacht will be within signalling distance of this hut to-night at
+midnight," said Browne.  "And you can see for yourself there are some
+rockets in that corner which I can fire.  Then, within half an hour,
+she will send a boat ashore."
+
+"Good," he remarked in a tone of approval.  "Very good.  You are the
+sort of man I like to do business with.  For my part, I shall not be
+sorry to get out of this."  He pointed to his disguise.
+
+"I dare say you will not," answered Browne.  "You have succeeded
+wonderfully well.  I cannot tell you how much obliged I am to you."
+
+"I am equally obliged to you," said MacAndrew, "so we can cry quits.  I
+flatter myself that, all things considered, it has been a pretty good
+escape; but I could tell you of one or two which have been better.  We
+mustn't shout too soon, however; we are not out of the wood yet."  As
+he spoke he mixed himself another glass of grog and lit a cigar, the
+smoke of which he puffed through his nose with the enjoyment of a man,
+to whom such a luxury had been forbidden for some time past.  Browne
+followed his example, and the two men smoked in silence, while the
+ex-Nihilist snored on the bed in the corner.  Hour after hour they
+talked on.  As Browne had suspected, MacAndrew proved the most
+interesting companion in the world.  His life had been one long series
+of hairbreadth escapes; he had fought both for civilization and against
+it; had sold his services to native sultans and rajahs, had penetrated
+into the most dangerous places, and had met the most extraordinary
+people.  Strange to relate, with it all, he had still preserved the air
+of a gentleman.
+
+"Oxford man?" asked Browne after a moment's pause, without taking his
+eyes off the fire, and still speaking in the same commonplace tone.
+The other mentioned the name of a certain well-known college.  Both
+felt that there was no more to be said, and they accordingly relapsed
+into silence.
+
+"Rum thing this world of ours, isn't it?" said MacAndrew after a little
+while.  "Look at me.  I started with everything in my favour; eldest
+son, fine old place in the country, best of society; for all I know I
+might have ended my days as a J.P. and member for my county.  The
+Fates, however, were against it; in consequence I am sitting here
+to-night, disguised as a Russian fur-trader.  It's a bit of a
+transformation scene--isn't it?  I wonder what my family would say if
+they could see me?"
+
+"I wonder what some of my friends would say if they could see me?"
+continued Browne.  "If I'd been told a year ago that I should be doing
+this sort of thing, I should never have believed it.  We never know
+what's in store for us, do we?  By the way, what's the time?"  He
+consulted his watch, and discovered that it only wanted ten minutes of
+twelve o'clock.  "In ten minutes we'll fire the first rocket," he said.
+"It's to be hoped it's clear weather.  Let us pray that there's not
+another vessel outside, who, seeing our signal, may put in and send a
+boat to discover what is the matter."
+
+"You're quite sure that the yacht will be there, I suppose?" asked
+MacAndrew.
+
+"As sure as I can be," replied Browne.  "I told my captain to hang
+about at night, and to look round this coast at midnight, so that if we
+did signal he might be ready.  Of course, there's no saying what may
+have turned up; but we must hope for the best.  How is our friend
+yonder?"
+
+MacAndrew crossed the hut and bent over the man lying on the bed.  He
+was still sleeping.
+
+"Poor beggar! he is quite played out," said the other.  "It will be a
+long time before he will forget his tramp with me.  I had to carry him
+the last three miles on my back, like a kiddy; and in that thick scrub
+it's no joke, I can assure you."
+
+Though Browne was quite able to agree with him, he did not give the
+matter much consideration.  He was thinking of Katherine and of the
+meeting, that was shortly to take place between the father and
+daughter.  At last, after what seemed an infinity of waiting, the hands
+of his watch stood at midnight.  Having acquainted MacAndrew with his
+intention, he took up a rocket, opened the door of the hut, and went
+outside.  To his intense relief, the fog had drawn off, and the stars
+were shining brightly.  Not a sound was to be heard, save the sighing
+of the wind in the trees behind the hut, and the clinking of the ice on
+the northern side of the bay.  To the southward it was all clear water,
+and it was there that Mason had arranged to send the boat.
+
+"To be or not to be?" murmured Browne, as he struck the match and
+applied it to the rocket.  There was an instant's pause, and then a
+tongue of fire flashed into the darkness, soaring up and up, until it
+broke in a myriad of coloured lights overhead.  It seemed to Browne,
+while he waited and watched, as if the beating of his heart might be
+heard at least a mile away.  Then suddenly, from far out at sea, came a
+flash of light, which told him that his signal had been observed.
+
+"They see us," he cried in a tone of delight.  "They are getting the
+boat under way by this time, I expect, and in less than an hour we
+shall be on board.  We had better get ready as soon as possible."  With
+that they turned into the hut once more, and MacAndrew shook the
+sleeping man upon the bed.
+
+"Wake up, little father," he cried in Russian.  "It's time for you to
+say good-bye to Saghalien."
+
+The instantaneous obedience, which had so long been a habit with him,
+brought the man to his feet immediately.  Browne, however, could see
+that he scarcely realized what was required of him.
+
+"Come," said Browne, "it is time for us to be off.  Your daughter is
+anxiously awaiting you."
+
+"Ah, to be sure--to be sure," replied the other in French.  "My dear
+daughter.  Forgive me if I do not seem to realize that I shall see her
+so soon.  Is it possible she will know me after all these long years?
+When last I saw her she was but a little child."
+
+"Her heart, however, is the same," answered Browne.  "I can assure you
+that she has treasured your memory as few daughters would have done.
+Indeed, it is to her, more than any one else, that you owe your escape.
+But for her endeavours you would be in Dui now.  But let us be off; we
+are wasting our time talking here when we should be making ourselves
+scarce."
+
+"But what about these things?" asked MacAndrew, pointing to the books
+on the table, the crockery on the shelf, and the hundred and one other
+things in the hut.  "What do you intend doing with them?"
+
+"I scarcely know," replied Browne.  "The better plan would be for us to
+take with us what we can carry and leave the rest.  If they are of no
+other use, they will at least give whoever finds them something to
+think about."
+
+"I wish him joy of his guesses," rejoined MacAndrew, as he led the old
+man out of the hut.
+
+Browne remained behind to put out the lamp.  As he did so a smile
+passed over his face.  How foolish it seemed to be taking precautions,
+when he would, in all human probability, never see the place again!
+The fire upon the hearth was burning merrily.  Little by little it
+would grow smaller, the flames would die down, a mass of glowing embers
+would follow, then it would gradually grow black, and connection with
+the place would be done with for ever and a day.  Outside it was
+brilliant starlight, and for this reason they were able easily to pick
+their way down the path towards the place where Captain Mason had
+promised to have the boat.
+
+So weak was the old man, however, that it took something like half an
+hour to overcome even the short distance they had to go.  He could
+scarcely have done as much had not MacAndrew and Browne lent him their
+support.  At last they reached the water's edge, where, to their joy,
+they found the boat awaiting them.
+
+"Is that you, Phillips?" inquired Browne.
+
+"Yes, sir, it's me," the third mate replied.  "Captain Mason sent us
+away directly your signal was sighted."
+
+"That's right," said Browne.  "Now, just keep your boat steady while we
+help this gentleman aboard."
+
+The boat's crew did their best to keep her in position while MacAndrew
+and Browne lifted Monsieur Petrovitch in.  It was a difficult business,
+but at last they succeeded; then, pushing her off, they started for the
+yacht.  For some time not a word was spoken.  MacAndrew had evidently
+his own thoughts to occupy him; Katherine's father sat in a huddled-up
+condition; while Browne was filled with a nervousness that he could
+neither explain nor dispel.
+
+At last they reached the yacht and drew up at the foot of the
+accommodation-ladder.  Looking up the side, Browne could see Captain
+Mason, Jimmy Foote, and Maas leaning over watching them.  It had been
+previously arranged that the meeting between the father and daughter
+should take place in the deckhouse, not on the deck itself.
+
+"Is he strong enough to walk up?" the captain inquired of Browne.  "If
+not, shall I send a couple of hands down to carry him?"
+
+"I think we can manage it between us," said Browne; and accordingly he
+and MacAndrew, assisted by the mate, lifted the sick man on to the
+ladder, and half-dragged, half-carried him up to the deck above.
+
+"Where is Miss Petrovitch?" Browne asked, when they reached the deck.
+
+"In the house, sir," the captain replied.  "We thought she would prefer
+to be alone there.  She knows that you have arrived."
+
+"In that case I will take you to her at once," said Browne to the old
+man, and slipping his arm through his, he led him towards the place in
+question.  When he pushed open the door he assisted the old man to
+enter; and, having done so, found himself face to face with Katherine.
+She was deadly pale, and was trembling violently.  Madame Bernstein was
+also present; and, if such a thing were possible, the latter was
+perhaps the more agitated of the two.  Indeed, Browne found his own
+voice failing him as he said, "Katherine, I have brought you your
+father!"
+
+There was a moment's hesitation, though what occasioned it is difficult
+to say.  Then Katherine advanced and kissed her father.  She had often
+pictured this moment, and thought of the joy she would feel in
+welcoming him back to freedom.  Now, however, that the moment had
+arrived it seemed as if she could say nothing.
+
+"Father," she faltered at last, "thank Heaven you have escaped."  She
+looked at him, and, as she did so, Browne noticed the change that came
+over her face.  It was as if she had found herself confronted with some
+one she did not expect to see.  And yet she tried hard not to let the
+others see her surprise.
+
+"Katherine, my daughter," replied the old man, "do you remember me?"
+
+"Should I be likely to forget?" answered Katherine.  "Though I was such
+a little child when you went away, I can remember that terrible night
+perfectly."
+
+Here Madame Bernstein interposed, with tears streaming down her face.
+"Stefan," she sobbed, "Heaven be thanked you have at last come back to
+us!"
+
+Thinking it would be as well if he left them to themselves for a short
+time, Browne stepped out of the house on to the deck, and closed the
+door behind him.  He found MacAndrew, Maas, and Jimmy Foote standing
+together near the saloon companion-ladder.
+
+"Welcome back again," began Jimmy, advancing with outstretched hand.
+"By Jove! old man, you must have had a hard time of it.  But you have
+succeeded in your undertaking, and that's the great thing, after
+all--is it not?"
+
+"Yes, I have succeeded," returned Browne, in the tone of a man who is
+not quite certain whether he has or not.  "Now, the question for our
+consideration is, what we ought to do.  What do you say, MacAndrew; and
+you, Maas?"
+
+"If I were in your place I would get away as soon as possible,"
+answered the former.
+
+"I agree with you," put in Jimmy.  "By Jove!  I do."
+
+"I cannot say that I do," added Maas.  "In the first place, you must
+remember where you are.  This is an extremely dangerous coast about
+here, and if anything goes wrong and your boat runs ashore, the man you
+have come to rescue will be no better off than he was before.  If I
+were in your place, Browne--and I'm sure Captain Mason will agree with
+me--I should postpone your departure until to-morrow morning.  There's
+nothing like having plenty of daylight in matters of this sort."
+
+Browne scarcely knew what to say.  He was naturally very anxious to get
+away; at the same time he was quite aware of the dangers of the seas in
+which his boat was, just at that time.  He accordingly went forward and
+argued it out with Mason, whom he found of very much the same opinion
+as Maas.
+
+"We have not much to risk, sir, by waiting," said that gentleman; "and,
+as far as I can see, we've everything to gain.  A very strong current
+sets from the northward; and, as you can see for yourself, a fog is
+coming up.  I don't mind telling you, sir, I've no fancy for
+manoeuvring about here in the dark."
+
+"Then you think it would be wiser for us to remain at anchor until
+daylight?" asked Browne.
+
+"If you ask me to be candid with you," the skipper replied, "I must say
+I do, sir."
+
+"Very good, then," answered Browne.  "In that case we will remain."
+Without further discussion, he made his way to the smoking-room, where
+he announced to those assembled there, that the yacht would not get
+under way till morning.
+
+"'Pon my word, Browne, I think you're right," continued Maas.  "You
+don't want to run any risks, do you?  You'll be just as safe here, if
+not safer, than you would be outside."
+
+"I'm not so sure of that," retorted Jimmy; and then, for some reason
+not specified, a sudden silence fell upon the party.
+
+A quarter of an hour later Browne made his way to the deck-house again.
+He found Katherine and her father alone together, the man fast asleep
+and the girl kneeling by his side.
+
+"Dearest," said Katherine softly, as she rose and crossed the cabin to
+meet her lover, "I have not thanked you yet for all you have done
+for--for him and for me."
+
+She paused towards the end of her speech, as if she scarcely knew how
+to express herself; and Browne, for whom her every action had some
+significance, was quick to notice it.
+
+"What is the matter, dear?" he asked.  "Why do you look so sadly at me?"
+
+She was about to answer, but she changed her mind.
+
+"Sad?" she murmured, as if surprised.  "Why should I be sad?  I should
+surely be the happiest girl in the world to-night."
+
+"But you are not," he answered.  "I can see you're unhappy.  Come,
+dear, tell me everything.  You are grieved, I suppose, at finding your
+father so changed?  Is not that so?"
+
+"Partly," she answered in a whisper; and then, for some reason of her
+own, she added quietly, "but Madame recognised him at once, though she
+had not seen him for so many years.  My poor father, how much he has
+suffered!"
+
+Browne condoled with her, and ultimately succeeded in inducing her to
+retire to her cabin, assuring her that MacAndrew and himself would in
+turns watch by her father's side until morning.
+
+"How good you are!" she said, and kissed him softly.  Then, with
+another glance at the huddled-up figure in the easy-chair, but without
+kissing him, as Browne had quite expected she would do, she turned and
+left the cabin.
+
+It was just two o'clock, and a bitterly cold morning.  Though Browne
+had declared that MacAndrew would share his vigil with him, he was not
+telling the truth, knowing that the other must be worn out after his
+travels of the last few days.  For this reason he persuaded Jimmy to
+take him below, and to get him to bed at once.  Then he himself
+returned to the deck-house, and set to work to make Katherine's father
+as comfortable as possible for the night.
+
+Just after daylight Browne was awakened by a knocking at the door.  He
+crossed and opened it.  It proved to be the captain.  He was plainly
+under the influence of intense excitement.
+
+"I don't know how to tell you, sir," he said.  "I assure you I would
+not have had it happened for worlds.  I have never been so upset in my
+life by anything."
+
+"But what has happened?" inquired Browne, with a sudden sinking at his
+heart.  "Something has gone wrong in the engine-room," replied the
+captain, "and until it has been repaired it will be impossible for us
+to get under way."
+
+At that instant the second officer appeared, and touched the captain on
+the shoulder, saying something in an undertone.
+
+"What is it?" asked Browne.  "What else is wrong?"
+
+"He reports that a man-o'-war can be just descried upon the horizon,
+and he thinks she is a Russian!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII
+
+The horror which greeted the announcement that a man-o'-war had made
+its appearance upon the horizon may be better imagined than described.
+
+"By heaven, we have been trapped!" cried MacAndrew, as he ran out of
+the smoking-room in Browne's wake, and gazed out to sea.
+
+They formed a small group in front of the door: Browne, MacAndrew,
+Maas, Jimmy Foote, the captain, and the chief-engineer.  Day was
+scarcely born, yet the small black spot upon the horizon could be
+plainly descried by every one of the party, and was momentarily growing
+larger.  Without doubt it was a man-o'-war.  What was more to the
+point, she was coming up at a good rate of speed.  The position was an
+eminently serious one, and what those on board the yacht had to decide
+was what should be done.
+
+"If she's a Russian, we're in no end of a hole," said MacAndrew; "and,
+when you come to think of it, she's scarcely likely to belong to any
+other nationality."
+
+"Let us come into the smoking-room and talk it over," replied Browne;
+and as he spoke he led the way into the room he mentioned.  Once
+inside, they seated themselves, and fell to discussing the situation.
+
+"We'll presume, for the sake of argument, that she is Russian," began
+Browne.  "Now what is to be done?  Mr. M'Cartney," he added, turning to
+the chief-engineer, "what was the cause of the breakdown in your
+department?"
+
+"A bit of foul play, if I know anything about such things," replied the
+other.  "Early this morning, or last night, somebody removed the main
+crosshead-pin of the high-pressure engine."
+
+"With what result?" inquired Browne.
+
+"That we're as helpless as a log, sir," answered the chief-engineer.
+"Until it has been replaced it would be useless for us to attempt to
+get any steam out of her."
+
+"But surely you have some duplicate pins," said Browne a little
+testily.  "Why not put one in, and then let us get ahead again without
+further loss of time?"
+
+"For the simple reason, sir, that all the duplicates have been taken
+too," the old man returned.  "Whoever worked the plot must have the run
+of the ship at his fingers'-ends.  I only wish I could lay my hands
+upon him, that's all.  I'd make him smart, or my name's not M'Cartney."
+
+"Surely such an important point can easily be ascertained," remarked
+Maas.  "Will you leave it to me to make inquiries?"
+
+"Oh, don't you trouble," responded Browne.  "I shall sift the matter
+myself later on."  As he said this he noticed that Jimmy Foote had not
+entered the smoking-room with them.  In an idle sort of a way he
+wondered at his absence.
+
+"How long will it take you to repair the damage, do you think?" Browne
+inquired of the chief-engineer.
+
+"Well, sir, it all depends upon circumstances," said that officer.  "If
+we find the duplicate pins we can do it in less than an hour; if we
+cannot, it may take us twelve hours, and it may take us twenty-four."
+
+"And how long do you think it will be before that boat comes up?" asked
+Browne, turning to the captain.
+
+"Oh, a good hour at least, sir," the captain replied.  "She has seen
+us; and I'm afraid it would be of no use our even thinking of trying to
+get away from her."
+
+"But how do you know that she wants us?" Maas inquired.  "Being aware
+of our own guilt, we naturally presume she knows it too.  As
+Shakespeare says, 'Conscience doth make cowards of us all.'"
+
+"I don't think there can be very much doubt, but that she's after us,"
+said Browne lugubriously.  "Her appearance at such a time is rather too
+much of a coincidence.  Well, Mr. M'Cartney, you'd better get to work
+as soon as possible.  In the meantime, Captain Mason, keep your eye on
+yonder vessel, and let me know how she progresses.  We," he continued,
+turning to MacAndrew and Maas, "must endeavour to find some place in
+which to hide Monsieur Petrovitch, should the commanding officer take
+it into his head to send a boat to search the ship."
+
+The captain and the engineer rose and left the room; and, when the door
+had closed behind them, the others sat down to the consideration of the
+problem, which Browne had placed before them.  It was knotty in more
+points than one.  If, as Browne had the best of reasons for supposing,
+the warship was in search of them, they would hunt the yacht from stem
+to stern, from truck to keelson, before they would be satisfied that
+the man they wanted was not on board.  To allow him to be found would
+be the most disastrous thing that could possibly happen to all of them.
+But the question that had to be settled was, where he could be hidden
+with any reasonable chance of safety.  They had barely an hour in which
+to make up their minds on this point, and to stow the fugitive away
+before the man-o'-war's boat would arrive.  In vain they ransacked
+their brains.  Every hiding-place they hit upon seemed to have some
+disadvantage.
+
+"The only place I can think of," said Maas, who was lolling in a corner
+smoking a cigarette, "would be in one of these lockers.  He might
+manage to crouch in it, and they would scarcely think of looking for
+him there."
+
+"It would be one of the first they would try," retorted MacAndrew
+scornfully.  "No, Mr. Browne; the only spot I can think of is in the
+tunnel of the tail shaft.  We might squeeze him in there, and I could
+go with him to take care that he makes no noise."
+
+"The very idea," Browne replied.  "There's plenty of room, and no one
+would ever suspect his presence there.  If you will take charge of him,
+and get him down there at once, I will go off and see Miss Petrovitch,
+and tell her what has happened, and what we intend to do."
+
+"And is there nothing I can do to help?" Maas inquired, raising himself
+to a sitting posture.
+
+"Oh yes," continued Browne.  "You can keep your eye on the warship, and
+warn us when she gets too close to be pleasant.  By the way, I must
+confess I should like to know where Jimmy Foote is.  It's not like him
+to be out of the way, when there's trouble in the wind."
+
+Without waiting for a reply, he ran down the companion-ladder and made
+his way along the saloon in the direction of Katherine's cabin.  On
+reaching it he rapped upon the panel of the door, and bade Katherine
+dress as quickly as possible, and come to him in the saloon.  The girl
+must have gathered from his voice that something very serious had
+occurred, for it was not long before she made her appearance with a
+scared look upon her face.
+
+"What has happened?" she asked.  "I can see something is the matter.
+Please tell me everything."
+
+"Something very unpleasant," Browne replied.  "In the first place, some
+evilly-disposed person has tampered with the engines so that we cannot
+go ahead for the present; but, worse than that, a
+man-o'-war--presumably a Russian--has come up over the horizon, and is
+steaming towards us."
+
+"A Russian man-o'-war?" she exclaimed, with a look of terror in her
+eyes.  "Do you mean that she has come after us?"
+
+"I cannot speak positively, of course," said Browne, "but since she is
+here, it looks very much like it."
+
+"Oh, Jack, Jack," she cried excitedly, "what did I tell you at the
+beginning?  This is all my fault.  I told you I should bring trouble
+and disgrace upon you.  Now my words have come true."
+
+"You have done nothing of the kind," Browne answered.  "There is
+treachery aboard, otherwise this would never have happened."
+
+Afterwards, when he came to think it all over, it struck Browne as a
+remarkable fact that on this occasion her first thought was not for her
+father, as was her usual custom, but for himself.  What did this mean?
+Had she been disappointed in her parent, as he had half-expected she
+would be?  Her quick womanly intuition must have told her what was
+passing in his mind, for her face suddenly flushed scarlet, and,
+clenching her hands together, she said slowly and deliberately, as if
+the question were being wrung from her, and she were repeating
+something she had no desire to say:--
+
+"But if it is a Russian man-o'-war, what will become of my poor father?"
+
+"We are going to hide him," returned Browne.  "MacAndrew has taken him
+below to a certain place where he will be quite safe.  He will remain
+there, while the ship is in sight, and rejoin us when she has
+disappeared again.  Believe me, dear, they shall not get him, whatever
+happens."
+
+There was a little pause, and then Katherine said, as if she were
+following up the conversation:--
+
+"It would be too cruel if he were to be captured, just as he has got
+away."
+
+"He shall not be captured; never fear," continued Browne.  "And now,
+dear, you had better go and tell Madame Bernstein all that has
+happened.  I think you had better both remain in your cabins for the
+present.  When the Russian officer arrives, if all turns out as I am
+very much afraid it will, I will ask you to dress and come on deck, for
+they will ask to be allowed to search your cabins for a certainty."
+
+"I will go to Madame at once," she answered; "but I think----"
+
+She was about to say more when a footstep sounded upon the
+companion-ladder, and a moment later Jimmy Foote, his face surcharged
+with excitement, looked down upon them.
+
+"For heaven's sake, Browne," he cried, as he held on to the brass
+hand-rail, "come up to the smoking-room at once!  There is not a moment
+to lose."
+
+"What on earth has happened?" Browne inquired, as he left Katherine's
+side and bounded up the ladder.
+
+"Just what I suspected," said Jimmy.  "I never could have believed such
+villainy could be possible."
+
+Having reached the deck, they hastened towards the smoking-room.  As he
+did so, Browne glanced out to sea, and noticed that the man-o'-war was
+now so close that her hull could plainly be distinguished.  At most she
+could not be more than eight or nine miles away.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII
+
+It was a curious sight that met Browne's gaze, when he entered the snug
+little cabin, in which he and his friends had spent so many happy hours
+together.  The skipper was standing near the door, M'Cartney was next
+to him, the second engineer in the corner opposite, and half-seated,
+half-forced down on the cushioned locker under the starboard port-hole
+was Maas, with MacAndrew, revolver in hand, leaning over him.  Browne
+glanced from one to another of the group, but failed to take in the
+situation.
+
+"What does this mean?" he cried, and, as he did so, he looked at Jimmy
+Foote, as if for explanation.
+
+"It's a bad business, Browne, old chap," Jimmy replied; "a very bad
+business.  I wish to goodness I had not to say anything to you about
+it.  But it must be done, and there is very little time in which to do
+it.  While you were away on shore a small incident occurred which
+aroused my suspicions.  I determined to watch, and did so, with the
+result that they were confirmed.  I saw that our friend Maas was a good
+deal more familiar with your officers and crew than I thought was good,
+either for them or for himself.  I did not know he was the traitorous
+cur he is."
+
+By this time Maas's usual sallow face was ashen pale.  His lips seemed
+to be framing words which were never spoken.
+
+"For heaven's sake, Foote," cried Browne, in an agony of impatience,
+"get on with what you have to say!  What have you discovered?"
+
+Jimmy turned to the second engineer, who was almost as pale as Maas.
+"Tell him everything," he said; "and see that you speak the truth."
+
+"I scarcely know how to tell you, sir," the young fellow answered.  "I
+only wish I'd never lived to see this day.  What made me do it I don't
+know; but he, Mr. Maas there, got round me, sir, and--well, the long
+and short of it is, I gave in to him, and did what you know."
+
+"You mean, I suppose, that you and he between you are responsible for
+this break-down in the engine-room this morning?  Is this so?"
+
+"Yes, sir," the man admitted.
+
+"And, pray, what reason did Mr. Maas give you for desiring you to do
+this?"
+
+"He told me, sir," the young man continued, "that he had your interests
+at heart.  He said he happened to know that, if you had started for
+Japan at once, as you proposed, you would be running the yacht into a
+certain trap.  He said that, though he had pleaded and argued with you
+in vain, you would not listen to him.  You were bent on going on.  The
+only way, he said, that he could stop you, was for me to do what I did."
+
+"Surely, my dear Browne," interposed Maas, speaking for the first time,
+"you are not going to believe this cock-and-bull story, which is quite
+without corroboration.  Your own common-sense should show you how
+absurd it is.  What can have induced this man to trump up this charge
+against me I cannot say.  Our friendship, however, should be proof
+against it.  Knowing the amount of worry you have upon your shoulders
+at the present time, I have no desire to add to it; at the same time, I
+cannot permit your servant here to insult me before your face."
+
+Browne took no notice of what he said.  Turning to the engineer, he
+continued:--
+
+"How much did Mr. Maas offer you, or what inducement did he bring to
+bear, to get you to do what you did?"
+
+"He offered me five hundred pounds, sir," the other returned.  "I told
+him, however, that I wouldn't take his money.  You have been very good
+to me, sir, and I did not want to be paid for doing, what I thought was
+a kindness to you.  It wasn't until Mr. M'Cartney told me about that
+cruiser having put in an appearance, that I saw what I had been led
+into doing.  Then I went straight to him and made a clean breast of
+everything."
+
+"It was the best course you could have pursued," said Browne, "and I
+shall remember it, when I come to deal with your case later on.  In the
+meantime, gentlemen, what are we to do?"
+
+As he spoke the second officer descended from the bridge and made his
+appearance at the cabin door.
+
+"The cruiser, sir, has signalled that she intends sending a boat," he
+reported, touching his cap.
+
+"Very good," answered Browne; and when the officer had taken his
+departure he turned to Maas.
+
+"So it is as we suspected," he began, very slowly and deliberately.
+"While we have been trusting you with our secret, you have been playing
+the traitor all round.  Maas, I can scarcely believe it.  I did not
+think a man could fall so low.  However, there is no time to talk of
+that now.  Come, gentlemen, what are we to do?"
+
+Ever since the second officer had announced that the man-o'-war was
+about to send a boat, Maas had undergone a complete change.  Though he
+had been found out, he still felt himself to be master of the
+situation; and with every minute's grace his pluck returned to him.
+Springing to his feet, he cried:--
+
+"You ask what you should do, do you?  Then I will tell you.  You can do
+nothing at all.  You are in my power, one and all.  Remember that I
+represent the Russian Government, and, if you attempt anything against
+my safety, I shall place myself in the hands of the commander of the
+cruiser you can see over there.  You must surely see that the game is
+hopeless, and that further resistance would be as foolish as it would
+be futile."
+
+"Well, if anybody had told me----" Browne heard Jimmy remark; then
+MacAndrew struck in:--
+
+"I think I take in the position," he said.  "I have met with a similar
+case once before.  Perhaps you would not mind leaving it in my hands,
+Mr. Browne?"
+
+"What do you mean to do?" inquired Browne.
+
+"I will very soon show you," replied MacAndrew.  "Perhaps Mr. Foote
+will assist us?"
+
+"I will do anything you like to be even with him," returned Jimmy
+vindictively.
+
+"That's the sort of talk," answered MacAndrew.  "Now let us make our
+way to his cabin.  Mr. Maas, I shall have to trouble you to accompany
+us."
+
+"I'll do nothing of the sort," responded Maas.  "I decline to be left
+alone with you."
+
+"I'm very much afraid you've no option," remarked MacAndrew calmly; and
+as he spoke he gave a little significant twist to the revolver he held
+in his hand.  "Come, sir," he continued more sternly than he had yet
+spoken.  "On to your feet, if you please.  Remember you are playing
+with desperate men.  If by hesitating you get into trouble, you will
+have only yourself to thank.  Your friend, the cruiser, is still a
+couple of miles away, as you must be aware, and a revolver-shot would
+scarcely be heard as far."
+
+Seeing that there was nothing for it but to obey, Maas rose to his feet
+and passed out of the smoking-room, along the deck, and down the saloon
+companion-ladder to his own cabin.  Once there, MacAndrew handed his
+revolver to Jimmy, with the request that he would be good enough to
+watch the prisoner during his absence, and to put a bullet through his
+skull if he should attempt to escape or give the alarm.
+
+"For my part," resumed MacAndrew, "I'm going to test the resources of
+Mr. Browne's medicine-chest."
+
+Five minutes later he returned with an ounce or so of some dark fluid
+in a graduating-glass.
+
+"Good heavens!  You're surely not going to poison him," exclaimed
+Browne; while Maas stared at the glass with frightened eyes.
+
+"Poison him?" answered MacAndrew coolly.  "My dear fellow, is it likely
+I should do anything so absurd?  No; I am simply going to place him in
+a position of safety, so that he cannot harm us during the time the
+warship is in sight.  Now, Mr. Maas, I shall have to trouble you to
+swallow this."
+
+"I'll do nothing of the kind," asserted Maas sturdily.  "You shall not
+persuade me to put my lips to it."
+
+"In that case, I'm afraid there will very probably be trouble," replied
+MacAndrew.  "If I were you, sir, I should make up my mind to the
+inevitable.  Remember there are unpleasant arguments we could bring to
+bear, should you still remain obdurate."
+
+Maas gasped for breath.  He looked right and left, as if for some
+loophole of escape, but could find none.  He was surrounded on every
+side by inexorable faces, which gazed upon him without pity or remorse,
+while on the table before him stood the small glass half-full of the
+dark-coloured liquid.
+
+"Come, sir," said MacAndrew, "I shall be glad if you would toast us.
+Let me remind you that there is no time to lose.  It always pains me,
+in cases like the present, to have to apply physical argument when
+moral might produce the same result.  In the event of your not
+drinking, as I request, perhaps Mr. Browne will be kind enough to
+permit us the use of his galley fire.  The method, I admit, is
+barbarous; nevertheless it is occasionally effective."
+
+The perspiration rolled down Maas's cheeks.  Bantering as MacAndrew's
+tones were, he could still see that he was in deadly earnest.
+
+Browne glanced out of the port-hole, and noticed that the man-o'-war's
+boat had left its own vessel.  In less than a quarter of an hour it
+would be alongside, and then----  But he did not like to think of what
+would happen then.
+
+"I will give you one more minute in which to drink it," rejoined
+MacAndrew, taking his watch from his pocket.  "If you do not do so then
+you must be prepared to take the consequences."
+
+Silence fell upon the group for a space, during which a man might
+perhaps have counted twenty.
+
+"Half a minute," murmured MacAndrew, and Browne's heart beat so
+violently that it almost choked him.
+
+"Three-quarters of a minute," continued MacAndrew.  "Mr. Foote, would
+you mind giving me the revolver and standing by that door?  I am afraid
+that we shall be driven into a tussle."
+
+Jimmy did as he was requested, and another pause ensued.
+
+"Time's up," said MacAndrew, shutting his watch with a click.  "Now we
+must act.  Mr. Browne, take his legs if you please."
+
+They moved towards their victim, who shrank into a corner.
+
+"I give in!" he cried at last, affecting a calmness he was far from
+feeling.  "Since there is no other way out of it, I will do as you
+desire, provided you will give me your assurance that the stuff is
+harmless."
+
+"It is quite harmless," replied MacAndrew; and then, with an air of
+braggadocio that could be easily seen was assumed, Maas tossed off the
+decoction, and, having done so, seated himself on the settee.  A
+quarter of an hour later he was in his bunk, fast asleep, and Jimmy was
+sitting by his side in the capacity of sick-nurse.
+
+"You had better bear in mind the fact that he has been ill for the past
+week," MacAndrew remarked, before he left the cabin.  "He caught a
+chill through falling asleep on deck, and pneumonia has set in.  Now I
+shall retire to join my friend in the tunnel, and leave you to your own
+devices.  Don't forget to let me know, Mr. Browne, as soon as the
+Russian has bidden you farewell."
+
+"You may depend on me," Browne answered; and, as he spoke, the captain
+hailed him from the deck above, to inform him that the boat was coming
+alongside.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX
+
+It would be idle to say that Browne will never forget his feelings,
+when the hail reached him from the deck, announcing the fact that a
+boat from the Russian man-o'-war was coming alongside.  It was the most
+desperate moment of his life; and there are times, even now, when only
+to dream of it is sufficient to bring him wide awake with a cold sweat
+upon his forehead.  As he heard it, he turned to Jimmy, who was leaning
+over the bunk in which Maas lay, and said anxiously:--
+
+"I suppose I may leave him to you, Jimmy?  You will take care that they
+don't get any information out of him?"
+
+"You may trust me for that," Jimmy replied, and there was a look of
+determination in his face as he said it, that boded ill for any attempt
+Maas might make to communicate with the enemy.  "I hope for his own
+sake that he won't wake while they are here.  Jack, my son, this is
+going to be a big deal for all of us.  Keep your head while they're
+aboard, or you'll be in Queer Street."
+
+Thereupon they shook hands solemnly.
+
+"Thank Heaven, I've got you with me, old chap," continued Browne
+fervently.  "You don't know what a relief it is to me to know that.
+Now I must go and warn Miss Petrovitch and Madame Bernstein."
+
+"Good-bye, old fellow," said Foote.  "Good luck go with you."
+
+Browne glanced again at Maas, then he went out, closing the door behind
+him, and made his way through the saloon in the direction of
+Katherine's cabin.  He had scarcely knocked at the door before she
+opened it.  From the pallor of her face he guessed that she knew
+something of what was happening.  This proved to be so; for Browne
+afterwards discovered that the cruiser had all the time been plainly
+visible from her port-hole.
+
+"I have just seen a boat pass," she said.  "Have they come to search
+the yacht?"
+
+"Yes," answered Browne.  "You need not be afraid, however; they will
+not find him.  He is hidden in a place where they would never think of
+looking; and, to make assurance doubly sure, MacAndrew is with him."
+
+"But what was that noise I heard just now?  It sounded as if you were
+struggling with some one, and trying to drag him down into the saloon."
+
+Browne informed her in a few brief words of what had occurred, and bade
+her, in case she should be questioned, keep up the fiction that Maas
+was seriously ill.  Then, bidding her inform Madame Bernstein of what
+was going on, he left her and returned to the deck.  Simultaneously
+with his arrival the Russian officer made his appearance at the
+gangway.  He was a tall, handsome man of about thirty years of age.
+Having reached the deck, he looked about him as if he scarcely knew
+whom to address; then, seeing that the captain looked to Browne as if
+for instructions, he saluted him, and said in French:--
+
+"Your pardon, monsieur, but this is the yacht _Lotus Blossom_, is it
+not?"
+
+"It is," replied Browne, "and I am the owner.  What can I have the
+pleasure of doing for you?  You find us in rather a fix.  We have had a
+break-down in the engine-room, and, as you can see for yourself, it has
+left us in a by no means pleasant position."
+
+"I have to present the compliments of my captain to you, and to request
+that you will permit me to overhaul your vessel."
+
+"To overhaul my vessel!" cried Browne.  "Surely that is a very curious
+request For what reason do you wish to inspect her?"
+
+"I regret to say that we have heard that an attempt is being made to
+rescue an escaped convict from the island yonder.  From information
+received, it is believed he is on board your vessel."
+
+"A runaway convict on board my yacht?" exclaimed Browne in a tone that
+suggested complete surprise.  "You must excuse me if I do not
+understand you.  You surely do not suppose that I make it my business
+to go about the world, assisting convicts to escape from captivity?"
+
+"That is no business of mine," answered the officer.  "All I have to do
+is to obey my instructions.  I should, therefore, be glad if you would
+permit me to inspect your vessel."
+
+"You may do so with pleasure," said Browne.  "But let it be understood,
+before you commence, that I resent the intrusion, and shall,
+immediately on my return to civilization, place the matter before my
+Government to act as they think best.  You have, of course, considered
+what the consequences of your action will be?"
+
+"It is not my business to think of the consequences," responded the
+other.  "All I have to do is to obey the orders I receive.  May I
+therefore trouble you to permit me to carry them out?  I should be
+loath to have to signal to my ship for assistance."
+
+"Such a course will not be necessary," rejoined Browne, with all the
+dignity of which he was master.  "If you persist in your absurd demand,
+I shall raise no further objection.  Only, I should be glad if you
+could do so with as little delay as possible.  I have a friend below
+who is seriously ill, and I am anxious to return to him."
+
+"In that case, it would be as well for us to proceed without further
+loss of time," continued the officer.
+
+Turning to Captain Mason, who was standing beside him, Browne gave the
+necessary orders.  The Russian officer immediately called up a couple
+of hands from his boat alongside, and then, escorted by Browne, set off
+on his tour of inspection.  Commencing with the men's quarters forward,
+he searched every nook and cranny, but without success.  Then, little
+by little, they worked their way aft, exploring the officers' and
+engineers' quarters as they proceeded.  The engine-room and stoke-hole
+followed next, and it was then that Browne's anxiety commenced.  The
+convict, as he had good reason to know, was the possessor of a hacking
+cough, and should he give proof of its existence now they were ruined
+indeed.
+
+"I presume you do not wish to look into the furnaces," ironically
+remarked the chief-engineer, who had accompanied them during their
+visit to his own particular portion of the vessel.  "Should you desire
+to do so, I shall be pleased to have them opened for you."
+
+"I have no desire to look into them," answered the officer, who by this
+time was beginning to feel that he had been sent on a wild-goose chase.
+
+"In that case let us finish our inspection, and be done with it," said
+Browne.  "It is not pleasant for me, and I am sure it cannot be for
+you."  As he spoke he turned to the officer, and signed him to make his
+way up the steel ladder to the deck above.  Just as he himself was
+about to set foot on it, the sound of a smothered cough came from the
+spot where the men lay hidden, and at the same instant the officer
+stopped and looked round.  Browne felt his whole body grow cold with
+terror.  Fortunately, however, even if he had heard it, the other
+failed to place the proper construction upon it, and they left the
+engine-room without further comment.  Then, having explored the
+smoking-room and deck-house, they made their way aft to the
+drawing-room by way of the main companion-ladder.
+
+"I have two ladies on board, monsieur," said Browne as they reached the
+drawing-room and stood for a moment looking about them, "also the sick
+friend of whom I spoke to you just now.  Perhaps you would not mind
+waiving your right to inspect their cabins."
+
+"Monsieur," returned the officer, "I must see every cabin.  There must
+be no exceptions."
+
+"In that case," replied Browne, "there is no more to be said.  Will you
+be kind enough to accompany me?"
+
+So saying, he led him forward a few paces, and, having shown him the
+pantry and stewards' quarters, the storerooms, bathrooms, and other
+domestic offices, took him to the cabin in which Maas was undergoing
+his involuntary confinement.  Browne knocked softly upon the door, and
+a moment later Jimmy Foote opened it, with his finger on his lips as if
+to warn them to be silent.
+
+"Hush!" he whispered.  "Don't wake him; he has been asleep for nearly
+half an hour, and it will do him a world of good."
+
+Browne translated this speech to the officer, and, when he had done so,
+they entered and approached the bedside.  The representative of
+Imperial Russia looked down upon Maas, who was sleeping as placidly as
+a little child; at the same time his eyes took in the rows of medicine
+bottles on the table and all the usual paraphernalia of a sick-room.
+It was plain not only, that he imagined Jimmy Foote to be the doctor in
+charge, but also that he knew nothing of the identity of the man before
+him.
+
+"What is the matter with him?" he asked a little suspiciously of Browne.
+
+"Pneumonia, following a severe chill," the other replied.  "We want to
+get him down to Yokohama as quickly as possible in order that we may
+place him in the hospital there.  I presume you are satisfied that he
+is not the man you want?"
+
+The officer nodded his head.  "Quite satisfied," he answered
+emphatically.  "The man I want is a little, old fellow with red hair.
+He is thirty years this gentleman's senior."
+
+Thereupon they passed out of the cabin again, and made their way along
+the alley-way towards the drawing-room once more.
+
+When they reached it they found Katherine and Madame Bernstein awaiting
+them there.  Browne, in a tone of apology, explained the reason of the
+officer's visit.
+
+"However, I hope soon to be able to convince him that his suspicions
+are unfounded," he said in conclusion.  "We have searched every portion
+of the yacht, and he has not so far discovered the man he wants."
+
+"Do you say that the person you are looking for is a Russian convict?"
+continued Madame Bernstein, who felt that she must say something in
+order to cover the look of fear, that was spreading over Katherine's
+face.
+
+"Yes, Madame," the officer replied.  "He is a most dangerous person,
+who in his time has caused the police an infinity of trouble."
+
+"A Nihilist, I suppose?" remarked Browne, as if he thought that that
+point might be taken for granted.
+
+"Indeed, no," continued the officer.  "His name is Kleinkopf, and he
+is, or rather was, the most noted diamond-thief in Europe."
+
+"What?" cried Browne, startled out of himself by what the other said.
+"What do you mean?  A diamond----"
+
+What he was about to add must for ever remain a mystery, for at that
+moment Madame Bernstein uttered a little cry and fell forward against
+the table in a dead faint.  With a face as ashen as a cere-cloth,
+Katherine ran to her assistance, and Browne followed her example.
+Together they raised her and carried her to a seat.
+
+[Illustration: "Katherine ran to her assistance."]
+
+"You see, sir, what mischief you have done," said Browne, addressing
+the Russian officer, who stood looking from one to another of them, as
+if he scarcely knew what to say or how to act.  "You have frightened
+her into a faint."
+
+Picking her up in his arms, he carried her to her cabin, and laid her
+in her bunk.  Then, resigning her to the care of Katharine and the
+stewardess, whom he had summoned to his assistance, he rejoined the
+officer outside.
+
+"If you will come with me, sir," he began, "I will show you the
+remainder of the vessel, and then I think you will be able to return to
+your ship and inform your commander that, on this occasion, at least,
+he has committed an egregious blunder, of which he will hear more anon."
+
+"I am at monsieur's disposal," replied the officer; and together they
+entered Katherine's cabin.  Needless to say there was no sign of any
+fugitive there.  Browne's own cabin followed next, with the same
+result.  At last they reached the deck once more.
+
+"You are satisfied, I presume, sir, that the man you want is not on
+board my yacht?" asked Browne, with considerable hauteur.
+
+"Quite satisfied," replied the other.  "And yet I can assure you,
+monsieur, that we had the best reasons for believing that you were
+conniving at his escape."
+
+"I am very much obliged to you, I am sure," retorted Browne.  "I fancy,
+however, that, even presuming I contemplated anything of the sort, I
+have convinced you that I have not carried it out yet.  And now I have
+the honour to wish you a very good morning.  My engineer informs me
+that the break-down in the engine-room has been repaired; and, if you
+have any suspicions left, you will have the satisfaction of seeing us
+get under way without further delay.  I tell you this in case you
+should imagine, that I intend hanging about here, in the hope of
+picking up the man to whom you allude.  By the way, did you say that
+his name is Kleinkopf, and that he was originally a diamond-thief?"
+
+"He was the most expert diamond-thief in Europe, monsieur," the officer
+replied.  "Now, permit me to offer my apologies for the trouble to
+which I have put you, and to bid you farewell.  At the same time, if
+you will allow me to do so, I will give you a little advice.  If I were
+in your place I should leave this coast as soon as possible."
+
+"I shall do so within a quarter of an hour, at latest," Browne answered.
+
+With that the officer saluted once more and disappeared down the
+companion-ladder.  A few moments later his boat was to be seen making
+her way in the direction of the man-of-war.  Browne stood and watched
+her, scarcely able to realize that all danger was now passed and clone
+with.  Then he turned to go in search of his friends, and as he did so
+a thought came into his mind, and brought him to a standstill once
+more.  What could the officer have meant when he had said that the
+escaped convict's name was Kleinkopf, and that he was not a Nihilist,
+as they had been informed, but a diamond-thief; not a man who plotted
+and risked his life for the welfare of his country, but a common felon,
+who lived by defrauding the general public?  Was it possible that
+Katherine's father could have been such a man?  No; a thousand times
+no!  He would never believe such a thing.  But if it were not so, what
+did it all mean?  Madame Bernstein had recognised the fugitive as
+Katherine's father, and the man himself had rejoiced at being with his
+daughter again after so long a separation.  There was a mystery
+somewhere, upon which he would have to be enlightened before very long.
+
+As he arrived at this conclusion Captain Mason approached him.
+
+"The chief-engineer reports that all is ready, sir," he said.  "If you
+wish it we can get under way at once."
+
+"The sooner the better, Mason," Browne replied.  "I shall not be happy
+until we have put the horizon between ourselves and that gentleman over
+there."
+
+He nodded in the direction of the cruiser, which the boat had just
+reached.
+
+"I agree with you, sir," answered the captain.  "I will get the anchor
+away at once."
+
+"Before you do so, Mason," said Browne, "just get those two men out of
+the tunnel and send them aft.  Don't let them come on deck whatever you
+do.  They're certain to have their glasses on us over yonder."
+
+"Very good, sir," Mason returned, and went forward to execute his
+errand.
+
+Anxious as he was to go below, Browne did not leave the deck until the
+screw had commenced to revolve.  When he did, it was with a great fear
+in his heart--one that he would have found it extremely difficult
+either to describe or to account for.  As he argued with himself, it
+was extremely unlikely that the Russian Authorities would make a
+mistake; and yet, if they did not, why had Madame Bernstein always been
+so anxious to assure Katherine that the man, he had saved, was her
+father?  And, what was still more important, why had she fainted that
+morning when the officer had given his information concerning the
+fugitive?  When he entered the drawing-room, to his surprise, he found
+Katherine alone there.  Her face was still very white, and it struck
+Browne that she had been crying.
+
+"What is the matter, dear?" he inquired, as he placed his arm round her
+and drew her towards him.  "Why do you look so troubled?"
+
+"I do not know," she answered, burying her face in his shoulder, "but I
+am very, very unhappy."
+
+He did his best to soothe her, but without success.  A weight was
+pressing upon her mind, and until it was removed relief would be
+impossible.  For some reason Browne made no inquiry after Madame's
+condition.  It seemed, for the moment, as if he had forgotten her very
+existence.  At last he bade Katherine put on her hat and accompany him
+to the deck.  The fresh air would revive her, he said.  She accordingly
+departed to her cabin, and in five minutes rejoined him.  In the
+meanwhile Browne had visited the cabin on the starboard side, and had
+informed Foote of all that had transpired.  Maas was still sleeping
+quietly in his bunk.
+
+"Thank goodness they've cleared out," said Jimmy.  "Now our friend here
+can wake up as soon as he pleases."
+
+"The sooner the better," Browne replied.  "In the meantime, Jimmy, I've
+something awfully important to say to you."
+
+In a few words Browne told him what he had discovered, and what he
+suspected.  Foote listened with attention, and when he had finished,
+scratched his chin and regarded his own face in the mirror opposite,
+looking the very figure and picture of perplexity.
+
+"What did I always tell you?" he remarked at last.  "I was as certain
+then, as I am now, that the woman was playing some underhand game,
+though what it is I cannot say.  However, I'll find out somehow or
+another.  Upon my word, when we return to civilization, I think I shall
+embark upon the career of a private inquiry agent."
+
+Feeling that there was nothing more to be said upon the subject just
+then, Browne left him, and returned to the drawing-room in search of
+Katherine.  He found her ready to accompany him to the deck above.
+
+"The fresh air will soon bring the roses back to your cheeks," he
+whispered, as they made their way along the drawing-room in the
+direction of the companion-ladder.
+
+She was about to reply, when the sound of footsteps reached them from
+the port alley-way, and, before they had set foot upon the first step,
+MacAndrew and the fugitive stood before them.  Browne noticed that
+Katherine instinctively shrank away from the latter.  He accordingly
+slipped his arm round her, and, telling MacAndrew that he would like to
+speak to him in a few minutes, led her to the deck above.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXX
+
+Their first business when they reached the deck was to glance in the
+direction whence they had last seen the cruiser.  Then she had been a
+living and very present reality to them; now she was only a tiny speck
+upon the horizon, and in a quarter of an hour, or even less, she would
+have vanished altogether.  They made their way aft to the taffrail, and
+stood there leaning on the rail, looking at her.  Both felt that it was
+a crisis in their lives, that had to be tided over, and knew that, if
+ever they desired to be happy together, they must fight the next ten
+minutes on their merits.  For this reason, perhaps, they began by being
+unusually silent.  It was Katherine who spoke first.
+
+"Dearest," she commenced very slowly, "I want you to listen to me and
+not to speak until I have finished.  I have something to say to you,
+and I don't quite know how to say it.  I don't want you to think that I
+am capricious, or that I think only of myself.  In this I am thinking
+of you, and of your happiness only."
+
+"I can quite believe that," Browne replied, trying to force down the
+lump that was rising in his throat.  "But I must hear you out before I
+can say more.  What is it you have to say to me?"
+
+"I want you"--here she paused as if she were fighting for breath--"I
+want you to give up any idea of marrying me, and to put me ashore at
+the first port at which you call.  Will you do this?"
+
+Nearly a minute elapsed before Browne answered.  When he did his voice
+was curiously husky.
+
+"Katherine," he said, "this is just like you.  It is like your noble
+nature to try and make my path smoother, when your own is so difficult
+that you can scarcely climb it.  But you don't, surely, suppose that I
+should do what you ask--that I should give you up and allow you to go
+out of my life altogether, just because you have been tricked as I have
+been?"
+
+She glanced up at him with a face as white as the foam upon which they
+looked.  What she would have replied I cannot say; but at that moment
+MacAndrew, accompanied by Jimmy Foote, appeared on deck.  The latter
+approached them and asked Browne if he could spare him a few minutes.
+Not being averse to any proposal, that would tend to mitigate the
+severity of the ordeal he was then passing through, Browne consented.
+
+"What is it you want with me?" he asked, as savagely as if he were
+being deliberately wronged.  "For Heaven's sake, Jimmy, be easy with
+me!  You can have no idea what the strain of the last few minutes has
+been."
+
+"I know everything, my son," rejoined Jimmy quietly.  "Do you think I
+haven't been watching you of late?  That is exactly what I am here for.
+Poor old boy, you've been on the rack a shade too long lately; but I
+think I can put that right if you'll only let me.  I've great news for
+you."
+
+"I don't know what sort of news you can have that will be acceptable to
+me," replied Browne lugubriously.  "I'm carrying about as much just now
+as I can possibly manage.  What is it?"
+
+"Do you think you're altogether fit to hear it?" he asked.  "And what
+about Miss Petrovitch?  Can you leave her for a few moments?"
+
+"I will speak to her," Browne answered, and accordingly went back to
+Katherine.  A moment later he rejoined Foote.
+
+"Now then, what is it?" he cried almost fiercely.  "What fresh
+treachery am I to discover?"
+
+"Come to the smoking-room," Jimmy began.  "I can't tell you here on
+deck, with all the world trying to overhear what I have to say."
+
+When they reached the cabin in question Browne discovered MacAndrew
+there, sitting on one of the marble tables and smoking a cigarette.
+
+"I don't know what you think about it, Mr. Browne," remarked the
+latter; "but it strikes me now, that we have come very well out of that
+little encounter with our Muscovite friend over yonder.  The idea
+they've got in their heads is that the runaway and myself are not on
+board; and if I know anything of their tactics, they will patrol the
+coast for the next week or ten days in the expectation of your coming
+back to pick us up."
+
+"I wish them joy of their stay," Browne replied.  "By the time they're
+tired of it we shall be safely out of reach.  But what is it you have
+to say to me, Jimmy?  You didn't bring me here to talk about the
+cruiser, I suppose?"
+
+"I did not," said Jimmy, with a great show of importance.  "I brought
+you to talk about something far more interesting.  Look here, old man,
+I don't, of course, know what your feelings may be; but I've got a sort
+of a notion that--well, to put it in plain words--that you're none too
+pleased with your prospective father-in-law.  He doesn't quite come up
+to your idea of the man whom you had been told suffered martyrdom for
+his country's good--eh?"
+
+"I have never said that I disapproved of him," Browne retorted.  "I
+don't know why you should have got this notion into your head."
+
+"You're very loyal, I must say, old man," continued Jimmy; "but that
+cat won't fight--not for an instant.  Any one could see that.  No, no;
+I know as well as if you had told me, that you're as miserable as a man
+can well be, and so is Miss Petrovitch.  I don't wonder at it.  I
+expect I should be as bad if I were likely to be blessed with such a
+papa.  I should be inclined to wish him back again in the wilds of
+Saghalien."
+
+"Oh, for Heaven's sake, get on with what you've got to say!" cried
+Browne.  "Why do you keep me on the rack like this?"
+
+Jimmy, however, was not to be hurried.  He had never had such a hand to
+play before, and he was determined to make the most of it.
+
+"It was MacAndrew there who made the discovery," he replied.  "I only
+came in at the end, like the Greek Chorus, to explain things.  The fact
+of the matter is, Browne, when our friend here and the little
+red-haired gentleman were shut up together in the tunnel, the former
+elicited the information (how he managed it I am not prepared to say)
+that the name of the ex-convict is not Polowski or Petrovitch, but
+Kleinkopf; that he is not a Nihilist, as we have been led to believe,
+but a diamond-thief of the first water."
+
+He paused to hear what Browne would say, and, if the truth must be
+confessed, he was mortified to find that the other betrayed no sort of
+surprise.
+
+"I know all that," answered his friend.  "Have you discovered nothing
+else?"
+
+"A heap more," continued Jimmy; "but perhaps you know that, too.  Are
+you aware that the convict is the famous Red Rat, who once defied the
+united police of Europe?  Well, he is!  He is also--and, mark you, this
+is the greatest point of all--he is no less a person than _Madame
+Bernstein's husband_!"
+
+"Madame Bernstein's husband?" cried Browne, in stupefied surprise.
+"What on earth do you mean by that?  I warn you not to joke with me.
+I'm not in the humour for it."
+
+"I'm not joking," Jimmy returned, with all gravity.  "I'm telling you
+this in deadly earnest.  The Red Rat is Madame Bernstein's husband.  He
+was sentenced to transportation for life in St. Petersburg, was sent to
+Siberia, and later on was drafted to Saghalien."
+
+"Is this true, MacAndrew?" inquired Browne.  "You should know."
+
+"It is quite true," said MacAndrew.  "For my part, I always thought he
+was the man you were trying to rescue.  If you will look at it you will
+find that he tallies exactly with Madame's description of the man we
+wanted."
+
+"Oh heavens! how we have been deceived!" groaned Browne.  Then, as
+another thought struck him, he added, "But if this is so, then Miss
+Petrovitch's father is still in captivity."
+
+"No," said MacAndrew; "he has escaped."
+
+"What do you mean?  When did he escape?"
+
+"He is dead.  He died early last year."
+
+A silence that lasted upwards of five minutes fell upon the trio.
+
+"The more I think of it the farther I am from understanding it," Browne
+said at last.  "Why should I have been singled out for the task of
+rescuing this man, in whom I don't take the least bit of interest?"
+
+"Because you are rich," muttered Jimmy.  "Why, my dear fellow, it's all
+as plain as daylight, now that we've got the key to the puzzle.  Madame
+was aware that Miss Petrovitch would do anything to rescue her father,
+and so would the man she loved.  Therefore, when you, with your money,
+your influence, and, above all, your yacht, came upon the scene, she
+took advantage of the opportunity Providence had sent her, and laid her
+plans accordingly.  You know the result."
+
+"And while Miss Petrovitch has been wearing her heart out with anxiety
+to save her father, this heartless woman has been deceiving her--to
+whom she owes everything--and adapting our means to secure her own
+ends."
+
+"It looks like it--does it not?" said Jimmy.  "Now, what do you intend
+doing?  Remember, you have two traitors to deal with--Madame Bernstein
+and Mr. Maas."
+
+"I don't know what to do," replied poor Browne, "It is sufficiently
+vexatious.  I shall have to tell Miss Petrovitch, and it will break her
+heart.  As for Maas, we must consider what is best to be done with him.
+I'll have no mercy on the brute."
+
+"Oh yes, you will," argued Jimmy.  "Whatever you are, you are not
+vindictive, Jack.  Don't try to make me believe you are."
+
+Leaving the two men together, Browne went in search of his sweetheart.
+When he found her, he summoned up all the courage he possessed and told
+her everything from the beginning to the end.  She was braver than he
+had expected, and heard him out without comment.  Only when he had
+finished, she rose from her seat, and asked him to excuse her, saying
+that she would go to her cabin for a little while.
+
+A little before sunset that afternoon a small brig was sighted, five
+miles or so away to the south-west.  A course was immediately shaped to
+intercept her.  Her attention having been attracted, she hove to and
+waited for the boat, that Mason warned her he was sending.  When she
+put off the third officer was in charge, and MacAndrew was sitting
+beside him in the stern sheets.  They returned in something under an
+hour, and immediately on his arrival on board MacAndrew made his way to
+the smoking-room, where he was closeted with Browne for upwards of an
+hour.  After that he went below with Jimmy Foote.
+
+The orb of day lay like a ball of fire upon the horizon when they
+reappeared.  This time they escorted no less a person than Maas
+himself, who looked as if he were scarcely awake.  Without inquiring
+for them or asking leave to bid his host and hostess farewell, he
+disappeared down the accommodation-ladder, and took his place in the
+boat alongside, and his traps were bundled in after him.  Half an hour
+later the boat returned, but this time Maas was not in her.  MacAndrew
+ascended to the deck, and once more made his way to the smoking-room.
+He found Browne and Jimmy there as before.
+
+"They will land him at Tomari in the Kuriles in three months' time," he
+reported, with what appeared to be considerable satisfaction.
+
+"Tomari is the capital of Kunashiri Island," said Jimmy, who had turned
+up a copy of the _China Sea Directory_ during the short silence that
+followed.  "It has a permanent population of about one thousand five
+hundred souls, which is largely increased in summer time by fishermen."
+
+"You are sure he will be quite safe," asked Browne.  "Scoundrel and
+traitor though he is, I shouldn't like to think that any harm would
+befall him."
+
+"You need not be afraid," replied MacAndrew.  "He is quite able to look
+after himself.  Besides, the skipper is an old friend of mine, and a
+most respectable person.  He will take every care of him, you may be
+sure.  You have paid him well enough to make it worth his while."
+
+After that, for the remainder of the voyage, the name of Maas was never
+mentioned by any of the party.  Even to this day Browne scarcely likes
+to hear it spoken.  Nor does he permit himself to dwell very often upon
+what happened a few days later, when, after a most uncomfortable
+interval, the yacht rounded Hakodate Headland and came to an anchor in
+the harbour.
+
+"Leave everything to me," said MacAndrew, when he went into the
+smoking-room to bid Browne farewell.  "I know how painful an interview
+would be for you all, and I think you can very well dispense with it.
+I believe they are ready to go ashore."
+
+"In that case, let them go.  I never wish to see their faces again."
+
+"I can quite understand it; and now I must bid you farewell myself.  I
+am sorry our adventure has not turned out more successfully; but at any
+rate you have had a run for your money, and you have seen something of
+life in the Far East."
+
+"I have, indeed," said Browne.  "Now, tell me of the arrangements you
+have made concerning these two miserable people.  What will happen to
+them eventually?"
+
+"They can do as they think best," replied MacAndrew.  "They can either
+stay here or go wherever they please.  The Nippon Yusen Kwaisha Line
+call here thrice weekly; and from Yokohama you can reach any part of
+the known world."
+
+"But they are practically penniless," said Browne.  Then, taking an
+envelope from his pocket, he handed it to MacAndrew.  "If you can find
+an opportunity of delivering it, will you contrive to let them have
+this?  There is something inside that will keep the wolf from the door,
+for a time at least."
+
+MacAndrew looked at him a little curiously.  He was about to say
+something, but he checked himself, and, stowing the envelope away in
+his pocket, held out his hand.
+
+"You were not inclined to trust me when first we met; but I hope you
+are satisfied now that I have done my best for you."
+
+"I am more than satisfied," replied Browne.  "I am very grateful.  I
+wish you would let me do something to help you in return."
+
+"You _have_ helped me," MacAndrew answered.  "You have helped me
+amazingly; more perhaps than you think.  Now, good-bye, and may good
+luck and every happiness go with you."
+
+"Good-bye," said Browne; and then the tall, graceful figure passed
+along the deck in the direction of the main companion-ladder.  A few
+moments later the sound of oars reached his ears; and when they could
+no longer be heard Browne went in search of Katherine and Jimmy Foote.
+
+"Well, old man," asked the latter when the screw had begun to revolve
+once more, "what now?  What is the next thing?"
+
+"The next thing," Browne replied, seating himself beside Katherine as
+he spoke, and taking her hand, "is Yokohama, and a wedding, at which
+you shall assist in the capacity of best man."
+
+That night the lovers stood on deck, leaning against the bulwarks
+watching the moon rise from behind a bank of cloud.
+
+"Of what are you thinking, sweetheart?" Browne inquired, looking at the
+sweet face beside him.  "I wonder if I could guess."
+
+"I very much doubt it," she answered, with a sad little smile.  "You
+had better try."
+
+"You were thinking of a tiny land-locked harbour, surrounded by
+snow-capped mountains, were you not?"
+
+"Yes," she replied; "I certainly was.  I was thinking of our first
+meeting in Merok.  Oh, Jack!  Jack! how much has happened since then!"
+
+"Yes," he continued slowly.  "A great deal has happened; but at least
+there are two things for which we should be thankful."
+
+"And what are they?"
+
+"The first is that we are together, and the second is that you are not
+THE RED RAT'S DAUGHTER!"
+
+
+
+
+THE END.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Butler & Tanner, The Selwood Printing Works, Frome, and London.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Red Rat's Daughter, by Guy Boothby
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RED RAT'S DAUGHTER ***
+
+***** This file should be named 33004.txt or 33004.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/3/3/0/0/33004/
+
+Produced by Al Haines
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.